FCC ID: O3W830 PDA W/ WiFi and Bluetooth Capabilities

 

FP O User Guide for the LifeDrive Mobile Manager Copyright and Trademark 2005 palmOne, Inc. All rights reserved. palmOne, Addit, Blazer, Graffiti, HotSync, LifeDrive, Palm, Palm Powered, Palm OS, the Palm logo, and VersaMail are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to palmOne, Inc. All other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services of, their respective owners. palmOne, Inc. uses the Bluetooth wireless technology trademark under express license from Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and uses the Wi-Fi wireless technology trademark under express license from the Wi-Fi Alliance. Pocket Tunes is a trademark of NormSoft, Inc. MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 systems patent portfolio license for encoding in compliance with the MPEG-4 systems standard, except that an additional license and payment of royalties are necessary for encoding in connection with (i) data stored or replicated in physical media which is paid for on a title-by-title basis and/or (ii) data which is paid for on a title-by-title basis and is transmitted to an end user for permanent storage and/or use. Such additional license may be obtained from MPEG, LLC. See www.mpegla.com for additional details. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, GP. Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide. palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which may arise through the use of this software. palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss. IMPORTANT

Please read the End User Software License Agreement with this product before using the accompanying software program(s). Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the End User Software License Agreement. Software Download Available Palm Desktop software is supplied on a CD. If you do not have access to a CD drive for your computer, you can download Palm Desktop software from www.palmOne.com/lifedrive-userguide/

LifeDrive from palmOne ii Table of Contents About This Guide ..................................................................xxi Tips for viewing this guide.........................................................................xxi Whats in this guide? .................................................................................xxii Step-by-step instructions................................................................... xxii Links..................................................................................................... xxii Sidebars.....................................................................................................xxiii Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer ......1 Whats in the box? ........................................................................................2 System requirements ...................................................................................2 Step 1: Charging your device.......................................................................4 What you should know about your devices battery.......................... 5 Step 2: Turning on your device for the first time .......................................6 Step 3: Installing your software...................................................................7 Step 4: Connecting your device to your computer ....................................8 Switching to another desktop software application ................................10 Using user profiles......................................................................................11 Creating a user profile .........................................................................12 Synchronizing with a user profile ......................................................14 Related topics..............................................................................................17 Chapter 2: Your Mobile Manager .........................................18 Whats on my device? ................................................................................19 Front ..................................................................................................... 19 Top........................................................................................................ 21 Side....................................................................................................... 22 Back ...................................................................................................... 23 Bottom.................................................................................................. 24 Using the power switch..............................................................................25 Using the status bar....................................................................................26 LifeDrive from palmOne iii Rotating the screen.....................................................................................27 Whats on the screen? ................................................................................28 Input area ............................................................................................. 28 Application controls ............................................................................ 29 What software is on my device?................................................................30 Whats on the CD? ......................................................................................32 Related topics..............................................................................................35 Chapter 3: Moving Around in Applications.........................37 Opening applications..................................................................................38 Using Favorites.................................................................................... 38 Using Applications .............................................................................. 39 Using Files............................................................................................ 40 Working with files and folders ........................................................... 42 Sorting Files ......................................................................................... 44 Opening files and folders from within an application...................... 45 Switching between applications ........................................................ 45 Using the 5-way navigator .........................................................................46 Highlighting items ............................................................................... 47 Moving around in Favorites View ...................................................... 48 Moving around in Applications View ................................................ 48 Moving around in list screens ............................................................ 49 Moving around in entry screens ........................................................ 50 Moving around in dialog boxes ......................................................... 50 Moving around in menus ................................................................... 51 Using menus ..............................................................................................52 Using the Command stroke................................................................ 53 Using the Command toolbar .............................................................. 53 Finding information ...................................................................................54 Related topics..............................................................................................55 Chapter 4: Entering Information on Your Device ................56 How can I enter information on my device?.............................................57 Entering information with Graffiti 2 writing .............................................57 Writing in the Graffiti 2 input area ..................................................... 57 LifeDrive from palmOne iv Using full-screen writing..................................................................... 58 Writing Graffiti 2 characters ...............................................................60 Graffiti 2 alphabet................................................................................ 62 Graffiti 2 numbers ............................................................................... 63 Graffiti 2 gestures ................................................................................ 67 Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters ..................68 Graffiti 2 symbols and special characters ......................................... 69 Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts ................................................................70 Graffiti 2 ShortCuts.............................................................................. 71 Entering information with the onscreen keyboard ..................................72 Entering info from Contacts into another application .............................74 Editing information.....................................................................................76 Selecting information.......................................................................... 76 Copying and pasting information ......................................................77 Deleting information ...........................................................................78 Related topics..............................................................................................79 Chapter 5: Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer ...........................................80 Program memory and the hard drive .......................................................81 How can I work with information? ............................................................82 LifeDrive Manager and Drive Mode ..........................................................83 LifeDrive Manager ............................................................................... 83 Drive Mode........................................................................................... 83 Using LifeDrive Manager ...........................................................................84 Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager icon ...........85 Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager window .....88 Renaming a file or folder ....................................................................91 Deleting a file or folder .......................................................................92 Deleting sync items from your computer when they are deleted from your device .............................................................93 Using Drive Mode ......................................................................................94 Synchronizing information ........................................................................98 Doing a full sync ..................................................................................98 Synchronizing using the cable .........................................................100 LifeDrive from palmOne v Synchronizing using LifeDrive Manager ......................................... 101 Creating sync items ...........................................................................101 Doing a folder sync ...........................................................................102 Locating sync items on your computer ........................................... 103 Entering information using desktop software ................................ 104 Customizing your synchronization settings .................................... 107 Choosing how your computer responds to synchronization requests ...........................................................108 Setting synchronization options ......................................................110 Choosing whether application information is updated ..................111 Installing applications to your device .............................................. 116 Using Quick Install .............................................................................117 Installing applications from a Mac computer ................................. 118 Using the Send To Handheld droplet .............................................. 118 Using commands in the HotSync menu ..........................................119 Other ways of managing information.....................................................120 Importing information from other applications.............................. 121 Restoring archived items on your computer .................................. 123 Installing the additional software from the CD ............................... 124 Checking space and version numbers .............................................125 Removing information .............................................................................127 Removing an application from your device .................................... 127 Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer ............... 128 Related topics............................................................................................130 Chapter 6: Managing Your Contacts ..................................131 Adding a contact ......................................................................................132 Entering additional contact information ..........................................135 Selecting contact field types .............................................................136 Defining custom fields ......................................................................137 Selecting a contact as your business card ......................................138 Copying contact information into multiple contacts ............................139 Locating a contact on your list ................................................................140 Deleting a contact ....................................................................................141 Customizing the Contacts list .................................................................142 LifeDrive from palmOne vi Making connections from Contacts.........................................................144 Using Quick Connect .........................................................................144 Customizing Quick Connect settings ...............................................146 Using Tap-to-Connect .......................................................................147 Working with Contacts on your computer..............................................149 Related topics............................................................................................150 Chapter 7: Managing Your Calendar ..................................151 Scheduling events ....................................................................................152 Scheduling an appointment .............................................................152 Scheduling an event without a start time .......................................154 Scheduling a repeating eventstandard interval ..........................156 Scheduling a repeating eventunusual interval ............................157 Scheduling an event that is longer than a day ...............................159 Entering a location or a note for an event .......................................160 Scheduling an event with a time zone .............................................161 Color-coding your schedule.....................................................................163 Managing your color-codes ..............................................................163 Assigning a color-code to an event .................................................165 Setting an alarm .......................................................................................166 Rescheduling an event ............................................................................167 Deleting events .........................................................................................169 Deleting a specific event ...................................................................169 Deleting all your old events ..............................................................171 Checking your schedule ...........................................................................172 Viewing your appointments and tasks together .............................172 Viewing your daily schedule ............................................................174 Viewing your weekly schedule .........................................................176 Viewing your monthly schedule ......................................................177 Viewing a yearly calendar .................................................................178 Finding events that overlap .............................................................. 179 Customizing your calendar ......................................................................179 Customizing display options for your calendar ..............................180 Setting alarm and time options ........................................................183 Working with Calendar on your computer .............................................185 Related topics............................................................................................186 LifeDrive from palmOne vii Chapter 8: Your Microsoft Office File Manager .................187 Creating and managing Office files.........................................................188 Opening files from within Documents ....................................................189 Related Topics...........................................................................................190 Chapter 9: Viewing Your Photos and Videos ....................191 Reformatting files and copying supported file types.............................192 Viewing photos or videos .......................................................................193 Viewing a slide show ........................................................................ 200 Rotating a photo ................................................................................ 202 Viewing and editing photo or video details............................................204 Organizing photos and videos.................................................................207 Organizing photos or videos into albums .......................................207 Moving a photo or video within and between albums ..................209 Sorting photos and videos ............................................................... 211 Personalizing a photo ...............................................................................212 Drawing on a photo ...........................................................................212 Adding audio to a photo ...................................................................214 Copying a photo or video ........................................................................215 Deleting a photo or video ........................................................................216 Sharing photos and videos ......................................................................217 Related topics............................................................................................218 Chapter 10: Managing Your Camera Card Media..............219 Copying photos and videos from your camera card ............................220 Viewing photos or videos ......................................................................222 Related topics............................................................................................223 Chapter 11: Listening to Music...........................................224 Benefits ......................................................................................................224 Transferring music from a CD to your device .......................................230 Transferring music from a CD to your device .......................................232 Managing playlists....................................................................................236 Creating a playlist ..............................................................................236 Playing songs from a playlist ...........................................................238 LifeDrive from palmOne viii Editing a playlist ................................................................................239 Deleting a playlist ..............................................................................241 Customizing your player ..........................................................................242 Turning off the screen .......................................................................242 Setting background preferences ......................................................243 Flashing the LED when the pTunes console is turned off ..............244 Working with Windows Media Player on your computer .....................245 Related topics............................................................................................246 Chapter 12: Managing Your Tasks ......................................247 Creating a task ..........................................................................................248 Setting an alarm ................................................................................249 Scheduling a repeating taskstandard interval .............................250 Scheduling a repeating taskunusual interval ..............................252 Organizing your tasks ..............................................................................254 Marking a task complete .........................................................................255 Deleting tasks ...........................................................................................256 Deleting a specific task ......................................................................256 Deleting all your completed tasks ....................................................257 Customizing your Tasks list ....................................................................258 Working with Tasks on your computer...................................................260 Related topics............................................................................................261 Chapter 13: Writing Memos................................................262 Creating a memo .....................................................................................263 Viewing and editing a memo ..................................................................264 Moving memos in your memos list .......................................................265 Deleting a memo ......................................................................................266 Working with Memos on your computer................................................267 Related topics............................................................................................268 Chapter 14: Writing Notes in Note Pad..............................269 Creating a note .........................................................................................270 Choosing the pen and paper (background) colors .........................271 Setting an alarm ................................................................................272 LifeDrive from palmOne ix Viewing and editing a note .....................................................................274 Deleting a note .........................................................................................275 Working with Note Pad on your computer.............................................276 Related topics............................................................................................277 Chapter 15: Recording Voice Memos.................................278 Creating a voice memo ...........................................................................279 Creating a quick voice memo using the application button ..........279 Creating a longer voice memo using the pause control ................280 Listening to a voice memo ......................................................................283 Setting an alarm for a voice memo ........................................................285 Saving a voice memo to an expansion card .........................................287 Saving a specific memo to an expansion card ...............................287 Automatically storing all voice memos on an expansion card .....288 Related topics............................................................................................289 Chapter 16: Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections..............290 What can I do with the built-in Wi-Fi wireless technology? ..................291 What types of connections can I make?..................................................291 Wi-Fi signal strength indicator.................................................................292 Setting up a Wi-Fi network connection ..................................................293 Accessing email and the web with Wi-Fi ...............................................299 Setting up a Wi-Fi device-to-device network .........................................301 Related topics............................................................................................307 Chapter 17: Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections .....308 What can I do with the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology? ..........309 What types of connections can I make? .......................................... 309 What is device discovery? ................................................................ 310 Entering basic Bluetooth settings ...........................................................311 Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection .............................................312 Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth .......................................317 Setting up a connection for Bluetooth synchronization .......................319 Setting up a connection to a network ....................................................324 Creating trusted devices ..........................................................................326 LifeDrive from palmOne x Setting advanced Bluetooth features .....................................................328 Storing recently found device names ..............................................328 Allowing your device to wake up when it is turned off ..................329 Related topics............................................................................................330 Chapter 18: Sending and Receiving Email Messages ......331 Upgrading an existing email account ....................................................332 About email accounts...............................................................................333 Using an email provider ................................................................... 333 Using a corporate email account ..................................................... 334 VPNs ................................................................................................... 335 Connecting to a VPN .........................................................................336 Creating an account..................................................................................337 Transferring settings from an existing account ..............................338 Setting up an account on your computer: Common providers .....340 Setting up an account on your computer: Other providers ...........343 Entering advanced account settings on your computer ................346 Setting up an account on your device .............................................351 Setting advanced mail options on your device ..............................354 Testing your new account ................................................................ 355 Editing an account............................................................................. 356 Editing an account on your computer .............................................356 Editing an account on your device ...................................................357 Deleting an account ...........................................................................358 Adding ESMTP to an account ...........................................................359 Getting and reading messages................................................................360 Auto Sync with notification .............................................................. 361 Scheduling Auto Sync .......................................................................361 Auto Sync notifications..................................................................... 363 Setting alert options ..........................................................................364 Viewing and using the Reminders screen....................................... 365 Auto Sync retries ............................................................................... 366 Resource issues with Auto Sync ...................................................... 366 Inbox icons in the VersaMail application ........................................ 367 Setting preferences for getting messages ......................................367 LifeDrive from palmOne xi Reading email messages .................................................................. 370 Adding or updating a contact directly from a message................. 371 Sending an email message......................................................................372 Entering an address using Smart Addressing ................................374 Entering an address directly in the To field ....................................375 Entering an address using Contacts ................................................376 Attaching a personal signature ........................................................377 Send retry ...........................................................................................378 Send retry notifications..................................................................... 378 Modifying messages in the Outbox................................................. 379 Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications.................................... 379 Working with email folders......................................................................380 Viewing another folder .....................................................................380 Customizing the appearance of the message list ...........................381 Moving messages between folders ................................................383 Creating and editing mail folders .....................................................385 Working with email messages ................................................................386 Forwarding an email message .........................................................386 Replying to an email message .........................................................387 Setting reply preferences ..................................................................388 Working with URLs, email addresses, and phone numbers in a message....................................................................................... 390 Deleting a message ...........................................................................390 Deleting old messages ......................................................................391 Emptying the trash ............................................................................393 Setting the trash to be emptied automatically ................................394 Marking messages as read or unread .............................................395 Working with attachments .......................................................................396 Working with a downloaded attachment ........................................397 Saving attachments ...........................................................................400 Attaching files to outgoing messages .............................................401 Advanced VersaMail application features ..............................................403 Creating and using filters.................................................................. 403 Turning filters on and off ..................................................................406 Editing or deleting a filter .................................................................408 LifeDrive from palmOne xii Setting connection preferences .......................................................409 Setting server preferences ................................................................410 Changing email header details......................................................... 412 Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly................................... 413 Prerequisites for wireless IMAP folder synchronization ................ 414 Turning IMAP folder synchronization on or off ..............................414 Synchronizing device and mail server IMAP folders from the Options menu ..............................................................................415 Working with root folders................................................................. 415 Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)................................................... 415 Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync ...................................416 What do I need to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync?............... 416 How does a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account differ from other accounts?.................................................................. 417 Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account................... 417 Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your computer .....................................................................................418 Setting up an account on your device .............................................421 Setting advanced mail options on your device ..............................424 Getting email messages ................................................................... 425 Previewing attachments ................................................................... 427 Working with meeting invitations ....................................................427 Working with Calendar events ......................................................... 430 Synchronizing Calendar events using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync................................................................................... 431 Updating Calendar events when you delete a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account .................................................................... 431 Related topics............................................................................................432 Chapter 19: Sending and Receiving Text Messages.........433 Creating and sending a text message ....................................................434 Receiving and viewing a text message ..................................................437 Editing a draft text message ...................................................................439 Setting advanced messaging features ...................................................440 Related Topics...........................................................................................442 LifeDrive from palmOne xiii Chapter 20: Browsing the Web...........................................443 Accessing a web page ..............................................................................444 Accessing a web page using the action bar ....................................444 Accessing a web page using the address field ...............................445 Using a password to access a web page .........................................446 Finding information on a web page .................................................447 Quickly jumping to a page .......................................................................448 Following a link.................................................................................. 448 Returning to your home page or a page you recently visited ....... 448 Changing how you view a page .............................................................449 Bookmarking your favorite pages ...........................................................451 Adding a bookmark ...........................................................................451 Viewing a bookmarked or saved page ............................................452 Editing information about a bookmark or saved page ...................453 Arranging the bookmark list .............................................................454 Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet ..............................455 Disconnecting from the Internet ......................................................455 Connecting to the Internet ................................................................456 Downloading files and pages ..................................................................457 Downloading a file ............................................................................457 Saving a web page ............................................................................458 Viewing a saved file ..........................................................................459 Communicating with other users ............................................................460 Sending email by means of an Internet email account ..................460 Returning to a web page you recently visited .......................................461 Changing your home and start pages.....................................................462 Changing your home page ...............................................................462 Changing your start page .................................................................464 Setting advanced browser options .........................................................465 Changing how images are downloaded ..........................................465 Setting whether to automatically complete web addresses and form fields ...................................................................................466 Allowing websites to remember personal information .................467 Setting preferences for storing web pages .....................................468 Setting preferences for using a proxy server ..................................470 LifeDrive from palmOne xiv Setting whether to accept JavaScript ..............................................472 Related topics............................................................................................473 Chapter 21: Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device ...474 Dialing a number .....................................................................................475 Entering a number .............................................................................475 Redialing the most recently used number ......................................476 Dialing a number from the Call History List ....................................477 Using speed dial ......................................................................................478 Adding a speed-dial entry .................................................................478 Dialing a number using speed dial ..................................................479 Editing a speed-dial entry .................................................................480 Related topics............................................................................................481 Chapter 22: Sharing Information........................................482 Using the Send command ......................................................................483 Sending information from within an application using Bluetooth technology ...................................................................................483 Sending a category using Bluetooth technology ...........................485 Sending an application using Bluetooth technology .....................486 Using the Send command with the VersaMail application ......... 487 Using the Send command with SMS .............................................. 487 Beaming ....................................................................................................488 Beaming information from within an application ..........................488 Beaming a category ..........................................................................490 Beaming an application ....................................................................491 Other ways of sharing information .........................................................492 Related topics............................................................................................493 Chapter 23: Managing Your Expenses ...............................494 Adding an expense ...................................................................................495 Choosing currency options ......................................................................497 Customizing the currency pick list ...................................................497 Presetting the currency symbol .......................................................498 Creating a currency symbol ..............................................................499 LifeDrive from palmOne xv Deleting expenses.....................................................................................501 Deleting an individual expense ........................................................501 Deleting an entire category of expenses .........................................502 Customizing the expense list ...................................................................503 Working with Expense on your computer ..............................................504 Related topics............................................................................................505 Chapter 24: Performing Calculations .................................506 Calculator buttons.....................................................................................507 Viewing recent calculations ....................................................................508 Accessing different calculators ...............................................................509 Related topics............................................................................................510 Chapter 25: Keeping Your Information Private.................. 511 Choosing a security level .........................................................................512 Marking information as private ...............................................................513 Setting the level of privacy ......................................................................514 Hiding or masking private entries ....................................................514 Viewing an entry that is masked ...................................................... 515 Using a password .....................................................................................515 Creating a password .........................................................................516 Changing a password .......................................................................517 Deleting a password.......................................................................... 519 Deleting a forgotten password .........................................................520 Locking your device..................................................................................522 Locking your device automatically ..................................................522 Locking your device manually ..........................................................524 Using Quick Unlock ..................................................................................525 Creating a Quick Unlock combination ............................................. 525 Deleting your Quick Unlock combination........................................ 527 Encrypting your information....................................................................528 Limiting the number of password attempts ...........................................530 Related topics............................................................................................533 LifeDrive from palmOne xvi Chapter 26: Using Categories to Organize Information ...534 Adding a category.....................................................................................535 Renaming a category ...............................................................................536 Deleting a category ..................................................................................537 Placing information in a category ...........................................................538 Placing an entry in a category ..........................................................538 Placing an application in a category ................................................540 Viewing information by category ...........................................................541 Related topics............................................................................................542 Chapter 27: Managing Clock Settings ...............................543 Checking the current date and time ........................................................544 Setting the primary location ....................................................................544 Setting the date and time for the primary location ........................545 Choosing secondary locations for other time zones .............................547 Modifying the locations list......................................................................548 Adding new locations .......................................................................548 Deleting a location .............................................................................550 Setting the alarm clock.............................................................................551 Responding to the alarm clock......................................................... 552 Changing the clock display ......................................................................553 Related topics............................................................................................554 Chapter 28: Customizing Your Device ...............................555 Customizing Favorites View ....................................................................556 Changing the background photo in Favorites View .......................556 Changing entries in Favorites ...........................................................557 Customizing Applications View ..............................................................559 Making the screen easier to read ............................................................561 Changing the screen fonts ................................................................561 Adjusting the brightness ...................................................................563 Changing screen colors ....................................................................564 Changing handedness orientation of the screen ............................565 Assigning a button to your frequently used applications ....................566 Setting the date and time ........................................................................568 LifeDrive from palmOne xvii Selecting a location ...........................................................................568 Resetting the date and time ..............................................................570 Selecting formats for dates, times, and numbers ..........................572 Customizing the way you enter information ..........................................574 Customizing the input area ...............................................................574 Customizing Graffiti 2 strokes ..........................................................575 Setting up ShortCuts .........................................................................577 Changing ShortCuts ..........................................................................579 Correcting problems with tapping ...................................................580 Selecting sound settings .........................................................................581 Entering your owner information ...........................................................582 Conserving battery power .......................................................................583 Selecting power-saving settings ......................................................583 Connecting your device to other devices ...............................................585 Changing the preset connection settings ........................................585 Creating your own connection settings ...........................................587 Connecting your device to a mobile phone ....................................590 Customizing network settings .................................................................591 Setting up a service profile ...............................................................591 Connecting to your service ...............................................................594 Adding details to a service profile ...................................................595 Deleting a service profile ..................................................................597 Creating login scripts ........................................................................598 Adding plug-in applications .............................................................601 Setting up a VPN.......................................................................................602 Setting up a VPN account on your device .......................................602 Establishing a VPN connection ........................................................604 Ending a VPN connection .................................................................605 Related topics............................................................................................606 Chapter 29: Expanding Your Device...................................607 What type of expansion cards can I use? ...............................................608 How can expansion cards help me?........................................................608 Removing an expansion card .................................................................609 Inserting an expansion card ....................................................................610 LifeDrive from palmOne xviii Opening an application on an expansion card ......................................611 Opening files on an expansion card .......................................................612 Viewing card information.........................................................................613 Renaming a card ......................................................................................614 Copying applications to an expansion card ..........................................615 Removing all information from a card ...................................................616 Related topics............................................................................................617 Chapter 30: Maintaining Your Device ...............................618 Device dos and donts .............................................................................618 Device dos......................................................................................... 618 Device donts ..................................................................................... 619 Resetting your device ...............................................................................620 Doing a soft reset .............................................................................. 620 Doing a hard reset ............................................................................. 621 Restoring your information after a hard reset........................................622 Related topics............................................................................................624 Chapter 31: Common Questions .......................................625 Setup..........................................................................................................625 Device ........................................................................................................627 Moving around..........................................................................................630 Entering information ................................................................................631 Synchronizing ...........................................................................................633 LifeDrive Manager/Drive Mode................................................................639 Calendar.....................................................................................................641 Memos .......................................................................................................642 Note Pad ....................................................................................................643 Media .........................................................................................................643 Pocket Tunes..........................................................................................644 Tasks ..........................................................................................................644 Connecting wirelessly ..............................................................................645 The VersaMail application.....................................................................647 Privacy .......................................................................................................650 Sharing ......................................................................................................651 Problems with incompatible applications ..............................................653 LifeDrive from palmOne xix Chapter 32: Getting Help ...................................................656 Self-help resources ...................................................................................656 Technical support .....................................................................................657 Product Regulatory Information .........................................658 Index ......................................................................................664 LifeDrive from palmOne xx About This Guide This guide tells you everything you need to know about your device: the things youll do every day, the advanced features that let you get the most out of your device, and the things that make your device not only useful, but fun. Tips for viewing this guide Here are some helpful tips for making it easier to read and find information in this guide as you view it in Adobe Reader:

To magnify the page, click the magnifying glass

, move the cursor (which is now a magnifying glass) over the page, and click repeatedly. Click Previous View (

on your version of Reader) to return to the original view. or depending

Click an entry in the Table of Contents or Index to go directly to that section of the guide.

If you click a link and go to a page, in the guide click Previous View (

or depending on your version of Reader) to return to the page you were on before you clicked the link.

If you click a link and go to a web page, the page may open in Adobe Reader instead of in your web browser. To specify whether pages open in Reader or in your web browser, go to the Edit menu in Reader, select Preferences, and then select Web Capture. In the Open Web Links drop-

down list, select either In Acrobat or In Web Browser, and then click OK.

When selecting the page(s) to print, be sure to use the file page number shown at the bottom of your computer screen, not the printed page number. For example, to print the first page of Chapter 2, Your Mobile Manager, select page 41 (the file page), not page 18 (the printed page). LifeDrive from palmOne xxi Whats in this guide?

The info in this guide includes step-by-step instructions, links to cross-references, and sidebars. Step-by-step instructions Here youll find how-to information. Look for these cues in instructions:

Continued Cue that means the procedure continues on the next page. Done IMPORTANT

Cue that signals the end of the procedure. Youre done. A step that you must follow; otherwise, you could experience an error or even lose information.

[ & ] OPTIONAL A step you might find useful. NOTE WINDOWS ONLY MAC ONLY Information that applies only in certain cases or that tells more about a procedure step. A procedure or text that applies to one platform only. In most cases, if you see one heading check the following or preceding sections for the other. Sometimes, there is no Mac counterpart for a Windows procedure or text; this feature is not available to Mac users. Links Links that appear as underlined words in body text and in sidebars take you to other sections of this guide. Links also appear in the following sections:

In this chapter Links on the first page of each chapter that send you to a specific section. Related topics Links that send you to other topics in this guide to learn about more things you can do with an application or feature. LifeDrive from palmOne xxii Sidebars

Before You Begin Things you must complete before you can do the steps described in a procedure or group of procedures. Tip A suggestion on how to use a feature more fully; a shortcut; a pointer to a related feature. Did You Know?

An interesting fact about the topic being described; may include a link to more information. Key Term A technical term related to the topic being described. The term may appear in this guide or only on your device. Tips & Tricks A pointer to a website where you can obtain general information about your device and learn the latest tips, tricks, and more. Support A pointer to a website where you can find help if you experience problems with a specific feature or with your device. LifeDrive from palmOne xxiii CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer In this chapter Whats in the box?

System requirements Step 1: Charging your device Step 2: Turning on your device for the first time Step 3: Installing your software Step 4: Connecting your device to your computer Switching to another desktop software application Using user profiles Related topics Congratulations on the purchase of your new LifeDrive mobile manager from palmOne! Youre about to discover so many things about your device that will help you better manage your life and have fun, too. As you become more familiar with your device, youll probably personalize the settings and add applications to make it uniquely yours. While youre likely to get years of enjoyment from your device, it takes only four easy steps to get up and running. Benefits

Start using your device right away

Establish a link between your device and your computer

Set up your device for optimal use LifeDrive from palmOne 1 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Key Term Palm Desktop software The software that lets you enter, update, review, and synchronize information on your computer. Whats in the box?

USB sync cable Pouch AC charger LifeDrive from palmOne Software installation CD System requirements The installation CD contains Palm Desktop software and other applications you need to set up and use your device. To use Palm Desktop software, your desktop computer must meet these requirements:

WINDOWS ONLY

A PC with a Pentium II processor or later, and one of the following operating systems:

Windows 2000 (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software)

Windows XP (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software)

Internet Explorer 5.0 or later

32 megabyte (MB) available RAM (64MB recommended) LifeDrive from palmOne 2 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer

170MB available hard disk space

One available USB port

USB sync cable (included with your device)

CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your device MAC ONLY

Mac computer or compatible with a PowerPC processor

Mac OS X, version 10.2 or 10.3 (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software)

128MB total RAM

190MB available hard disk space

Monitor that supports screen resolution of 800 X 600 or better

One available USB port

USB sync cable (included with your device)

CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your device LifeDrive from palmOne 3 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer

Before You Begin If youre upgrading from another Palm Powered device, synchronize your old device with your old desktop software. Tip After the initial charge, charge your device at least half an hour every day. 0 Step 1: Charging your device 1 Connect your device:

a. Plug the USB sync cable into your device and into a USB port on the back of your computer. b. Plug the AC charger into the Multi-connector on the sync cable and into an outlet. 2 Charge your device for three hours. Be sure your device is fully charged before going on to Step 2. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 4 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Tip Also take a minute to learn about proper care and handling of your device. What you should know about your devices battery While your device is charging, take a minute to learn about the battery:

If you see an alert on the screen warning you that the battery is low, recharge your device. Also recharge your device if it doesnt turn on when you press the power button. NOTE The memory on your device is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained to the point that you cannot turn on your device. When you recharge your device, all of your existing information, both in program memory and on the internal drive, should appear.

Conserve battery life by doing any of the following:

Adjust the screen brightness.

Reduce the Auto-off setting.

Use Keylock to prevent your device from turning on by accident.

Stop music or video playback when not in use.

Keep your device connected to the AC charger plugged into a power outlet when using Drive Mode or Camera Companion for an extended period of time.

Respond to or cancel alerts promptly.

Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology and Wi-Fi functionality when not in use.

If using Auto Sync to automatically retrieve email messages, set the time interval to one hour or less often.

Minimize use of the expansion slot. LifeDrive from palmOne 5 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer

Before You Begin Be sure to fully charge your device, as described in the preceding procedure. Tip After you set up your device, review the Quick Tour on your device and take the tutorial on the CD to learn the basics. 0 Step 2: Turning on your device for the first time 1 Unplug the USB sync cable from your device. Power switch Stylus 2 3 4 Slide the power switch to the right. Press and release the stylus, and then slide it out of the slot. Hold the stylus as you would hold a pen, and follow the onscreen instructions to set up your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 6 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Did You Know?

When you upgrade, theres no need to delete the old desktop software first. When you install the new Palm Desktop software, all of your information transfers automatically to the new software. Tip Take the interactive tutorial on the CD to learn how to create an appointment; set up your devices features for photos, video, and music;

and more. Did You Know?

IT managers can set up a profile if they want to install the same set of information on several devices. 0 Step 3: Installing your software 1 Insert the CD into your computer. NOTE You need administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software on a computer running Windows 2000/XP or Mac OS X. 2 WINDOWS ONLY Follow the onscreen instructions. If youre upgrading, select the username that you assigned to your old device. MAC ONLY Double-click the CD icon, and then double-click palmOneSoftware.pkg. Done During installation, youre asked to connect your computer to your device. See Step 4. LifeDrive from palmOne 7 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Tip If the Select User dialog box appears during synchronization, select the username of the device you want to synchronize, and click OK. Key Term Third-party application A software program that runs on a Palm Powered device but is not created or supported by palmOne, Inc. Tip If you have problems with your new device after you synchronize, you may need to update your third-party applications. Step 4: Connecting your device to your computer In this step, you connect your device to your computer and do a full sync for the first time. Synchronizing simply means that any information you enter in one place (your device or computer) is automatically updated in the other. IMPORTANT

you always have an up-to-date backup copy of this info on your computer. Be sure to do a full sync of the info on your device at least once a day so that 0 1 Connect your device to your computer:

a. Plug the USB sync cable into a USB port on the back of your computer. b. Plug the cable into your device. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 8 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer 2 3 Slide the power switch to the right to turn on your device. Continue with the onscreen instructions. Do a full sync by pressing the sync button on the USB sync cable. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 9 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Switching to another desktop software application WINDOWS ONLY During CD installation, you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your device. You may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time. But if Microsoft Outlook already contains all of your contacts, appointments, tasks, and notes, you can change your synchronization method so that your device synchronizes with Outlook instead. You can also change from Outlook to Palm Desktop software. NOTE If you choose to synchronize with Outlook, info from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with the corresponding application in Outlook. (Memos is called Notes in Outlook.) You can also set up the VersaMail application to synchronize email on your device with email in Outlook. Other info, such as voice memos and notes, is synchronized with info in Palm Desktop software. 0 1 2 3 Insert the CD into your computer. From the screen that appears, select Change your synchronization method. Follow the onscreen instructions for the desktop software you want to use. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 10 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Using user profiles IMPORTANT

an IT manager, you can skip this section. Only IT managers may need to use user profiles for their company. If you are not Suppose your sales organization wants to distribute two dozen devices that all have a common company phone list, a set of memos, and several key applications. A user profile can be created to install this information before the devices are distributed to employees. When the employees synchronize for the first time, this common information becomes part of their user-specific information. A user profile enables you to install the same information onto multiple devices before each device is individualized with a unique username and user-specific information. A device that has a user profile installed can be given to anyone, because the device is not yet identified by a unique username. When the new user synchronizes for the first time, he or she gives the device a unique username. NOTE Devices that are synchronized with a user profile must be either new devices that have never been synchronized or devices that have had their usernames and information removed by a hard reset. LifeDrive from palmOne 11 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Tip Save time by importing to quickly add information to a profile. Creating a user profile WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 3 Open the New Profile screen:

a. Open Palm Desktop software. b. From the Tools menu, select Users. c. Click Profiles, and then click New. Enter a unique name for the profile, and click OK twice. Select the profile from the User list, and create the info in Palm Desktop software for the profile. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 12 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer MAC ONLY 0 1 Open the New Profile screen:

a. Open Palm Desktop software. b. From the User pop-up menu, select Edit Users. c. Click New Profile. 2 Create the profile:

a. Enter a unique name for the profile, and click OK. b. Close the Users window. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 13 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer 3 4 Select the profile from the User pop-up menu, and create the info in Palm Desktop software for the profile. Set the profiles conduit settings:

a. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings. b. Select the conduit settings for the profile. Done Synchronizing with a user profile WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Begin synchronization:

a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and then insert the other end into the Multi-connector on your device. b. Press the sync button on the USB sync cable. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 14 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer 2 Transfer the profile information:

a. Click Profiles. b. Select the profile you want to load on the device, and click OK. c. Click Yes. Done The next time you synchronize that device, Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign a username to the device. LifeDrive from palmOne 15 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer MAC ONLY 0 1 2 Begin synchronization:

a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and then insert the other end into the Multi-connector on your device. b. Press the sync button on the USB sync cable. Select the profile you want to load on the device, and click OK. Done The next time you synchronize that device, Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign a username to the device. LifeDrive from palmOne 16 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with setup or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Your Mobile Manager Keeping your device from turning on accidentally Managing Info

Synchronizing your device with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer

Synchronizing wirelessly using the built-in Bluetooth technology or Wi-Fi capabilities on your device

Using your companys network to synchronize information

Choosing whether or not to synchronize information for a specific application

Transferring information to your device from an outside source, such as a file containing your companys phone list

Adding applications to and deleting applications from your device

Installing additional software from the CD

Viewing application information Customizing

Adjusting the screen display

Reducing the Auto-off setting Answers to frequently asked questions about setup Common Questions LifeDrive from palmOne 17 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager In this chapter Whats on my device?

Using the power switch Using the status bar Rotating the screen Whats on the screen?

What software is on my device?

Whats on the CD?

Related topics Your new LifeDrive mobile manager from palmOne takes mobile computing to a whole new level. As always, it helps you keep track of your schedule, your business and personal contacts, your to-do list, and even your Microsoft Office and multimedia files. But the device offers much morelike a 4GB hard drive that lets you carry all your crucial Office files, plus hours of your favorite music, photos, and videos. Transfer information in real time between your device and your computer and, on a Windows computer, select which files and folders to synchronize. Import photos and videos from your digital cameras memory card, or connect wirelessly to a Wi-Fi network. Benefits

Carry files and folders on an internal hard drive containing nearly 4GB of storage, and work with them on the go

Save time and stay organized

Travel light

Never lose important information

Stay in touch using wireless connectivity LifeDrive from palmOne 18 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Whats on my device?

Front Indicator light Screen Home Media 5-way navigator Quick buttons Files Star Indicator light Notifies you of various functions. A solid amber light indicates that the device is charging; a solid green light indicates that the device is fully charged. A flashing amber light indicates that the devices hard drive is currently processing informationopening a file, saving changes, and so on. Be especially careful not to drop, bang, or otherwise cause a strong impact to your device while the indicator light is blinking; you may damage the hard drive. LifeDrive from palmOne 19 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip The Favorites application offers four pages of favorites. Pressing Home once opens the first page of Favorites; use the buttons in the upper-right corner of the Favorites screen to go to the other pages. Screen Displays the applications and information on your device. The screen is touch-sensitive. Display the input area by tapping the Input icon on the status bar. Use the input area to enter info with Graffiti 2 writing or the onscreen keyboard. 5-way navigator Helps you move around and select info to display on the screen. Quick buttons Turn on your device and open the corresponding application. Press the Home button once to open Favorites, twice to open Applications. The Star button opens the Pocket Tunes music application by default, but you can customize it to open any application you choose. LifeDrive from palmOne 20 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Top Key Term IR Short for infrared. Beaming uses infrared technology to send information between two IR ports that are within a few feet of each other. Did You Know?

Beaming lets you quickly share appointments, addresses, phone numbers, files, photos, and more. Stylus IR port Expansion card slot Three-position power switch IR port Beams information to and from other devices that have an IR port. Power switch Turns your device on or off and lets you turn Keylock on. A red indicator is displayed on the switch when Keylock is on. Stylus Lets you enter information on your device by writing or tapping. To use the stylus, press down on the top, release to let it pop out of the slot, and then slide it out. Hold the stylus as you would a pen or pencil. Using your fingertip instead of the stylus is OK, but dont use your fingernail, a real pen, or any other sharp object to touch the screen. Expansion card slot Lets you insert an expansion card (sold separately) to back up info and add memory, applications, and accessories to your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 21 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Side Microphone Voice Memo button Screen rotation button 0 Screen rotation button Rotates the screen between portrait and landscape views. Voice Memo button Opens the Voice Memo application when you press and release the button. Records a voice memo when you press and hold the button. Microphone Lets you record sound to create a voice memo. LifeDrive from palmOne 22 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Back Speaker Bluetooth radio

(internal) Wi-Fi radio (internal) Hard drive

(internal) Hard drive (internal) Provides 4GB of storage to carry and manage all of your crucial work information, music and media files, and more. Speaker Lets you listen to alarms, game and system sounds, music, and voice memos. Bluetooth radio

(internal) Enables your device to connect with other devices (sold separately) that use Bluetooth wireless technology. Wi-Fi radio (internal) Enables your device to connect to a Wi-Fi network to wirelessly access email, browse the web, and synchronize. LifeDrive from palmOne 23 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Key Term USB The type of connector or cable thats commonly used to connect accessories to a computer. Did You Know?

You can purchase a cradle accessory that lets you connect external speakers (sold separately) to hear audio from your device through the Multi-connector. Visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive and click the Accessories link. Tip It takes a little while for your device to reset when you press the reset button. Resetting is done when the Date & Time Preferences screen appears. Bottom Headphone jack Reset button Connector port AC charger Multi-connector Reset button Resets your device if it freezes (stops responding). Multi-connector Lets you connect a USB sync cable (included) or a cradle (sold separately) to your computer so you can synchronize or exchange information. You can also charge your device by connecting it to your computer using the USB sync cable. The Multi-connector also lets you connect the AC charger to your deviceeither directly to the connector or through the USB sync cableso you can charge it. NOTE Be sure to plug in the sync cable with the arrow on the cable connector facing the front of the device. Headphone jack Lets you connect standard 3.5mm stereo headphones (sold separately) to your device so you can listen to music and other audio applications. LifeDrive from palmOne 24 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Did You Know?

A red indicator is displayed on the power switch when Keylock is on. Using the power switch Your devices power switch turns your device on and off, and also lets you lock your device so that it does not respond to taps, 5-way presses, or presses on the buttons on the front and side of your device. Front of device Keylock On/Off Use the power switch for the following actions:

To turn on your device, slide the switch to the right and let it return to the center. To turn your device off, slide the switch to the right again.

If your device is off, slide the switch to the left to lock your device. Your device does not respond to button presses, taps, or 5-way presses and cannot turn on until you slide the switch to the center position. Locking your device when it is off is useful if you carry your device in a bag and want to prevent it from turning on accidentally when something presses against it.

If your device is on, slide the switch to the left to lock your device at the current screen. Your device does not respond to button presses, taps, or 5-way presses, and the current screen cannot be changed until you slide the switch to the center position. Locking your device at a current screen is useful, for example, if you want to pass your device around to show a photo to a group of people and you do not want someone to accidentally tap or press something that causes the photo to disappear. LifeDrive from palmOne 25 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip Use the Find dialog box to locate specific items of information in your devices program memoryfor example, a name or a phone number. Did You Know?

The System info icon shows the current time on the status bar. In the System info dialog box, both the hard drive and the program memory are labeled Device. The hard drive is indicated by the larger available memory size. Did You Know?

When Wi-Fi is on, the signal strength indicator shows an alert symbol when the device is not connected to a network, and an arrow symbol when the device is connected. The number of bars indicates the signal strength when connected. LifeDrive from palmOne Using the status bar The status bar at the bottom of the device screen gives you access to valuable tools and is accessible in all views. Home Find Menu System info Alert Bluetooth controls Wi-Fi controls Full-screen writing Input 0 Home Find Menu System info Alert Bluetooth controls Wi-Fi controls Full-screen writing Input Tap once to open Applications, twice to open Favorites. Tap to open the Find dialog box. Tap to open the menu for the current screen. Tap to open the System information dialog box. The dialog box shows the date and time, available memory, and battery level, and allows you to turn system sounds on and off and to adjust screen brightness. Tap to display the Reminders screen when the icon is blinking. Tap to display the Bluetooth dialog box, where Bluetooth functionality can be turned on and off and you can connect to another Bluetooth device. The icon color changes from blue to white when Bluetooth is turned on. Tap to display the Wi-Fi dialog box, where you can make a wireless connection to a Wi-Fi network. The icon displays Wi-Fi when Wi-Fi is turned off, and a signal strength indicator when Wi-Fi is turned on. Tap to turn full-screen writing on and off. When it is on, you can write Graffiti 2 characters anywhere onscreen. The icon color changes from blue to white when full-screen writing is turned on. Tap to switch between showing and hiding the input area. Tap and hold to display the input area selection menu. 26 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Did You Know?

You can customize which way the screen rotates in landscape mode by choosing right- or left-

handed rotation. Rotating the screen You can switch between landscape and portrait views by pressing Screen rotation on the side of your device. Landscape view is useful for viewing spreadsheets, email, web pages, and photos. Screen rotation button LifeDrive from palmOne 27 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip You can select an input area that does not display the application icons. Tip If you use another application frequently, customize the input area to display that applications icon. Tap and hold any of the four application icons, and select the new application you want from the list. The new applications icon replaces the icon you tapped. Whats on the screen?

Your device includes many features that make it easy to use. Among them are the input area and the common elements that appear on the screen in each of the applications. Once you learn how to use them in one application you can easily use them in all the others. Input area By default, the input area is displayed. To hide the input area, tap Input display the input area if it is hidden, tap Input the following applications:

again. Tapping the icons in the input area opens on the status bar. To Contacts icon Tasks icon Calendar icon Memos icon Application icons: Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Tasks Letter keyboard icon Number keyboard icon Letter keyboard Icon Number keyboard Icon Open the corresponding application. Opens the alphabetic keyboard. Opens the numeric keyboard. NOTE You cannot display the input area in the main Favorites View. However, if you perform a task such as adding or deleting a favorite, you can display the input area. LifeDrive from palmOne 28 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Key Term Slider The solid area on the scroll bar. The slider moves to indicate the relative position within the entry or list. Tip You can also use the 5-way navigator to select an item from a pick list and to select some command buttons. Application controls Previous/next arrows Tips icon Entry box Pick list Box Scroll bar Command button Previous/next arrows Scroll bar Command button Tips icon Entry box Pick list Box Select the left and right arrows to view the previous and next entry; where up and down arrows appear, select them to view the previous and next screens of information. Drag the slider, or tap the top or bottom arrow, to scroll the display one line at a time. To scroll to the previous screen, tap the scroll bar just above the slider. To scroll to the next screen, tap the scroll bar just below the slider. Select a button, such as OK, Cancel, or Details, to perform a command or to open a dialog box. Command buttons appear at the bottom of dialog boxes and application screens. Tap the Tips icon to view shortcuts and other useful information for the screen where the icon is located. When you have finished viewing the tip, select Done. Tap an entry box to open a dialog box where you can enter info for that field. Select the arrow to display a list of choices, and then select an item in the list. Check or uncheck a box to select or deselect it. When a box is checked, the corresponding option is selected and active. When a box is unchecked, the corresponding option is deselected and inactive. LifeDrive from palmOne 29 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip Cant find some of these applications? Press the Home button twice and use the Category pick list to view more applications in Applications View. What software is on my device?

Your device comes with many applications preinstalled and ready to use. 0 Favorites Customize a list of your favorite applications, files, and folders so that you can locate and open them quickly. Files View, organize, and open files and folders on your devices drive. Drive Mode Calendar Connect your device as a USB removable drive on another computer. Open files stored on your device on the computer, and move, copy, and manage files between your device and the computer. Manage your schedule from single entries, like lunch with a friend, to repeating and extended events, like weekly meetings and holidays. Even color-code your schedule by category. Contacts Store names and addresses, phone numbers, email and website addresses; even add a birthday alarm or a contacts photo. Documents Create, view, and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files. View and manage PowerPoint files. Wi-Fi controls Set up wireless connections to a Wi-Fi network for sending and receiving information. Access these controls from the status bar. Bluetooth controls Set up wireless connections to a mobile phone, network, or computer for sending and receiving information. Access these controls from the status bar. Media View, share, and organize photos and videos. Camera Companion Import photos and videos from your digital cameras memory card, open them and work with them on your device, or copy them to your computer. After importing items, delete them from the card to make room there for more photos and videos. This icon is named Companion in Applications View. LifeDrive from palmOne 30 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Pocket Tunes Carry music, create playlists, and listen to music on your device. This application works with the Windows Media Player desktop application that you can install from the CD (Windows only). Both Mac and Windows users can use Pocket Tunes on the device. VersaMail Send, receive, and manage email messages wirelessly using your devices wireless capabilities or by synchronizing with your Windows computer. Web SMS Tasks Browse your favorite sites on the web using your devices wireless capabilities. Send and receive short text (SMS) messages using your devices wireless capabilities. Stay on top of your to-do list. Enter things you need to do, prioritize them, set alarms, and then monitor your deadlines. Voice Memo Record short voice clips using the built-in microphone. Memos Capture information such as meeting notes, lists of books to read, movies to see, recipes, and anything else you need to write down. Note Pad Write on the screen in your own handwriting or draw a quick sketch. Addit Preview, try, and buy software for your device. (Windows only for downloads using the sync cable; both Windows and Mac users can download software using your devices wireless capabilities. Internet connection required.) Calculator Do basic math calculations such as splitting restaurant bills and figuring tips. Quick Tour Learn about your device and how to enter information. Card Info View information about your devices drive or about an expansion card seated in the expansion card slot. HotSync Synchronize info on your device with the info on your computer. Prefs Customize your devices sound levels, colors, security, and more. LifeDrive from palmOne 31 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip To learn how to install the desktop software from the CD, see Step 3:

Installing your software. Tip To learn how to install additional device software from the CD, see Installing the additional software from the CD. Whats on the CD?

The LifeDrive software installation CD includes desktop software for your computer and additional software for your device. The desktop software lets you use your computer to view, enter, and manage info for many of the applications on your device. Make sure you install the desktop software so that you can back up and save the info on your device onto your computer. The additional device software lets you do more things with your device. When you set up your device you may install some (or all) of these applications. You can install any of the applications at any time after you set up your device, as well. The software installation CD includes titles such as the following:

0 Palm Desktop software View, enter, manage, and back up info for Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Memos, Expense, and Voice Memo on your computer (Expense is Windows only). You can also view, manage, and back up info for Note Pad. When you synchronize your device with your computer, this info is updated in both places. On a Windows computer, use Quick Install within Palm Desktop software to install applications (PRC) to your device or to an expansion card that is seated in the expansion card slot. Palm Desktop is installed automatically during the initial CD installation process. NOTE During CD installation, you can choose to synchronize your device with Microsoft Outlook on your computer (Windows only). If you do, information from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with info in the corresponding application in Outlook.

(Memos is called Notes in Outlook.) Information for Expense, Note Pad, and Voice Memo is still synchronized with the corresponding info in Palm Desktop software. LifeDrive from palmOne 32 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip After you install an app and discover how valuable it is, be sure to add it to Favorites. Assign your most important application to the Star button so that you can open it with one press. Did You Know?

You can categorize applications in Applications View. Some apps are automatically assigned to a category when you install them;

others are assigned to the Unfiled category. Apps from all categories appear in the All category. Assign an application to a category in Applications by selecting Category in the App menu. Select the pick list next to the applications name; then select a category. Send To Handheld droplet

(Mac only) Install applications from your Mac computer to your device or to an expansion card that is seated in the expansion card slot for use on your device. This application is installed automatically during the initial CD installation process. LifeDrive Manager

(Windows only) Manual WiFile Adobe Reader for Palm OS Install applications and transfer folders and files from your Windows computer to the hard drive on your device or to an expansion card, synchronize files and folders, and convert photos and videos for viewing on your device. This application is installed automatically during the software CD installation process. Install a version of the Getting Started guide on your device. You can also access the full Acrobat version (PDF) of Getting Started from the Help menu of Palm Desktop software, where its added during the initial installation process. Access your wireless network so that you can open photos, music files, and documents that are located in shared folders on a networked computer. View PDF files that are tailored to fit your devices screen. Power by Hand eReader Purchase and download eBooks from the web so you can read them when you want, where you want. Enterprise Software link AudiblePlayer Create a secure wireless connection to your corporate network in order to safely send and receive email messages and access the corporate intranet with a VPN client. Enable robust security for secure Wi-Fi authentication and connection to a network. Encrypt individual files and folders to protect your critical information (download requires Internet connection). Listen to newspapers, books, public radio, language instruction, and more (Windows only; download requires Internet connection;

additional fees may apply). LifeDrive from palmOne 33 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Documents To Go Handmark Express RealRhapsody Companion desktop software for the Documents application on your device. Lets you move or copy Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files to the Documents folder on your devices drive, as well as create and edit files. Download current news as well as information on the weather, stocks, sports, movies, and more (download requires Internet connection and subscription to service with Handmark). Transfer MP3 music files from your computer to your device or to an expansion card (sold separately), and copy music from your CDs to your computer. This is the desktop companion for the Pocket Tunes music application on your device (Windows only). Windows Media Player link/Direct X Required to prepare videos for playback on your device (Windows only). NOTE We recommend that you install the Windows Media Player/

Direct X software from the CD, even if you already have Windows Media Player on your computer. The version on the CD contains all of the components needed to prepare videos for playback on your device. Windows Media Player plug-in Works with Windows Media Player to convert music files for playback using the Pocket Tunes application on your device. QuickTime Required for preparing videos in certain formats for viewing on your device. NOTE QuickTime is included on the CD for Windows computers only. For Mac computers, QuickTime is included in OS X. LifeDrive from palmOne 34 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Setup Installing the desktop software from the CD Entering Information Moving Around

Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts

Entering information with the onscreen letter and number keyboards

Opening applications and using menus

Finding information Managing Info

Synchronizing your device with your computer

Using LifeDrive Manager and Drive Mode to manage information between your device and your computer

Installing additional software from the CD Sharing

Beaming information and applications to other Palm Powered devices

Sending information and applications to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth technology on your device World Clock Viewing the current date and time Customizing

Setting the current date and time

Adjusting the brightness of the display LifeDrive from palmOne 35 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Maintaining

Caring for your device

Resetting your device Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about your device LifeDrive from palmOne 36 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications In this chapter Opening applications Using the 5-way navigator Using menus Finding information Related topics Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the avenues run east/west?

Learning to move around on your device is similar. Most Palm OS applications use the same set of application controls. So once you learn how to use these standard controls, youll be driving all over town and you wont even need a map. Benefits

Find and open applications quickly

Access extra features with menus

Move around in applications with one hand, using the 5-way navigator

Locate information in any application with the Find feature LifeDrive from palmOne 37 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip Press Home once to open Favorites; press Home twice to open Applications. Switch between Favorites and Applications by pressing Home. Did You Know?

You can use a favorite photo as the background for your Favorites or Applications View. Tip Customize Favorites to display foldersfor example, a project folder that you access often. Select the folder to view its contents. Opening applications You can open applications from Favorites View or Applications View, or by using the Files application. NOTE Some applications are listed differently in Favorites and Applications views. For example, the Photos & Videos entry in Favorites opens the Media application, which is listed as Media in Applications View. The application icons are similar in both Favorites and Applications. Using Favorites Favorites View contains up to 32 itemsfour pages of eight items eachand can include applications, specific files, folders, and even links to the web. Certain items are included in Favorites by default, but you can customize the list to contain any items you want. To access an item from Favorites, press Home navigator or tap the buttons in the upper-right corner of the screen to move to another page of favorites. and select an item from the list. Use the 5-way Tap to move to other pages of favorites Home LifeDrive from palmOne 38 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Using Applications Applications View shows all of the applications on your device, except those that are accessed using the status bar. Use the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen to view applications by category or to see all applications. From the pick list, you can also select to view the contents of your devices hard drive (its called Internal Drive on the pick list) or of an expansion card (its called Card1 or whatever youve named the card) if one is inserted into the expansion slot. To access an item from Applications, press Home Home twice, it displays the same category of applications that was displayed the last time Applications was open. Use the category pick list to view another category or to see all applications, the contents of the hard drive, or the contents of an expansion card. twice and select an icon. When you press Category pick list Home Tip Also open Applications by tapping the Home icon on the status bar. Tip You can also open a specific application using one of the quick buttons on the front of your device. Tip When no item is selected, press Right or Left on the 5-way to scroll through application categories. Did You Know?

Applications View displays an icon for opening Favorites. Favorites View contains an entry for opening Applications. LifeDrive from palmOne 39 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip You can also open Files by selecting Files in Applications View. Tip If you have an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your devices expansion slot, select the card icon in Files to view the contents of the card. Using Files The Files application enables you to easily open, view, and move among the files and folders on your devices hard drive or on an expansion card inserted into your devices expansion slot. To open Files, press Files on the front of your device. Files Card icon LifeDrive from palmOne 40 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Did You Know?

If you select a file from within Files, it automatically opens in the correct application on your device. If there is no application for that file, a beep alert sounds. Tip Tap and hold the stylus on a file or folder to open a menu of actions you can do with that item copy, delete, and so on. Navigate within Files by doing any of the following:

Folder up Folder pick list Top-level folder Select folder

Select a file or folder to open it. The file opens in the corresponding applicationfor example, Documents for Word, Excel, or PowerPoint files. NOTE If your device contains an application that can open a file, a file-specific icon appears to the left of the file name in the Files list. If a generic icon appears to the left of a file name, you cannot open the file on your device.

Select the Folder Up icon to move up one level of folders.

Select the pick list at the top of the files screen to view and jump to the top-level folder and any subfolders.

Select the top-level folder on the files screen to move up one level of folders. NOTE Files always displays these five folders at the top of the folder list: Applications, Documents, Music, Photos & Videos, and VersaMail Attachments. Place your applications and files in the correct folder so that you can easily locate them. LifeDrive from palmOne 41 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Did You Know?

If you select Open With, only applications that can open the file you have selected are displayed. You can select one of the applications displayed to make it the default application for opening this file type. If no application appears, that means there is no application on your device that can open the selected file. Tip You can also highlight a file or folder and then press Right on the 5-way to open the menu of tasks. Working with files and folders You can work with the files and folders in the Files applicationcreate new folders; copy, beam, and delete files and folders; and more. You can work with one file or folder at a time. 0 1 2 3 Open Files. Navigate to the file or folder you want. Work with the file or folder:

a. Tap and hold the item name to open a menu that lets you perform any of the following tasks:

Open With Select the application to use to open a file. Rename Rename the selected item. Details View details such as name, including extension for files; location on the hard drive or expansion card; last date modified; and, for files only, size. Check the box to make the selected item read-only, meaning that it cannot be changed by a user. You can rename or delete a file or folder from the Details dialog box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 42 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Did You Know?

If you select Delete, you get a message asking you to confirm the deletion. Contd. Copy Copy the item to another location on the drive or an expansion card. Move Move the item to another location on the drive or an expansion card. Delete Delete the current file or folder. Beam Beam the file or folder. Send Send the current file or folder using your devices built-in Bluetooth wireless technology or as an attachment to a text message or email message. b. Select the task you want to perform on the file or folder, and follow any onscreen instructions. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 43 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Sorting Files You can sort your files and folders by icon, name, date, or size. 0 1 2 Open Files. Select your sort options:

Sort by name Sort display Select the column you want to sort by. From the left side of the screen, the columns are icon, name, and size/date. Sort by icon Sort by date or size Sort in ascending or descending order Select the column you want to sort by to switch between ascending and descending sort order. Switch between sorting by date or by size Tap and hold the rightmost column until the heading you want appears. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 44 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Did You Know?

If you use a command to open a file from within an application, only files that can be opened by that application are displayed. For example, in Pocket Tunes, only music files such as MP3 files are displayed. Tip You must use the stylus to tap icons in the input area or on the status bar. Opening files and folders from within an application In certain applicationsfor example, Documents, Media, and Pocket Tunesyou can open a file or folder directly from within the application. The application automatically displays files located in the appropriate folder on your devices hard drivefor example, when you open the Pocket Tunes application, files in the Music folder on the drive are displayedbut you can browse for files located elsewhere on the drive. See the application chapters for information on opening files. Switching between applications You can switch between applications at any time. Just press Home and select an icon from Favorites or Applications, or press a quick button. Your device automatically saves your work in the current application and switches to the other application. LifeDrive from palmOne 45 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip In landscape view, not only does screen orientation change, but so does the orientation of the 5-way. For example, in right-handed landscape view, what was Up in portrait view becomes Right in landscape view. Using the 5-way navigator The 5-way navigator, located at the bottom of the front panel, lets you access information quickly with one hand and without the stylus. To use the 5-way, press Up, Down, Right, Left, or Center. The 5-way does various things based on which type of screen youre viewing. Up Left Center Right Down Portrait view Center Left Right Up Down Right-handed landscape view LifeDrive from palmOne 46 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip You can also use the stylus to highlight text on the screen. Drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight, double-

tap a word to highlight it, or triple-tap a line of text to highlight it. Highlighting items The 5-way lets you highlight items before opening or selecting them.

When an onscreen button (OK, Cancel, and so on) or pick list is highlighted, the button acquires a glow around its border.

When an entry on a list screen is highlighted, the text appears in reverse type (light text on a dark background). Button with highlight

When a phone number, email address, or web link is highlighted on a web page or in a message, the text appears in reverse type (light text on a dark background).

When an entire text entry field is highlighted, you can press Center to edit the text. After you edit the text, press Center again to highlight the entire field. LifeDrive from palmOne 47 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Moving around in Favorites View Up or Down Scrolls to the next favorite in the corresponding direction. Right or Left Displays the next or previous page of favorites. Center Opens the selected item. Pages of favorites Moving around in Applications View Up or Down Scrolls up or down in Applications View. Category Right or Left Scrolls to the next or previous application category. Center Inserts the selection highlight. When the selection highlight is present:

Up, Down, Right, or Left Scrolls to the next item in the corresponding direction. Center Opens the selected item. LifeDrive from palmOne 48 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Moving around in list screens In list screens, use the 5-way to select and move between entries such as notes, memos, contacts, or photos. 0 Up or Down Scrolls an entire screen of entries when the entire list is highlighted. Press and hold to accelerate scrolling when in portrait view. Left or Right In landscape view, accelerates scrolling when you press and hold. Center Inserts the selection highlight. When the selection highlight is present:

Up or Down Scrolls to the previous or next entry. Center Displays the selected entry. Left Removes the selection highlight. LifeDrive from palmOne 49 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Moving around in entry screens In entry screens, use the 5-way to scroll within the current entry or between entries. Up, Down, Right, or Left Scrolls to the next item in the corresponding direction. If there is no up entry, pressing Up scrolls left. Likewise if there is no left entry, pressing Left scrolls up. If there is no down entry, pressing Down scrolls right. If there is no right entry, pressing Right scrolls down. On some entry screens, pressing Left highlights the leftmost button at the bottom of the screen. Center Inserts or removes the selection highlight. If a button is highlighted, pressing Center activates the button. Moving around in dialog boxes Dialog boxes appear when you select a button or option that requires you to provide additional information. In dialog boxes, use the 5-way to select a button or to make a selection from items such as boxes and pick lists. LifeDrive from palmOne 50 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Up, Down, Right, or Left Highlights the next item in the dialog box

(pick list, box, button) in the corresponding direction. Center

If highlight is on a box: Checks or unchecks the box. Pick list

If highlight is on a pick list: Opens the pick list. When a pick list is open:

Button with highlight Box Up or Down Scrolls to the previous or next entry. Center Selects the highlighted entry.

If highlight is on a button: Activates the button, and then closes the dialog box. IMPORTANT

action or delete information. Read dialog boxes carefully. Selecting a button such as OK or Yes may cancel an Moving around in menus After you open the menus you can use the 5-way to move between and to select menu items:

Up or Down Scrolls within the current menu list. Right or Left Scrolls to the next or previous menu on the menu bar. Center Selects the highlighted menu item. LifeDrive from palmOne 51 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip You can also open the device menus by tapping the application title in the upper-left corner of the screen. Tip When the menus are open, you can use the 5-way to select menus and menu items. Using menus Menus let you access additional features and settings. They are easy to use, and once you master them in one application, you know how to use them in all your applications. 0 1 2 3 Open an application. Tap Menu on the status bar. Application title Menu Menu item Select a menu title, and then select a menu item. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 52 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip Command mode is active for just a few seconds, so write the menu shortcut or tap an icon on the Command toolbar quickly. Using the Command stroke Most menu items also have a menu shortcut, which is similar to the keyboard shortcuts used on computers. The menu shortcut appears to the right of the menu item. To use a menu shortcut, first write the Graffiti 2 Command stroke on the left side of the input area or the full screen, and then write the shortcut letter. For example, to select Paste from the Edit menu, write the Command stroke, followed by the letter p. You do not have to open a menu to use the command stroke. Command stroke Menu items Menu shortcuts NOTE When you write the Command stroke, the Command toolbar appears. See the next section for info on using the Command toolbar. Using the Command toolbar The Command toolbar displays different icons based on the active screen. For example, if you have text selected, the icons might be Cut, Copy, and Paste. If no text is selected, the icons might be Beam, Undo, and Delete. To use the Command toolbar, write the Command stroke to display the Command toolbar, and then tap an icon to select its command. Command stroke Cut Copy Paste Beam Undo Delete LifeDrive from palmOne 53 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip If you select text in an application before you tap Find, the selected text automatically appears in the Find dialog box. Tip Open an application before you tap Find to display results from that application at the top of the results list. Tip Want to stop searching?

Select Stop at any time during a search. To continue the search, select Find More. Did You Know?

If you select a result that is a file located on the hard drive or on an expansion card, the Files application opens, displaying the selected file. Select the file name to open it. Finding information You can use Find to locate any word or phrase in any applicationeither as part of a file name or within a filein your devices program memory. Find also locates words that begin a file name only (not within a file) on your devices hard drive or on an expansion card. Find locates any words that begin with the text you enter and is not case-sensitive. For example, searching for plane finds planet but not airplane. Searching for bell also finds Bell. 0 1 2 3 Tap Find on the status bar. Enter the text that you want to find, and then select OK. Select the text that you want to review. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 54 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Your LifeDrive

Locating the controls on your device

Discovering the built-in software on your device and the additional software on the CD

Getting familiar with the input area and onscreen application controls

Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts

Entering contact information in other applications Entering Information Sharing

Beaming information and applications to other Palm Powered devices

Sending information and applications to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth technology on your device Privacy Keeping information private by turning on security options Categories Creating categories and organizing your applications and information Managing Info

Adding and deleting applications on your device

Viewing application information Customizing

Using a photo as the background for Applications and Favorites views

Displaying Applications View in list format Maintaining Caring for your device Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about using your device and its applications LifeDrive from palmOne 55 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device In this chapter How can I enter information on my device?

Entering information with Graffiti 2 writing Entering information with the onscreen keyboard Entering info from Contacts into another application Editing information Related topics Whether youre scheduling a meeting with your daughters teacher or adding a new restaurant to your Contacts list, you need to get that information into your device. There are several ways to do this. You may find that you prefer one method if youre entering a small amount of information, while another works best for large amounts. Choose the one that fits your situation. Benefits

Quickly enter important information

Choose the method that works best for your situation LifeDrive from palmOne 56 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device How can I enter information on my device?

Graffiti 2 writing.

The onscreen keyboard.

Phone Lookup.

Note Pad.

Visit www.palmOne.com/mylifedrive and click the Accessories link to get an accessory keyboard

(sold separately). The most popular methods are using Graffiti 2 writing and the onscreen keyboard. NOTE You can also enter information on your computer and move and manage the information between your device and your computer. Or you can send and receive information from other devices, using beaming or your devices built-in Bluetooth wireless technology or Wi-Fi capabilities. Entering information with Graffiti 2 writing You can enter info directly on your device with Graffiti 2 writing. Graffiti 2 writing includes any character you can type on a standard keyboard. Entering these characters on your device is very similar to the way you naturally write letters, numbers, and symbols. But instead of using a pen and paper, you use the stylus and the input area on your device. With only a few minutes of practice, you can learn to use Graffiti 2 writing. Writing in the Graffiti 2 input area You can write Graffiti 2 characters in the input area, or you can turn on full-screen writing and write anywhere on the screen. LifeDrive from palmOne 57 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip Select the top icon to open the onscreen keyboard. Tip You can choose whether the Graffiti 2 strokes you enter appear as white characters in the input area. Your device has two different input area displays that you can use to enter Graffiti 2 characters. To open them, tap and hold Input on the status bar, and then select the icon of the input area you want. Select middle icon Select bottom icon Numerals Uppercase letters Lowercase letters Numerals Uppercase letters straddling line Lowercase letters In either layout of the input area, write lowercase letters, uppercase letters, and numbers in the sections shown. If you write characters in the wrong area, they are not recognized correctly and an incorrect character is written. Using full-screen writing When full-screen writing is turned on, you can write anywhere on the screen. When full-screen writing is turned off, you must write character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area for your device to recognize them. LifeDrive from palmOne 58 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device You can write letters or characters in the following areas:

Left side of the screen Write letters or characters that are assigned to the abc input area. Right side of the screen Write numbers or characters that are assigned to the 123 input area. Middle of the screen straddling the imaginary dividing line between the left and right sides Write uppercase letters. NOTE For a brief period of time after writing a character, a quick tap on the screen is interpreted as a period character. Wait a second to tap buttons or place the cursor so that the action is not interpreted as a period character. Turn full-screen writing on and off by tapping Full-screen writing full-screen writing is on, the icon turns from gray to white. on the status bar. When Write capital or uppercase letters in the middle Write letters on the left side Write numerals on the right side LifeDrive from palmOne 59 Full-screen writing CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Did You Know?

Graffiti 2 writing automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence or a new entry. Writing Graffiti 2 characters 0 1 2 3 4 5 Open an application you use to enter information, like Calendar. Tap the screen where you want your character to appear. Position the stylus in the correct part of the input area, if selected, or in the correct part of the screen if full-screen writing is on. Write the characters exactly as shown in the tables that follow these steps. Be sure to start each stroke at the heavy dot. Lift the stylus at the end of the stroke. Done When you lift the stylus from the screen, your device recognizes the stroke immediately and prints the character at the insertion point on the screen. LifeDrive from palmOne 60 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Keys to success with Graffiti 2 writing Keep these guidelines in mind when using Graffiti 2 writing:

Write the characters exactly as shown in the following tables. Dont write the dot. Its only there to show you where to begin writing the character.

The Graffiti 2 writing area has two sections. Write lowercase letters on the left, numbers on the right, and capital letters across the middle.

Write at a natural speed, and do not write on a slant.

Press firmly.

Write large characters. If youre already familiar with Graffiti writing from an older Palm Powered device, Graffiti 2 writing will be easy to master. Characters are entered in exactly the same way, except for i, t, k, and the number 4. These letters are now made with two strokes, just the way you would write them if you were using a pen and paper. Also, you no longer have to use the punctuation shift stroke for common punctuation like periods, commas, or @. Just write these characters on the correct side of the input area and your device immediately recognizes them. Did You Know?

Graffiti 2 characters made with two strokes are recognized after the second stroke. Make the second stroke quickly after the first so that the correct character is recognized. Did You Know?

Write uppercase letters the same way you write lowercase ones. The only difference is where you write them. Tip Your device has tables displaying all of the Graffiti 2 characters, short cuts, and commands. Customize your device so you can display these tables by drawing a line from the bottom of the screen to the top. LifeDrive from palmOne 61 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip You can select alternate ways to write some Graffiti 2 characters. Choose the method thats most natural for you. Graffiti 2 alphabet 0 Write lowercase letters on LEFT side, and capital letters across MIDDLE of input area Letter Stroke Letter Stroke Letter Stroke Letter Stroke A E I M Q U Y B F J N R V Z C G K O S W D H L P T X LifeDrive from palmOne 62 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Graffiti 2 numbers 0 Write numbers on RIGHT side of input area Number Stroke Number Stroke 0 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 9 LifeDrive from palmOne 63 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Graffiti 2 punctuation marks Write these marks on LEFT side of input area Stroke Mark Stroke Ampersand

Carriage return At

Quotation mark Tab 0 0 Mark Period

. Comma

, Apostrophe Space Question mark

Exclamation point

LifeDrive from palmOne 64 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip Having trouble with the plus sign? Use the punctuation shift first and then make the character. 0 Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area Stroke Mark Stroke Backslash

Slash

Left parenthesis

Right parenthesis

) Equal sign

Mark Period

. Comma

, Tilde Dash Plus

Asterisk

LifeDrive from palmOne 65 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip Having trouble accenting characters? You can always open the onscreen keyboard, tap int., and then tap the character you need. Tip Get help writing any of the Graffiti 2 characters in most applications. Open the Edit menu and select Graffiti 2 Help. Graffiti 2 accented characters For accented characters, write the letter on the left side of the input area, and then write the accent on the right side of the input area. 0 Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area Accent Stroke Accent Stroke Acute Grave Tilde Dieresis Circumflex Ring LifeDrive from palmOne 66 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Graffiti 2 gestures 0 Write gestures on LEFT side, or across the middle of input area Gesture Stroke Gesture Stroke Cut Copy Paste Undo LifeDrive from palmOne 67 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip If you accidentally enter the Punctuation Shift stroke, enter it again to cancel it, or wait a moment and it automatically disappears. Did You Know?

Writing two Punctuation Shift strokes cancels the automatic capitalization of the first letter of a new entry or sentence. Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters Symbols and other special characters can be written on either side of the input area, using the Punctuation Shift stroke. 0 0 1 2 3 Enter the Punctuation Shift stroke. When Punctuation Shift is active, an indicator appears in the lower-

right corner of the screen. Punctuation shift indicator Write the symbol or other special character shown in the following table. You can write a symbol or special character anywhere in the input area. Enter another Punctuation Shift stroke to finish the character and to make it appear more quickly. Done Once the Punctuation Shift indicator disappears, you see the character. LifeDrive from palmOne 68 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Graffiti 2 symbols and special characters 0 Write symbols on EITHER side of input area NOTE The asterisk character appears only if you write the strokes on the right side of the input area. If you write the strokes on the left side, a lowercase x appears. LifeDrive from palmOne 69 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts Graffiti 2 contains several ShortCuts to make entering common information easier. For example, when you write the ShortCut stroke followed by dts, you automatically enter the current date and time. You can also create your own ShortCuts. 0 0 1 2 Write the ShortCut stroke This stroke appears at the insertion point. Write the ShortCut character from the following table. You can write ShortCuts on the left side of the input area, or across the middle. Done The ShortCut stroke is replaced by the text the character represents. LifeDrive from palmOne 70 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Graffiti 2 ShortCuts 0 Write ShortCuts on LEFT side, or across MIDDLE of input area Entry ShortCut Entry ShortCut Date stamp Date/time stamp Breakfast Dinner ds dts br di Time stamp Meeting Lunch ts me lu LifeDrive from palmOne 71 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Key Term Entry An item in an application such as a contact in Contacts or an appointment in Calendar. Tip You can enter text whenever you see a blinking cursor on the screen. Entering information with the onscreen keyboard You can use the onscreen keyboard in any application where you need to enter text, numbers, or symbols on your device. 0 1 2 3 Open an entry:

a. Open an application. b. Select an entry or select New. Tap Input on the status bar to open the input area. Tap abc or 123 to open the alphabetic or numeric keyboard, respectively. Continued Tap to open keyboards LifeDrive from palmOne 72 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip When a keyboard is open, you can tap abc, 123, or int. to open any of the other keyboards. 4 5

[ & ] OPTIONAL Select from among four different keyboards. Tab Caps shift abc - lowercase Tap here to display lowercase keyboard Backspace Carriage return ABC - uppercase 123 - numeric int. - international Tap here to display uppercase keyboard Tap here to display numeric keyboard Tap here to display international keyboard Tap the characters to enter text, numbers, and symbols. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 73 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Entering info from Contacts into another application Having lunch with someone whose info you have in Contacts? Use Phone Lookup to quickly enter their name and phone number into the appointment you create in Calendar. This feature is available in Calendar, Memos, Tasks, and Expense. 0 1 2 Open an entry:

a. Open an application. b. Select an entry or select New. In Expense only: Select Details, and then select Attendees. Add the contact from Phone Lookup:

a. Tap where you want to enter the contact. b. Open the menus. c. Select Options, and then select Phone Lookup. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 74 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip You can also enter the first few letters of the contacts name, and the open Phone Lookup. The first contact name matching the letters you entered is highlighted. Contd. d. Select the contact, and then select Add. 3

[ & ] OPTIONAL To add another contact, repeat step 2. Done The name and phone number of the contact are automatically entered. LifeDrive from palmOne 75 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Editing information Editing information on your device is similar to editing with word-processing applications on your computer. Select the information, and then apply the correct command. Selecting information There are several ways to select information that you want to edit or delete. Selecting text Place the cursor before or after the text you want to select, and drag the cursor over all the text you want to select. Selecting a word

Tap twice on a word to select it.

Place the cursor before or after the word, and drag it over the word to select it. Selecting a line

Tap three times anywhere in a line to select it. This selects the final return character or space as well as any text.

Place the cursor before or after the line, and drag it over the line to select it. Drag up or down to select the final return character or space as well as any text. Drag left to right to select text only. LifeDrive from palmOne 76 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip There are even faster ways to copy and paste information:

Use Graffiti 2 gestures.

Use the Graffiti 2 Command stroke and the menu shortcut for cut, copy, or paste (/X, /C, /P).

Select the text, write the command stroke, and then tap the icon for cut or copy from the command toolbar that appears. Copying and pasting information Copying and pasting information on your device is similar to editing with word-processing applications on your computer. 0 1 2 3 4 Select the information you want to copy. Copy the information:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Edit, and then select Copy. Tap where you want to paste the information. Select Edit, and then select Paste. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 77 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip Delete information with Graffiti 2 writing. Select the information, and then draw a line from right to left in the input area. Deleting information Delete all or part of an entry with the Cut command. 0 1 2 Select the information you want to delete. Delete the information:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Edit, and then select Cut. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 78 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems entering information or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around

Opening applications

Using menus Sharing Beaming or sending information to another Palm Powered device Customizing

Selecting alternate ways to write some Graffiti 2 characters

Creating your own Graffiti 2 ShortCuts Answers to frequently asked questions about entering information Common Questions LifeDrive from palmOne 79 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer In this chapter Program memory and the hard drive How can I work with information?

LifeDrive Manager and Drive Mode Using LifeDrive Manager Using Drive Mode Synchronizing information Other ways of managing information Removing information Related topics With its large hard drive, your device becomes a four-gigabyte (4GB) extension of your computer that you can take with you on the go. This extra capacity lets you carry many more of your documents, folders, photos, and music files with you. But the drive offers more than just storage capacity. With the LifeDrive Manager application, you can simply drag and drop files and folders to transfer them from your Windows computer to the drive, organize them the way you want, and work with them directly on the device. Any time you make changes, you can synchronize to ensure that the most current version of your information exists on both your device and your computer. Benefits

Quickly enter and update information on your device and your computer

Transfer and work with applications, files, and folders on your device

Synchronize individual files or entire folders with one button

Protect your information by quickly backing up and saving files and folders to your computer LifeDrive from palmOne 80 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Did You Know?

Your device saves all information, including information on the drive and in program memory, even if the battery drains completely; none of your information is lost. Simply recharge to access the information again. Tip Use Quick Install

(Windows) or the Send To Handheld droplet (Mac) to install applications to program memory. Program memory and the hard drive Your device contains two types of storage: program memory and the 4GB hard drive. 0 Program memory Your device includes 64MB of program memory for Palm OS applications such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos, as well as email messages. Information in program memory is automatically updated when you do a full sync. For example, if you enter contact information on your computer, you can synchronize to update the info in Contacts on your device. The info for each Palm OS applicationfor example, individual contact entriesmay be stored in your devices program memory. You can view and work with this information from within the application itself. You cannot, however, view any info stored in program memory directly using Files or LifeDrive Manager. 0 Hard drive The 4GB hard drive (approximately 3.85GB of memory available to the user) works similarly to other standard USB drives. You can store any type of file, folder, or application on this drive. View and access the contents of the drive using the Files application on your device, or view the contents using LifeDrive Manager

(Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. You can manage items on the drive in various ways: copying, moving, deleting, renaming, and so on, by using LifeDrive Manager

(Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows), or Files on your device. When you copy a file or folder from your computer to your device using LifeDrive Manager, you can choose to synchronize that file or folder. Another method of storage that you may already be familiar with is an expansion card. You can view and access files or folders on an expansion card using the Files application on your device, and manage your files on a card using LifeDrive Manager or Drive Mode. LifeDrive from palmOne 81 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip Be sure to take your USB sync cable with you so that you can connect your device to another computer to synchronize, use LifeDrive Manager, or use Drive Mode. Its a good idea to take your AC charger with you as well, especially if you plan to use Drive Mode to transfer files to another computer. Tip Enter information for applications such as Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and Tasks in Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer, then do a full sync to transfer the information to your device. You can also access the files on the drive or on an expansion card by opening the corresponding application and browsing to the file. How can I work with information?

There are three main methods for moving and managing information between your device and a computer. These methods are discussed in detail in this chapter. LifeDrive Manager (Windows only) Use LifeDrive Manager to transfer files and folders to your devices drive. LifeDrive Manager instantly copies or moves the items you select. You can choose whether to synchronize items you move using LifeDrive Manager, as well as whether to convert photos and videos for best viewing on your device. Drive Mode Use Drive Mode when your device connected to a Mac computer to move files between a computer and your devices hard drive. Also use Drive Mode to open, move, or copy files on your device when its connected to a Windows computer that does not have LifeDrive Manager installed. While youre using Drive Mode, you cannot use any other feature of your device. Synchronization Synchronization updates and backs up information between your device and your computer. Information entered in one place is automatically updated in the other, and info in your devices program memory and on the hard drive is backed up on your computer. You can synchronize in one of two ways: do a full sync of everything on your device using the sync button on the USB sync cable, or sync selected items on the hard drive using the LifeDrive Manager. You can also synchronize to install applications to your program memory. LifeDrive from palmOne 82 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip If you are transferring a large video file and choose the Format for device option, you can interrupt the formatting process if, for example, you need to take your device with you away from you desk. When you reconnect your device and your computer, the formatting process picks up where it left off. LifeDrive Manager and Drive Mode Both LifeDrive Manager and Drive Mode let you work with files and folders between your device and your computer. So when would you use one method or the other? Here are some common situations in which you would choose LifeDrive Manager or Drive Mode. LifeDrive Manager LifeDrive Manager is available only on Windows computers. Use it in the following situations:

You are transferring files or folders to your device and want to be able to synchronize them.

You are transferring photos or videos and want to convert them for best viewing on your device.

You are carrying a file that cannot be opened on your device and you want to work with it on another computer.

You want to work on your device during the transfer process. With LifeDrive Manager, you can continue to work with information on your device as files or folders are being moved or copied. You cannot use any of the features of your device when it is in Drive Mode. Drive Mode You can use Drive Mode on both Windows and Mac computers. Use it in the following situations:

You are transferring files or folders to or from a Mac computer.

You are transferring items using a Windows computer that does not have LifeDrive Manager.

You have a file on your device that you want to work with using a computer, but you don't want to copy the file to the computer. With LifeDrive Manager, you must first transfer a file or folder to your computer before you can open or edit the item. With Drive Mode, you can use the Windows Explorer or Finder window to open a file or folder directly from your device. So, for example, if you are a guest at a computer and do not want to put a copy of a confidential file on that computer, you can use Drive Mode to open and work with the file directly on your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 83 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip When you copy a photo or video to your device, select the option Format for device if you plan to view the item on your device only. Formatting reduces the file size and fits the photo or video to your devices screen. Use the Copy or Keep Synchronized option if you plan to transfer the photo from your device to another computer. This keeps the original file size, resolution, and file type intact. Using LifeDrive Manager NOTE On a Mac computer, use Drive Mode to move files to your devices hard drive. WINDOWS ONLY On a Windows computer, LifeDrive Manager provides a live window to your devices hard drive. Use LifeDrive Manager to copy, move, and manage files and folders on your device. LifeDrive Manager copies and moves items instantly; you do not need to synchronize to transfer the information. With LifeDrive Manager you can work on your device even while transferring files. Using LifeDrive Manager, quickly move and carry large numbers of your important Office files, photos, music, videos, and other files on your device. Use the Files application to access and edit information on your device, or use Drive Mode to access and edit that information when youre connected to a computer that supports external flash drives. LifeDrive Manager is installed automatically when you install Palm Desktop software. When the application is installed, an icon computer screen. Right-click the icon and select menu commands to open LifeDrive Manager or to synchronize all sync items on the drive. appears in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your When you connect your device to your computer and transfer one or more files or folders into the LifeDrive Manager window, a dialog box appears, asking you how you want the item to be treated. Select one of the following options:

Copy The items are simply copied to your device and are not updated during synchronization. Format for device If you transfer photo or video files to your device, you can choose to convert them to a format that works best on (is optimized for) your device. Converting a photo or video does any or all of the following, if necessary: changes the item to a format that your device can display; rotates the item so that its displayed correctly; and reduces the file to a size that fits your devices screen, resulting in a smaller file size. In some cases, conversion might result in a lower resolution for the photo or video. LifeDrive from palmOne 84 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Key Term Sync item A file or folder on your devices hard drive that you choose to synchronize. If you create a sync folder, all items in the folder including any subfoldersare automatically sync items. If you choose the Format for device option, the original photo or video remains in its unchanged format on your computer. If you are transferring a group of photo and/or video files at oncefor example, if you select and drag them all together or if the files are all in one folderyour formatting choice applies to all of the files. You cannot choose to format some files transferred as a group and not others. Keep Synchronized You can choose to make the items you copy sync itemsthat is, items that are updated when you synchronize your device with your computer. If you select this option, any changes you make to the file or folder in one location (device or computer) are made automatically in the other the next time you synchronize. If you transfer multiple files or folders at once, your synchronization choice applies to all of the items; you cannot choose to synchronize some but not others. NOTE If you transfer a file or folder into a folder that displays the sync item icon

, the item becomes a sync item even if you choose Copy or Format for device. However, the item synchronizes to the corresponding sync folder on your computer, not to the original file or folder. So you have two versions of the file or folder on your computer: the original one in its original location (which does not sync), and the new one in the sync folder (which does sync). For example, suppose you copy a music file called MySong in the MyMusic folder on your computer to the Music folder on your device, which you have set as a sync folder. You choose Copy during the transfer. Because the Music folder is a sync folder, when you synchronize, a copy of the Music folder containing the file MySong appears on your computer. However, the original file MySong remains in the MyMusic folder on your computer and is not synchronized. Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager icon If you want your files or folders to go to a default location on your device, you can simply drag the items onto the LifeDrive Manager icon on your computer. LifeDrive Manager copies the items to a specific location on your devices drive depending on the file types. LifeDrive from palmOne 85 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Key Term Root level The top level of the hard drive, that is, the level of files and folders you see when you click the drive icon itself. Tip If you copy a group of files or folders to the root level of your devices drive, you can then use the LifeDrive Manager window to move those items to the locations you want on the drive. Default folders: Applications, Documents, Music, Photos & Videos LifeDrive Manager copies the items to one of these four folders if both of the following are true:

All of the items you drag to the LifeDrive Manager icon are of a type associated with one of these foldersfor example, JPG, BMP, and ASF files that are associated with the Photos & Video folder.

You select the Copy or the Format for device option. Root level of the drive LifeDrive Manager copies all of the items to the root level of the hard drivenot to a specific folderif any of the following are true:

Any of the items you drag is not associated with a default folderfor example, you transfer photos, videos, and also a graphic that is not a recognized file type for the Photos & Videos folder.

The items are associated with more than one default folderfor example, you are transferring both photos and music files at the same time.

You select the Keep Synchronized option. 0 1 2 3 Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and then insert the other end into your device. Select the item or items you want to copy to your devices drive. Drag the items onto the LifeDrive Manager icon on your computer desktop. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 86 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip If another task is running that uses the USB sync cablesuch as synchronizing or transferring music files with Pocket Tunes LifeDrive Manager waits until the task is complete before the file transfer takes place. 4 Select one of the following options:

Copy The items are copied to the correct default folder or to the root level of your devices drive. With this option, photos and videos are transferred in their original format. Format for device Photos and videos are converted to a format that works best on your device. This option is available only if the files or folders you are transferring include one or more photos or videos. Keep Synchronized The items are copied to the root level of your devices drive and are included in synchronization. This means that when an item is updated on your device, it is automatically updated on your computer, and vice versa, when you synchronize. LifeDrive from palmOne 87 Done CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip You can also open the LifeDrive Manager window by right-clicking the LifeDrive Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen and then selecting Open LifeDrive Manager. Did You Know?

Your devices drive appears in the LifeDrive Manager window as an icon named INTERNAL, but you can rename it anything you want. Right-

click the icon, click Rename, and then enter a new name for the drive. Tip If you do not see any files or folders on the drive or an expansion card, click the plus-sign icon to the left of the drive/card name in the left pane of the LifeDrive Manager window. LifeDrive from palmOne Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager window The LifeDrive Manager window lets you place files or folders anywhere on your devices drive, regardless of file type. 0f 1 Open LifeDrive Manager:

a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and then insert the other end into your device. b. Double-click the LifeDrive Manager icon on your computer desktop to open the LifeDrive Manager window. The window opens to display the contents of the drive on your device; if an expansion card is inserted into your devices expansion slot, the window displays the cards contents as well. NOTE If your device is not connected to your computer or is unavailable, a message appears. Continued 88 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Contd. 2 NOTE LifeDrive Manager recognizes any security preferences you set for your device. For example, if your device is locked, LifeDrive Manager displays an alert message stating that you must unlock your device before using LifeDrive Manager. A message also appears if your device is not connected to your computer or is unavailable for any other reason. Drag, copy, or move files or folders from the desktop into the LifeDrive Manager window to the location you want on your devices drive. You can also open the folder to which you want to move the files on your devices drive, and then click the Copy Files from PC <ICON> or Copy Folder from PC <ICON> button on the LifeDrive Manager toolbar. NOTE You can use LifeDrive Manager to install an application in the Applications folder on your drive, but only some applications are designed to run on your device from that location. To ensure that the application will run on your device, install it to program memory. Continued Did You Know?

You can work with files and folders in the LifeDrive Manager window in many of the same ways that you work with files and folders in Windows Explorer. For example, click a plus sign to the left of a folder name to view the contents of a folder;

select multiple items using the Control or Shift buttons on your keyboard; or click the Refresh button to view updated contents of the devices internal drive or expansion card. You can also manage files or folders by right-

clicking a file or folder name to open a menu that lets you rename, move, copy, delete, and perform other tasks on the file or folder. LifeDrive from palmOne 89 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip You can also transfer files or folders from your device to your computer by dragging the item from the LifeDrive Manager window onto your computer desktop. Likewise, you can drag an item from folder to another on your devices drive in the LifeDrive Window to transfer itor right-click on an item and select Copy, then right-

click on the destination folder and click Paste. Tip You cannot double-click a file in LifeDrive Manager to open it, as you do in Windows Explorer. If you double-click a file in LifeDrive Manager, you are prompted to save the file to your computer before opening and working on it on your computer. After working on the file on your computer, use LifeDrive Manager to move or copy the file back to your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 3 Select one of the following options:

Copy The items are copied to the location you specify. With this option, photos and videos are transferred in their original format. Format for device Photos and videos are converted to a format that works best on your device. This option is available only if the files or folders you are transferring include one or more photos or videos. Keep Synchronized The items are copied to the root level of your devices drive and are included in synchronization. This means that when an item is updated on your device, it is automatically updated on your computer, and vice versa. This option is available only if you are transferring files or folders to the root level of your devices drive. Done 90 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip You can also select the item you want to rename and then press F2 on your computer keyboard to enter the new name. Renaming a file or folder You can use LifeDrive Manager to change the name of a file that is on your device. For example, you may want to add the date or your initials at the end of a file that you have changed. If you rename a sync itemeither a file or a folderon your device, the next time you synchronize, the item is renamed on your computer. If you rename a sync item on your computer, the next time you synchronize, both the original item with the original name and the renamed item are located on your computer. NOTE You cannot rename the default folders on your device drive. 0 1 2 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. Rename the item:

a. Right-click the item you want to rename. b. Select Rename. c. Type the new name, and then press Enter on your computer keyboard. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 91 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Deleting a file or folder When you delete a file or folder in the LifeDrive Manager window, you only delete it from your device. If the file or folder is a sync item, however, and you don't want it to show up on your device again the next time you synchronize, you need to turn on a setting to delete the item from your computer as well. NOTE You cannot delete the default folders on your device drive. 0 1 2 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. Delete the item:

a. Right-click the item you want to delete. b. Select Delete. c. Select Yes to confirm that you want to delete the file. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 92 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip The Properties dialog box contains a Properties tab that displays information about the selected files or folders and lets you change file or folder attributes. See the LifeDrive Manager online Help for detailed information. In the LifeDrive Manager window, open the Help menu and select LifeDrive Manager Help. Deleting sync items from your computer when they are deleted from your device When you turn on the setting to delete a sync item from your computer and then delete the item from your device, the item is deleted from your computer the next time you synchronize. 0 1 2 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. Set up automatic deletion:

a. Right-click a folder containing the item or items you want to delete. The folder must be a sync item. b. Select Properties, and then click the Synchronize tab. c. Select Delete Files on Your PC, and then click OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 93 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip If you plan to use Drive Mode, remember to bring your USB sync cable and AC charger with you, so you can connect to other computers. Using Drive Mode On a Mac computer, use Drive Mode to move files between a computer and your devices hard drive. If you are at a Windows computer that doesnt have LifeDrive Manager installeda computer at a hotel or your friends house, for exampleuse Drive Mode to open, move, or copy files on your device. With Drive Mode, your device connects to your computer like an external removable drive such as a CD drive. The computer must support external removable drives in order for you to use Drive Mode with the computer. Most current operating systems such as Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Mac OS X support external removable drives. NOTE While youre using Drive Mode, you cannot use any other feature of your device, including LifeDrive Manager and synchronization. You can, however, continue to receive alerts such as notifications of appointments or new email messages. If you select an alert or attempt to use your device in some other wayfor example, by pressing a quick buttona message appears, asking if you want to continue using Drive Mode or disconnect from Drive Mode to use your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 94 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 0 1 2 Tip If you format your devices hard drive or an expansion card while in Drive Mode, be sure to select the file system type FAT; do not select FAT32 or any other file system type. If you select any other file system type, your device cannot recognize the information on the internal drive or on the card. Note that if you reformat the hard drive, all information on the drive is deletedand if there are sync items and you have selected the Delete on PC option, those items are deleted on your computer as well the next time you synchronize. Turn on Drive Mode:

a. Go to Applications and select Drive Mode

. b. Select Turn Drive Mode On. Prepare your device and your computer:

a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of the computer, and then insert the other end into your device. b. Connect the AC charger cable to the USB sync cable, and then plug it into a power outlet. NOTE You can use Drive Mode without plugging your device into a power outlet, but we recommend that you keep it plugged in to avoid losing information. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 95 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip You can work with files and folders on your device in Drive Mode in exactly the same way that you work with any other file or folder in My Computer, Windows Explorer, or Finder. Unlike in LifeDrive Manager, you can double-click a file from the computers window to open it from your device in Drive Mode, as long as your computer has software that can open the file. 3 4 Open My Computer or Windows Explorer on a Windows computer, or Finder on a Mac computer. Look for the icon named INTERNAL, representing your device in the list of available drives on the computer. If there is an expansion card inserted into your devices expansion slot, it may appear as a drive named CARD. NOTE On a Windows computer, the expansion card icon may appear even if there is no card inserted into your devices expansion card slot. If you try to work with the icon, an error message appears. Device appears as drive named INTERNAL Expansion card appears as drive named CARD Work with the files on your device as you would on any other external removable drive. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 96 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip If you are working with an expansion card, you must eject the device from the computer before removing the card in order to avoid losing info on the card. 5 When you have finished working with Drive Mode, do the following:

IMPORTANT

to follow these steps to disconnect from Drive Mode before you unplug your device from your computer. To avoid losing any information that was transferred, be sure a. Eject the device from your Windows computer by selecting the Safely in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your Remove Hardware icon computer screen. Select the option Stop Mass Storage USB Device that contains the drive letter for the device or the expansion card, and then wait for the message that says you can safely remove your device from your computer. On a Mac computer, select the Eject command from the File menu or drag the drive icon to the Eject icon on the Dock. If a confirmation message appears, click OK. b. Select Turn Drive Mode Off on your device screen, and then select Turn Off. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 97 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Key Term HotSync Technology that allows you to synchronize the information in your devices program memory and any files or folders on the drive that you selected to copy and synchronize with the information on your computer. Tip Folder sync is faster than a full sync, because it only synchronizes the items you select. Synchronizing information Synchronizing means that information that is entered or updated in one place (your device or your computer) is automatically updated in the other. Theres no need to enter information twice. You can synchronize in one of two ways:

Full sync Press the sync button on the USB sync cable to synchronize all information in your devices program memory, as well as all sync items on the hard drive, with info on your computer. Full sync also backs up any files or folders on your hard drive that are not sync items to your computer. Folder sync (Windows only) Use the sync commands in the LifeDrive Manager window to synchronize a single sync item, a group of sync items, or all sync items on your devices drive, with the corresponding info on your computer. Sync items can be individual files or entire folders, including subfolders. You cannot synchronize info in program memory using the LifeDrive Manager window. IMPORTANT

always have an up-to-date backup copy of the info on your device on your computer. Be sure to synchronize your device with your computer frequently so that you Doing a full sync When you perform a full sync, the following information is updated between your device and your computer:

Program memory If you use the default settings, information from all the following applications in program memory is transferred each time you synchronize your device with your computer using the button:

If you choose to synchronize with Outlook, info from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with info in the same application in Outlook (Memos is called Notes in Outlook). You can also set up the VersaMail application to synchronize email on your device with email in LifeDrive from palmOne 98 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Key Term HotSync Manager Software you use to select synchronization settings and that must be active when you synchronize. Did You Know?

Everybody in your family can synchronize their device with the same copy of Palm Desktop software. Just make sure that each device has its own username; Palm Desktop software reads the username and recognizes the device during synchronization. Outlook. Other info, such as voice memos and notes, is synchronized with the corresponding info in Palm Desktop software. If you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account so that you can synchronize email and Calendar information with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, info from those applications is synchronized with info in Microsoft Exchange, while information from the other applications listed previously is synchronized with info in Outlook or Palm Desktop. Desktop software Any information you enter using desktop software is updated with info in your devices program memory. Sync items Any sync items on your devices hard drive are updated. You can do a full sync in the following ways:

Using the USB sync cable attached to your device and your computer

Wirelessly using Bluetooth wireless technology or Wi-Fi capabilities on your device

Using your devices infrared (IR) port

Connecting to your companys network, either wirelessly or using a cable (Windows only) IMPORTANT

devices IR port. If you followed the instructions to synchronize during initial setup, youve already covered this requirement. The first time you synchronize, you must use the USB sync cable or your To synchronize, HotSync Manager must be active. HotSync Manager is installed when you install Palm Desktop software from the software installation CD. If you havent run the install program from the CD, you don't have HotSync Manager on your computer. On a Windows computer, you know HotSync Manager is active when its icon lower-right corner of your screen. If the icon is not there, turn it on by clicking Start and then selecting Programs. Navigate to the palmOne program group, and select HotSync Manager. appears in the LifeDrive from palmOne 99 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 0 Synchronizing using the cable 1 Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and then insert the other end into your device. Tip If the Select User dialog box appears during synchronization, select the username of the person whose information you want to synchronize, and then click OK. Tip If you need help with synchronizing, see I cant synchronize my device with my computer. 2 Synchronize your device with your computer:

a. Press the sync button on the USB sync cable. b. When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device screen, and you can disconnect your device from the cable. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 100 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip When you synchronize, any items on the hard drive that are not sync items are backed up to your computer. Backing up puts a copy of the file or folder on your computer, but it doesn't keep the two versions in sync. You can manually back up an item in LifeDrive Manager by right-clicking the file or folder and selecting Save to PC, or by clicking the item and selecting the Save to PC icon from the LifeDrive Manager toolbar. Tip To turn off synchronization for a file or folder, right-click the items icon, and then select Turn off synchronization. Synchronizing using LifeDrive Manager WINDOWS ONLY When you transfer an item into the LifeDrive Manager window, you can identify whether you want to keep the item synchronized with its original on the computer. When youre ready to do a folder sync, you can select whether to sync selected items, or all sync items on your device's hard drive. LifeDrive Manager synchronizes only the items you select on the hard drive, not any of the information in program memory. Do a full sync to synchronize both hard drive sync items and program memory info. If you selected the Keep Synchronized option when you transferred a file or folder to your device, that item is already a sync item. However, you can turn off synchronization for any such folder or file. 0 Creating sync items 1 2 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. Select items to synchronize:

a. Navigate to the file or folder you want in the LifeDrive Manager window. b. Right-click the items icon, and then select Turn on synchronization. The file or folder is now a sync item. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 101 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 0 Doing a folder sync 1 2 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. Select one of the following synchronization options:

Synchronize a single file or folder Right-click the items icon, select Sync actions, and then select Synchronize this item now. Synchronize multiple files or folders Select the items you want, right-click any items icon, select Sync actions, and then select Synchronize this item now. Synchronize all sync items on the drive Click Sync All Now on the toolbar at the top of the LifeDrive Manager window. Click here Done A synchronization progress screen appears. Did You Know?

If you put a file or folder that you chose not to make a sync item into a folder that is a sync folder, the item is synchronized regardless of your choice. After the next sync, a copy of the sync folder appears on both your device and your computer, with the sync version of the item inside. The original file or folder that you transferred using the Copy or Format for device option remains in its original location and is not synchronized. Tip You can also synchronize all sync items by right-

clicking the LifeDrive Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen and then selecting Sync All Now. LifeDrive from palmOne 102 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip To check when an item was last synchronized, right-click the item, select Sync Actions, and then select Check Sync Status. Locating sync items on your computer LifeDrive Manager can quickly open the folder on your computer where a sync item is stored. 0 1 2 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. Locate the item on your computer:

a. In the LifeDrive Manager window, right-click the item you want to locate on your computer. b. Select Sync Actions. c. Select Locate on PC. LifeDrive Manager opens the folder where the item is located. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 103 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip The Palm Desktop online Help has lots of info about how to use Palm Desktop software. Open the Help menu and select Palm Desktop Help. Entering information using desktop software Use Palm Desktop or Outlook to enter information on your computer. When you do a full sync, the information is updated on your device. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Open an application in Palm Desktop software:

a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop. b. Click the icon in the Launch bar to open the application. Launch bar New Edit Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 104 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 2 3 4 Do one of the following:

Click New in the lower-left corner of the screen to create a new entry.

Click an existing entry, and then click Edit in the lower-left corner of the screen. Enter the information, and then click OK. Do a full sync to transfer the information to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 105 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer MAC ONLY 0 1 Open an application:

a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer. b. Click the icon in the toolbar to open the application. 2 Do one of the following:

Click New in the upper-left corner of the screen to create a new entry.

Click an existing entry, and then click Edit in the upper-left corner of the screen. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 106 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 3 4 Enter the information, and then click OK. Do a full sync to transfer the information to your device. Done Customizing your synchronization settings You can set the following options for synchronization:

Choosing how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your device

(Windows only)

Enabling or disabling synchronization on your computer, setting whether synchronization is enabled automatically when you start your computer, and choosing how much information to include in the synchronization troubleshooting log (Mac only)

Choosing how application information is updated during a full sync LifeDrive from palmOne 107 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Choosing how your computer responds to synchronization requests WINDOWS ONLY In order for your computer to respond when you initiate synchronization on your device, HotSync Manager must be running. You can choose whether HotSync Manager always runs automatically, or whether you must perform some action to start HotSync Manager. 0 1 Open the synchronization options screen:

a. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. b. Select Setup. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 108 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip Use the default setting Always available if youre not sure which option you want. Tip If you select Manual, you must turn off HotSync Manager, which is always on by default. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-

right corner of your screen, and then click Exit. To start HotSync Manager when you want to synchronize, click Start, and then select Programs. Navigate to the palmOne program group, and select HotSync Manager. Note that if you turn HotSync Manager on, it stays on until you turn off your computer. 2 Select how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your device:

Always available HotSync Manager runs automatically every time you initiate synchronization on your device. Available only when the Palm Desktop is running You must open Palm Desktop software in order for HotSync Manager to run. Manual You must manually turn HotSync Manager on each time you want your computer to respond to a synchronization request. 3 Click OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 109 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Setting synchronization options MAC ONLY 0 1 2 Open the synchronization options screen:

a. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder. b. Click the HotSync Controls tab. Select the synchronization options you want:

Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 110 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Key Term Conduit The synchronization software that transfers information between an application on your computer and the same application on your device. Contd. HotSync Enabled/Disabled Sets your computer to respond to synchronization requests from your device. Enable HotSync software at system startup Sets your computer to automatically respond to synchronization requests each time you start your computer. If this option is not selected, you must open HotSync Manager and select the Enabled option before you can synchronize. Show more detail in HotSync Log Includes more troubleshooting information in the log that is generated when you synchronize. 3 Close the HotSync Software Setup window. Done Choosing whether application information is updated By default, when information in each application included during a full sync is updated in one place (your device or your computer), it is updated in the other. However, for each application, you can choose whether information that has been updated in one place is updated in the other during the next full sync. LifeDrive from palmOne 111 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip Windows For information on choosing whether application information is updated if you are synchronizing your device with Outlook, see the online Outlook synchronization Help. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen, select Custom, and then select one of the Outlook applications from the list. Select Change, and then select one of the applications from the list. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Select the application you want to customize:

a. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. b. Select Custom. c. Select the appropriate username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen. d. Select the application you want, and then click Change. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 112 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 2 Select how information is updated during the next synchronization:

Tip You should generally keep the default setting

(Synchronize the files) for all applications. Choose an overwrite option only if you have a specific reason for sending updates only one way. Choose Do Nothing if you never use an application. Synchronize the files computer) is updated in the other during synchronization. Information that is changed in one place (your device or Desktop overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your computer is updated on your device during synchronization. If information has been changed on your device, it will be replaced by the information from your computer, and you will lose the changes you made on your device. Handheld overwrites Desktop Information that has been changed on your device is updated on your computer during synchronization. If information has been changed on your computer, it will be replaced by the information from your device, and you will lose the changes you made on your computer. Do Nothing No synchronization occurs, so any changes made on either your device or your computer are not updated in the other location. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 113 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 3 4 MAC ONLY 0 1 To use the option you select on an ongoing basis, check the Set as default box. If you do not select this box, the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default setting

(Synchronize the files). Click OK, and then click Done. Done Select the application you want to customize:

a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder. b. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings. c. From the User pop-up menu, select the appropriate username. d. Select an application. e. Click Conduit Settings. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 114 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip You should generally keep the default setting

(Synchronize the files) for all applications. Choose an overwrite option only if you have a specific reason for sending updates only one way. Choose Do Nothing if you never use an application. 2 Select how information is updated during the next synchronization:

Synchronize the files computer) is updated in the other during synchronization. Information that is changed in one place (your device or Macintosh overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your computer is updated on your device during synchronization. If information has been changed on your device, it will be replaced by the information from your computer, and you will lose the changes you made on your device. Handheld overwrites Macintosh Information that has been changed on your device is updated on your computer during synchronization. If information has been changed on your computer, it will be replaced by the information from your device, and you will lose the changes you made on your computer. Do Nothing No synchronization occurs, so any changes made on either your device or your computer are not updated in the other location. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 115 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Did You Know?

Most device application files have the extension PRC or PDB. 3 4 To use the option you select on an ongoing basis, click Make Default. If you do not click this button, the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default setting

(Synchronize the files). Click OK, and then close the Conduit Settings window. Done Installing applications to your device Use Quick Install (Windows) or the Send To Handheld droplet (Mac) to install applications on your device when you synchronize. The applications are stored in program memory and are optimized for use on the device. NOTE You can also use LifeDrive Manager to install applications to the Applications folder on your hard drive. This is useful if your program memory becomes full and you cannot install any more applications there. However, some applications are not designed to run from the Applications folder and must be installed to program memory to run correctly. LifeDrive from palmOne 116 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip A confirmation dialog box shows whether the items will be copied to your device or to an expansion card. You can choose which device will receive the items by selecting the username in the User drop-down box in the upper-right corner. Did You Know?

You can move multiple applications into the Quick Install window to have them ready for installation the next time you synchronize. Using Quick Install When you install Palm Desktop software on your Windows computer, you also automatically install Quick Install. This tool makes it easy to install applications when you synchronize. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 3 Open Palm Desktop software. Copy the application:

a. Click the Quick Install icon in the Launch bar at the left of the window. b. Drag and drop the application onto the Quick Install window. c. When the confirmation dialog box appears, confirm your username, the application name, and the destination, and then click OK. Do a full sync to install the file on your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 117 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip In Mac OS X, you can make the Send To Handheld droplet a permanent part of your desktop by dragging the droplet to the Dock. Then simply drag files you want to transfer to your device onto the droplet in the Dock. Tip Use the Send To Handheld droplet to install music files, photos, and videos to your device Installing applications from a Mac computer You can install applications from a Mac computer by dragging and dropping them onto the Send To Handheld droplet, or by using the commands on the HotSync menu. Using the Send To Handheld droplet MAC ONLY 0 1 2 3 Copy or download the application(s) you want to install on your computer. Drag and drop the files onto the Send To Handheld droplet:

a. Drag and drop the file(s) or folder onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder. b. In the Send to Handheld dialog box, select your username and click OK. Do a full sync to install the file on your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 118 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip To move applications between your device and the expansion card, click Change Destination. Use the arrows to move the files, and then click OK. Tip If you do not see the application or file in the folder, go to the folder that contains the application you want to install. Using commands in the HotSync menu MAC ONLY 0 1 2 Copy or download the application you want to install on your computer. Select the files to install on your device:

a. In the Palm folder, double-

click the HotSync Manager. b. Select the HotSync menu, and then select Install Handheld files. c. In the User pop-up menu, select the name that corresponds to your device. d. Click Add to List. e. Select the file(s) you want to install. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 119 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 3 Install the files on your device:

a. Click Add File. b. Close the Install Device Files window. c. Synchronize your device with your computer. Done Other ways of managing information You can move and manage information on your device and your computer in the following additional ways:

Importing information from other applications into Palm Desktop software

Restoring archived info on your computer

Installing additional applications from the software installation CD

Checking space and version numbers of applications on your device LifeDrive from palmOne 120 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip Palm Desktop Help has lots of information about importing from other applications, including step-by-step instructions. Open the Help menu in Palm Desktop software and select Palm Desktop Help for more details. Importing information from other applications Do you have information on your computer in spreadsheets or databases and want to transfer it to your device? Dont spend time retyping it. Instead, import the info into Palm Desktop software. Palm Desktop software can import the following types of files:

Calendar vCal/iCal (VCS/ICS) and Calendar archive (DBA) Contacts vCard (VCF), Contacts archive (ABA) Memos Comma-delimited (CSV, TXT), tab-delimited (TAB, TSV, TXT), Memos archive (MPA), Text (TXT) Tasks Tasks archive (TDA) WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats. Import the file into Palm Desktop software:

a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop. b. Click the icon in the launch bar for the application you want to import the information into. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 121 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Contd. c. Click File, and then click Import. d. Follow the onscreen instructions to map the fields in your file to the fields in Palm Desktop software, and import the file. Imported fields 3 Do a full sync. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 122 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer MAC ONLY 0 1 2 3 Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats. Import the file into Palm Desktop software:

a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer. b. Click the icon on the toolbar for the application into which you want to import information. c. Click File, and then click Import. d. Follow the onscreen instructions to import the file. Do a full sync. Done Restoring archived items on your computer In many applications, you can save a copy of an item that you deleted from your device or desktop software to an archive folder on your computer. This frees up space on your device, while ensuring the information is available if you need it in the future. You can restore individual entries or an entire archive file to the related application in your desktop software. The Palm Desktop online Help and the Microsoft Outlook online Help have lots of info about how to restore archived files. Refer to these Help files for details. LifeDrive from palmOne 123 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Installing the additional software from the CD Your device comes with many applications that are already installed and ready to use. The CD that came with your device includes lots of other applications to make your device even more useful and more fun. You can install these applications at any time. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 3 4 Insert the CD into your computer. On the Discover your device screen, click Add software to your device. Follow the onscreen instructions to install the applications you want. Do a full sync. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 124 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer MAC ONLY 0 1 2 3 4 Insert the CD into your computer. Double-click the Essential Software folder. Install the applications you want. Do a full sync. Done Checking space and version numbers Before you install a file or an application, its important to make sure you have enough space for it. You may also want to check the version number of applications that are already on your device or expansion card, in case youre interested in upgrading them. LifeDrive from palmOne 125 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 0 1 2 Open the Info dialog box:

a. Go to Applications and select HotSync

. b. Open the menus. c. Select Info on the App menu. View space info and version numbers:

Pick list a. Select the Device pick list and select one of these options:

Device Get information about applications stored on your device. Expansion card name Get information about applications stored on your expansion card. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 126 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Contd. b. Select one of the following options, and then select Done:

Version Displays the version numbers of all of your applications. Size Shows how much space each application occupies. The bar at the top shows the total space currently in use on your device or expansion card. Records Shows the number of records in an application. Done Removing information You can remove applications from your device, and remove Palm Desktop software from your computer. Removing an application from your device If you run out of memory or decide that you no longer want some applications you installed, you can remove them from your device or from an expansion card. NOTE You can remove only add-on applications, patches, and extensions that you install. You cannot remove the applications that are part of the operating system of your device. 0 1 Go to Applications. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 127 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 2 3 Open the Delete dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete from the App menu. Delete the application:

a. Select the Delete From pick list, and then select Device or an expansion card. b. Select the application that you want to remove, and then select Delete. c. Select Yes, and then select Done. Done Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer WINDOWS ONLY NOTE Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software. If you think youll never want to synchronize your device with your computer again, you can remove Palm Desktop software from your computer. This process removes only the application files. The information in your Users folder remains untouched. IMPORTANT If you remove Palm Desktop software, you also remove the synchronization

software and can no longer synchronize your information. Even if you want to synchronize with another personal information manager, like Microsoft Outlook, you must leave Palm Desktop software installed on your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne 128 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer NOTE computer. 0 1 2 You may have to modify these steps to correspond with the operating system on your Open Add/Remove Programs:

a. From the Start menu, select Settings, and then select Control Panel. b. Double-click the Add/Remove programs icon. Remove Palm Desktop software:

Change or Remove Programs a. Click Change or Remove Programs. b. Select Palm Desktop software, and then click Remove. c. Click Yes in the Confirm File Deletion box. d. Click OK, and then click Close. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 129 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with moving and managing information or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

0 Setting Up Switching between Palm Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook Moving Around

Opening applications

Using menus Pocket Tunes

Transferring files from a CD to your device or to an expansion card

Listening to audio files on your device VersaMail Common Questions Synchronizing email messages on your device with email messages on your computer Answers to frequently asked questions about moving and managing information between your device and your computer LifeDrive from palmOne 130 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts In this chapter Adding a contact Copying contact information into multiple contacts Locating a contact on your list Deleting a contact Customizing the Contacts list Making connections from Contacts Working with Contacts on your computer Related topics Say good-bye to a paper address book that you need to update manually every time someone moves, changes their email address, or gets a new work extension. With Contacts, not only is it easy to enter information such as names, addresses, and phone numbers, but it is just as quick to view, update, and organize contact information. You can easily share info with other devices and dial phone numbers or send messages directly from a contact entry using your devices built-in wireless technology. You can even add photos of your loved ones directly to their contact information screen. Benefits of Contacts

Carry all your business and personal contact information in your hand

Keep track of whos who

Keep in touch LifeDrive from palmOne 131 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip If the first character you enter in the Last Name or Company field is an asterisk (*) or another symbol, that record always appears at the top of the Contacts list. Thats useful for an entry like If Found Call [your phone number]. Did You Know?

Contacts info is stored in program memory. This means that you can view the info only by looking at it in the application and you can synchronize the information by pressing the sync button on the USB cable. Info in contacts can be synchronized with info in either Palm Desktop software or Outlook. Adding a contact 0 1 2 Tap the Contacts icon. Add your contact information:

a. Select New. b. Select each field where you want to enter information, and enter it. Select the scroll arrows to view more fields. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 132 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip If multiple contacts share information, such as a company name and address, you can enter the first contact, and then copy the information into other contacts. Did You Know?

You can also enter one or more contacts on your desktop computer, and then copy them to your device by synchronizing. Contd. The following fields contain features to help you enter information quickly:

All fields except numeric and email fields The first letter is automatically capitalized. Title, Company, City, and State As you enter letters, a match appears if you have one on your Contacts list. For example, if you enter S, Sacramento might appear, and if you then enter a and n, San Francisco might replace Sacramento. When the word you want appears, select the next field. Address You can enter up to three addresses, each containing five fields: Addr, City, State, Zip Code, and Country. You can designate an address as work (W), home (H), or other (O). By default, the first address is designated as work. 3

[ & ] OPTIONAL Add a photo:

a. Select the Picture box. b. Select and add a photo from palmOne Media. Continued Select here LifeDrive from palmOne 133 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts 4 5 Tip If you want a reminder about a birthday, check the Reminder box, enter the number of days before the birthday that you want to see the reminder, and then select OK. Did You Know?

Birthdays you enter in Contacts appear as untimed events in Calendar. If you update the birthday in Contacts, it automatically updates in Calendar as well.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Add a birthday:

a. Select the Birthday box. b. Select the birth year, month, and date. Select here After you finish entering all the information you want, select Done. Done That's it. Your device automatically saves the contact. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. LifeDrive from palmOne 134 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip Additional fields appear in a contact only if you enter info into them. If you leave a field blank, it does not appear the next time you open the Contact screen. Also, additional fields apply only to the current contact; you can duplicate contact information if you need to apply the same fields to multiple contacts. Did You Know?

Each field type can be displayed a certain number of times, up to a preset maximum. Once you reach this maximum, the field type no longer appears on the pop-up list. For example, you can display up to seven Phone/Email fields. Tip Select the Note icon next to the plus button to add a note to the contact. LifeDrive from palmOne Entering additional contact information The Contact Edit screen displays certain fields by default. You can customize the Contact Edit screen to display additional fields. 0 1 2 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Display additional contact fields:

a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit. b. Select the plus button in the lower-right corner of the Contact Edit screen. Select here Note icon c. Select the field you want displayed from the list. The field appears in a preset location on the Contact Edit screen. Done 135 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip Any changes you make to field types apply only to the current contact. You can duplicate contact information if you need to apply the same contact fields to multiple contacts. Did You Know?

The email address field type is located on the same pick list as the phone number fields. IM field types are located on a separate pick list. Selecting contact field types You can select the types of phone numbers (work, home, mobile, pager, and so on), as well as specify the instant messenger (IM) account, that you associate with a contact. 0 1 2 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Customize the contact field type:

a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit. b. Select the pick list next to the field you want to change and select the new field type you want. Available fields include phone number, email address, and instant messenger (IM) fields. NOTE You must set up an instant messenger account with a service provider and download instant messaging software to use instant messaging on your device. Select triangle Done LifeDrive from palmOne 136 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Defining custom fields You can define the custom fields that appear at the end of the Contact Edit screen to display any additional contact information you want, such as spouses or childrens names, favorite color, or any other information. 0 1 2 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Define the custom fields:

a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit. b. Open the menus. c. Select Options, and then select Rename Custom Fields. d. Enter names for up to nine custom fields, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 137 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Selecting a contact as your business card You can create a contact with your own information and select it as your business card by opening the Record Menu and selecting Business Card. You can then beam or send your business card to other devices. To beam your business card quickly, press and hold the Contacts application button for approximately two seconds. 0 1 2 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Create a business card:

a. Select the contact you want, or create a new contact with your own contact information. b. Open the menus. c. Select Business Card on the Record menu. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 138 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip You can also duplicate a contact in the Contacts desktop application by highlighting a contact in the Contacts list, and then selecting Edit Copy. Create a new contact, select the Note icon, and then paste the info into a note. Then cut and paste the text into the correct field in the new contact. Did You Know?

If you duplicate a contact and do not edit the name, the contact appears in the Contacts list as <Last name>, <First name>

Copy. Copying contact information into multiple contacts You can quickly make a copy of a contact so that you can edit only the fields you need to change. For example, if two of your contacts have the same work address or phone number, duplicating the first contact simplifies entering information in the second. 0 1 2 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Duplicate a contact:

a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit. b. Open the menus. c. Select Record, and then select Duplicate Contact. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 139 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip In the Contacts list view, you can also press Right on the 5-way navigator to open the Quick Look Up line. Press Up and Down to select the letter of the name you want in each box, and press Right to move to the next box. Did You Know?

Phone Lookup in the Options menu of many apps lets you add contact information when you are creating an entry in another application or addressing an email in the VersaMail app, where it's called Address Lookup. Locating a contact on your list 0 1 2 3 Tap the Contacts icon. Search for the contact:

a. Select the Look Up line at the bottom of the screen and enter the first letter of the name you want to find. b. Enter the second letter of the name, and so on, until you can easily scroll to the contact you want. Select the contact to open it. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 140 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip You never know when youre going to need to look up an old business associate. If you save an archive copy of your deleted contacts, you can refer to them later by importing them. Deleting a contact 0 1 2 3 4 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Open the Delete Contact dialog box:

a. Select the contact you want. b. Open the menus. c. Select Delete Contact on the Record menu.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the contact on your computer. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 141 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Did You Know?

If you select Work, Home, Fax, Other, Main, Pager, or Mobile from the pick list, the first letter of your selection appears next to the contact in the Contacts listfor example, W for Work. If you select email, no letter appears next to the contact. Tip You can also use the Contact Details dialog box to assign a contact to a category or to mark a contact as private. Customizing the Contacts list By default, the Contacts list displays the work phone number for a contact; if no work phone number is entered, another entry is displayed. You can customize a contacts settings to display different information on the Contacts list. You can also customize the appearance of the list. 0 1 2 3 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Open the Contact Details dialog box:

a. Select the contact you want. b. Select Edit, and then select Details. Specify the information displayed with a contact:

a. Select the Show in List pick list, and select the information that you want to appear in the Contacts list for this contact. b. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 142 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts 4 Customize the appearance of the Contacts list:

a. From the Contacts list, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select the display options you want:

Remember last category Check the box if you want Contacts to display the last category shown when you return to it from another application. If the box is unchecked, Contacts opens to the All category. List by Select whether to sort the Contacts list by last name and first name or by company and last name. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 143 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts

Before You Begin You must complete all the prerequisites for the email and messaging applications. To use Quick Connect with your devices built-in Bluetooth technology, you must set up a phone connection. To use it with your devices IR port, run Phone Link Updater, and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection. Making connections from Contacts You can set up your contacts so that you can do tasks like dialing a phone number; creating an email or text message; accessing the web; or sending an instant message (requires additional software, sold separately) directly from a contact screen. Contacts gives you two tools to perform these tasks:

Quick Connect Lets you select a connection type and opens the application for making that type of connection directly from the Contacts list view and contacts information screen. Tap-to-Connect Opens the application to perform a connection task directly by selecting the appropriate entry (phone number, email address, and so on) from a contacts information screen. Using Quick Connect If you have a compatible mobile phone (sold separately) that includes Bluetooth technology, you can use Quick Connect to dial a phone number; address an email or a text message, go to a website, or send an instant message (requires additional software, sold separately) directly from a contact. 0 1 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 144 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts 2 Make a connection using Quick Connect:

a. In the Contact view, select the Quick Connect icon screen to open the Quick Connect dialog box. at the top of the Tip You can also open Quick Connect from the Contact List view by highlighting the contact you want and then pressing right on the 5-way navigator. Tip If you want to close the Quick Connect dialog box without making a connection, press Left on the 5-way. b. Select the type of connection you want. For example, select a phone number to dial the number on your mobile phone, or select an email address to open the email application to a new message containing that address in the To field. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 145 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Customizing Quick Connect settings You can specify which application opens when you choose a Contacts record field, and whether to add a prefix to each phone number. 0 1 2 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Customize Quick Connect settings:

a. Select the contact you want. b. Select the Quick Connect icon at the top of the screen to open the Quick Connect dialog box. c. Select Settings and enter the settings you want:

Number prefix Check the box and enter a prefix to add a prefix to all dialed phone numbers. NOTE A prefix is not added to any number that begins with a + character. All other fields Select each pick list and select the application you want to use to connect by that method. d. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 146 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts

Before You Begin You must have a compatible mobile phone

(sold separately) that includes Bluetooth wireless technology, and you must complete all the prerequisites for the email and messaging applications. To use Tap-to-Connect with your devices built-in Bluetooth technology, you must set up a phone connection. To use it with your devices IR port, run Phone Link Updater and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection. Using Tap-to-Connect With Tap-to-Connect, you can select a contact and dial a phone number or address an email or text message by selecting the appropriate entry on the contact screen. By default, Tap-to-Connect is not enabled. 0 1 2 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Enable Tap-to-Connect:

a. From the Contacts list, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Enable Tap-to-Connect, and then select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 147 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts 3 Make a connection with Tap-to-Connect:

a. Select the contact you want. Select to edit b. Select the entry you want to use to connect. For example, to dial a phone number, select the number you want to dial. To address an email message, select an email address. c. Select the entry to edit it if necessary. For example, you might need to add an area code or country code to a phone number. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 148 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Working with Contacts on your computer Use Contacts on your computer to view and manage the contacts you create on your device. Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Contacts on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:

Viewing, copying, and deleting contacts

Editing contact details

Marking contacts private

Showing, masking, and hiding private contacts

Printing contacts

Changing between the list, contact info, and Contact Edit views

Adding notes to a contact

Adding a date and time stamp to a contact

Organizing contacts into categories

Sharing contacts WINDOWS ONLY To open Contacts on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Contacts on the Launch bar. MAC ONLY To open Contacts on your computer, launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder, and then click Addresses. LifeDrive from palmOne 149 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Contacts or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around

Opening applications

Using menus

Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook Categories Organizing contacts by type and sorting them Entering Information Transferring contact information from other applications such as databases, spreadsheets, and other organizer software Privacy Sharing Keeping contacts private by turning on security options Sending contacts to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device VersaMail Sending contacts as attachments to email messages SMS Sending contacts as part of a text message LifeDrive from palmOne 150 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar In this chapter Scheduling events Color-coding your schedule Setting an alarm Rescheduling an event Deleting events Checking your schedule Customizing your calendar Working with Calendar on your computer Related topics Stay on top of your schedule by creating appointments, setting alarms, and spotting conflicts in Calendar. You can view your calendar by day, week, or month, or as an agenda list that combines your list of tasks and email notifications with your appointments. Schedule repeating meetings or block out a vacation by creating one event set to repeat at an interval you specify. Color-code your appointments by category and add notes with helpful information. Benefits of Calendar

Track current, future, and past appointments

Stay on top of deadlines

Set reminders for appointments

Spot schedule conflicts LifeDrive from palmOne 151 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Key Term Event The name for an entry in the Calendar application, including appointments, birthdays, reminders, recurring meetings, and so on. Tip You can also scroll to a date by pressing Right or Left on the 5-way or by selecting the arrows at the top of the Day View screen. Did You Know?

Calendar info is stored in program memory. This means that you can view the info only by looking at it in the application and you can synchronize the info only by pressing the sync button on the USB cable or with Exchange ActiveSync. Info in Calendar can be synchronized with info in either Palm Desktop software or Outlook. LifeDrive from palmOne Scheduling events Use Calendar to manage your schedule. You can enter appointments, events without a start time, events that repeat at regular intervals, and events that span a period of time. 0 Scheduling an appointment 1 Open Day View:

a. Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. b. Select the Day View icon

. 2

[ & ] OPTIONAL If the appointment is not for today, select the date of the appointment:

a. Tap Go To. b. Select the year, month, and date. Continued Day View icon Go To 152 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know?

You can color-code your calendar to file events in categories. Each category has its own color. You can also mark events as private to hide them from prying eyes. Did You Know?

If you are synchronizing with Outlook on your PC, you can select a time zone when creating a new event. Also, if you created appointments in Outlook that include more than one person, these persons names appear when you synchronize your computer with your device. You cannot edit this information on your device. Did You Know?

You can use more than one line to describe an appointment. 3 4 Tap the line next to the time the appointment begins, and enter a description. If the appointment is longer or shorter than an hour, set the duration:

a. In Day View, tap the start time. b. In the Set Time dialog box, tap End Time. c. Tap the hour and minute lists to select the time the appointment ends. d. Select OK. Start time Duration Description Color-coded bullet Hour list Minute list Done Thats it. Your device automatically saves the appointment. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. LifeDrive from palmOne 153 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know?

Need to reserve a date before you know the details of the appointment? Schedule an event without a start time. Scheduling an event without a start time Keep track of events that take place on a particular date but not at a particular time. For example, you may want to enter holidays, anniversaries, and deadlines. 0 1 2 Open Day View:

a. Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. b. Select the Day View icon

. Select the date of the event:

a. Select Go To. b. Select the arrows to select the year. c. Select the month. d. Select the date. Continued Day View icon Go To LifeDrive from palmOne 154 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can change an event without a time to a scheduled appointment. Select the event description, select Details, select the Time box, and select the start and end times. 3 4 Add an unscheduled event line:

a. Select New. b. Select No Time. Enter a description on the line that appears at the top of the screen. NOTE A diamond appears in the time column to show that the event doesnt start at a specific time. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 155 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip To select intervals such as the 2nd Tuesday of every month or the 3rd Thursday in November of every year, see Scheduling a repeating eventunusual interval. Scheduling a repeating eventstandard interval Theres no need to re-enter events that take place on a regular basis. Just set up a repeating event. This is a great way to block out time for things like a daily walk with the dog, a weekly team meeting, a monthly game night with friends, and annual events like anniversaries and holidays. 0 1 2 3 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Enter the event you want to repeat, and then select the event description. Set the repeat interval:

a. Select Details. b. Select the Repeat pick list and select how often the event repeats: Daily until, Every week, Every other week, Every month, or Every year. NOTE If you select Daily, a dialog box appears for you to select the end date. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 156 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling a repeating eventunusual interval Some events dont fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals, so you need to set up your own repeat intervals. For example, set aside time for a trip to the gym every other day, schedule a class that meets on the 1st Wednesday of each month, or enter annual holidays that occur during a particular time of month such as the 1st Monday in September or the 3rd week of November. 0 1 2 3 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Enter the event you want to repeat, and then select the event description. Open the Change Repeat dialog box:

a. Select Details. b. Select the Repeat pick list and select Other. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 157 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip To enter holidays such as Labor Day, select Month, enter 12 on the Every line, and then select Day as the Repeat By setting. 4 Set the repeat interval:

a. Select Day, Week, Month, or Year as the repeat unit. b. Select the Every line and enter the frequency at which the event repeats. c. Select the End on pick list and select an end date, if needed. d. If you selected Week in step c, select the day of the week the event repeats. If you selected Month in step c, select Day to select the week within the month, such as the 4th Thursday, or select Date to select the same date within the month, such as the 15th. e. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 158 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know?

Reserve a specific block of time during the day or use events without times to flag a series of dates. For example, you can reserve vacation time from 6/236/30 using a repeating event without a time, and then schedule a specific excursion from 9:00 to 3:00 on 6/24 and dinner with a friend at 6:00 on 6/25. Tip Need to enter an event that extends beyond midnight? Enter an end time that is earlier than the start time. Scheduling an event that is longer than a day Reserve a block of time for events that span several days such as a vacation, conference, training class, or an extended project. 0 1 2 3 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Enter the event, and then select the event description. Set the repeat interval:

a. Select Details. b. Select the Repeat pick list and select Daily until. c. Select the year, month, and date when the event ends. d. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 159 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Entering a location or a note for an event Enter a description of the events location such as a restaurant, a conference room, or your friends house. Enter a note such as dial-in info for a conference call or directions to a location. 0 1 2 3 4 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Enter the event, and then select the event description.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Enter the location:

a. Select Details. b. Select the Location field and enter a description of the location.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Enter the note:

a. Select Note

. b. Enter the note text. c. Select Done. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 160 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know?

You can also set a preference to automatically include a time zone whenever you create a new event. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Select New events use time zones. Only new events created after the preference is set are affected. 5 Select OK. Done The location name and a note icon appear next to the event description in the Agenda View and in the Day View. Scheduling an event with a time zone

software. Time zones work only if you are synchronizing with Outlook or Exchange ActiveSync. Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones. Do not use times zones if you are synchronizing with Palm Desktop IMPORTANT Selecting a time zone when creating a new event allows you to travel and have your events automatically adjust to the time zone in your new location. When you schedule an event, set the time zone and time the event occurs in the location of the event. The event automatically adjusts on your schedule based on the primary location you have set on your device. When you travel, you can change the primary location on your device and the event automatically adjusts on your schedule to the correct time according to the time zone of the new primary location. NOTE Only events that have a time zone setting adjust when you change the primary time zone on your device. Events that do not have a time zone setting remain at their set time. LifeDrive from palmOne 161 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 01 2 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Set the time and the time zone:

a. Enter the event. b. Set the time for the event as it is scheduled at the location where it occurs. c. Select the time zone pick list and select a city within the time zone that the event is located. Time zone pick list d. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 162 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Color-coding your schedule Use color-coding to quickly spot different types of events. For example, make all your family appointments green, your work appointments blue, and your appointments with friends yellow. Managing your color-codes Each color-code represents a category of events. You can assign each category a name and select which color you want to assign to it. 0 1 2 Open Day View:

a. Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. b. Select the Day View icon Category marker Day View icon Open the Edit Categories dialog box:

a. From Day View, select the event description. b. Select Details. c. Select the Category pick list and select Edit Categories. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 163 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 3 Select the color-code for the category:

a. Select New or select a category, and then select Edit. b. Enter or edit the category name. c. Select the color you want to give this category. d. Select OK, and then select OK two more times. Done The category name and its color-coded marker appear on the category list. LifeDrive from palmOne 164 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know?

In Day View and Month View you can set the Display Options to show the category list so that you can view all your events or just the events for a single color-code. 0 Tap the Calendar Assigning a color-code to an event 1 2 3 Enter the event you want to color-code. icon in the input area. Select the category marker next to the description, and then select a category from the list. Category marker Done In Agenda View and Day View the category marker next to the event is color-coded. In Week View and Month View the symbol for the event is color-coded. LifeDrive from palmOne 165 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can customize your alarm settings in the Calendar Preferences dialog box. Did You Know?

If you set your alarms in World Clock instead of Calendar, you have different alarm sound choices. Keep in mind that since World Clock alarms arent tied to a specific event, you wont see an event description when a World Clock alarm sounds. Did You Know?

When you set an alarm, a little alarm clock appears to the right of the event description. Setting an alarm 0 1 2 3 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Enter the event you want to assign an alarm to, and then select the event description. Set the alarm:

a. Select Details. b. Check the Alarm box. c. Select the pick list and select Minutes, Hours, or Days. d. Enter how many minutes, hours, or days before the event you want the alarm to sound, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 166 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can also use the Event Details dialog box to change the alarm, location, category, repeat, and privacy settings. Rescheduling an event 0 1 2 3 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Go to the event you want to reschedule:

a. From Day View, select Go To. b. Select the year, month, and date of the event. c. Select the event description, and edit it if necessary. IMPORTANT

description appears in all instances of the event. If you edit the description of a repeating event, the new Change the date and time:

a. Select Details. b. Select the Time box and select the new start and end times. c. Select the Date box and select the new date. d. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 167 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 If youre changing a repeating event, select one of the following to select the event(s) you want to apply the changes to:

Current Apply your changes to only the selected instance of the repeating event. Future Apply your changes to the selected event and all instances of the repeating event that occur at a later date. All Apply your changes to the selected event and all past and future instances of the repeating event. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 168 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can also delete a specific event by selecting the event, selecting Details, and then selecting Delete. Tip Many people find it useful to refer to old events for tax purposes. If you save an archive copy of your deleted events, you can refer to them later by importing them. Deleting events If an appointment is cancelled, you can delete it from your schedule. When deleting a repeating event, you can indicate you want to delete just the selected event, or to include other instances of the event. You can also delete all your old events that are before a selected time frame. 0 Deleting a specific event 1 2 Tap the Calendar Go to the event you want to delete:

icon in the input area. a. From Day View, select Go To. b. Select the year, month, and date of the event. c. Select the event description. 3 Open the Delete Event dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete Event on the Record menu. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 169 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 5 6

[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the event on your computer. Select OK. If youre deleting a repeating event, select one of the following to select the event(s) you want to delete:

Current Delete only the selected instance of the repeating event. Future Delete the selected event and all instances of the repeating event that occur at a later date. All Delete the selected event and all past and future instances of the repeating event. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 170 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Deleting all your old events When you need more space on your device, or you just want to do some housekeeping, you can delete all your old events. 0 1 2 3 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Open the Purge dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Purge on the Record menu. Select the events to purge:

a. Select the Delete events older than pick list and select a time frame. b. Check the Save archive copy on PC box if you want to place a copy of the deleted events in an archive file on your computer the next time you synchronize. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 171 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know?

The Agenda View shows how many unread messages you have in the VersaMail application. Did You Know?

You can use a favorite photo as the background for your Agenda View. Checking your schedule Sometimes you want to look at your schedule for a particular date, while other times you want to see an overview of a week or month. Viewing your appointments and tasks together The Agenda View shows your daily schedule and any items on your Tasks list that are overdue or due today. If theres room on the screen, the Agenda View also shows your schedule for the next dates that have events scheduled on them. 0 1 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. NOTE If Calendar is already open, select the Agenda View icon instead. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 172 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 2 Do one of the following to view your schedule:

Select an appointment to go to it in Day View.

Select a task to go to it in Tasks. Category marker No-time icon Location Overdue task icon Agenda View icon Done LifeDrive from palmOne 173 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Viewing your daily schedule Day View shows your daily schedule one day at a time. You can scroll between days in the current week or jump to any other date. 0 1 Open Day View:

a. Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. b. Select the Day View icon

. Day selector Alarm icon Repeat icon Note icon Birthday icon No-time icon Event duration Category marker Continued Day View icon LifeDrive from palmOne 174 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 2 Do any of the following to view your daily schedule:

Select the day selector to view another day in the same week, select the arrows to scroll to the previous or next week, or select Go To to choose a specific date.

Select the Repeat icon, the Alarm icon, or Details to open the Details dialog box.

Select the Note icon to view the note text.

Select the Birthday icon to view the birthday entry.

Select the category marker to assign the event to a color-code. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 175 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can also press Right and Left on the 5-way to scroll to the next or previous week. To go to Day View for a particular day, press Center on the 5-way to insert a highlight, press Right or Left to select a day, and then press Center on the 5-way again. Viewing your weekly schedule Week View shows your schedule for an entire week. The time frames that appear on the screen are based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences. 0 1 2 Open Week View:

a. Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. b. Select the Week View icon

. Week selector Multi-day event No-time icon Event Scroll arrows After-hours event Week View icon Do any of the following to view your weekly schedule:

Select the week selector to scroll between weeks, or select Go To to choose a week.

Select a date to go to that day in Day View.

Select an event to view the event description and location.

Select the scroll arrows to view events scheduled earlier or later in the day during the selected week. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 176 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can also press Right and Left on the 5-way to scroll to the next or previous month. To go to Day View for a particular date, press Center on the 5-way to insert a highlight, press Right or Left to select a date, and then press Center on the 5-way again. Tip When you turn off the input area, you can see the month before and the month after the currently selected month. Viewing your monthly schedule Month View shows your schedule for a whole month. You can scroll between months or jump to any other month. 0 1 2 Open Month View:

a. Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. b. Select the Month View icon

. Month selector Event No-time icon Multi-day event Month View icon Do any of the following to view your monthly schedule:

Select the month selector to scroll to the previous or next month, or select Go To to choose a specific month.

Select a date to go to that day in Day View. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 177 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can also press Right and Left on the 5-way to scroll to the next or previous month. To go to Day View for a particular date, press Center on the 5-way to insert a highlight, press Right or Left to select a date, and then press Center on the 5-way again. Tip When you turn off the input area, you can see the entire year. Viewing a yearly calendar Year View shows a calendar for an entire year. You can scroll between years or jump to any other year. 0 1 2 Open Year View:

a. Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. b. Select the Month View icon

. c. Select Year. Year selector Scroll arrows Month View icon Do any of the following to view a yearly calendar:

Select the year selector to scroll to the previous or next year, or select Go To to choose a specific year.

Select the scroll arrows to see months that dont fit on the screen.

Select a month to go to that month in Month View. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 178 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Finding events that overlap When an event starts before a previous event finishes, the events overlap. You can spot events that overlap in Week View and in Day View. Overlapping events Customizing your calendar Control the appearance of your Calendar screens. Select display options for the Agenda View, Day View, and Month View. The options you select for each view apply only to that view. You can also choose alarm and start and end time settings. LifeDrive from palmOne 179 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip If the text is difficult to see against your new background, select a different Color Theme to change the text color. Tip If you want to see the hours when you have nothing scheduled as well as your appointments, deselect Compress Day View. But dont forget to scroll down to see the events at the end of your day, or hide the input area and display as much of Day View as possible. 0 Customizing display options for your calendar 1 2 Open the Display Options dialog box:

icon in the input area. Tap the Calendar a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Display Options. 3 4 Select the Default View pick list and select the view you want to see when you open Calendar. Set any of the following Agenda View display options:

Show Due Tasks Display tasks that are due today and tasks that are overdue. Show Messages Display the number of read and unread email messages. Background Use your favorite photo as the Agenda View background. Check the Background box, select the photo thumbnail, and then select a photo. Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 180 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 5 Select Day and set any of the following Day View options:

Show Category List Display the category pick list. By default, the Category pick list doesnt appear. Show Time Bars Display the bars that show the duration of an event and event conflicts. Compress Day View Avoid scrolling and display only the time period with scheduled events. Show Category Column Display the category marker between the time and description. The color of the category marker indicates which category the event is filed under. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 181 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 6 7 Select Month and set any of the following Month View options:

Show Category List Display the category pick list. By default, the Category pick list doesnt appear. Timed Events Show events that are scheduled for a specific time. Untimed Events Show events that are scheduled for a specific date, but not a specific time. Daily Repeating Events Show events that repeat every day. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 182 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can view and schedule events in time slots that are before or after the start or end time. You just need to scroll to those time slots. 0. Setting alarm and time options 1 2 Tap the Calendar Open the Preferences dialog box:

icon in the input area. a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. 3 Select the start and end times of your typical day.This time frame appears in your Day View and Week View:

Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 183 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 5 Set any of the following alarm settings:

Alarm Preset Set an alarm for each new event. When you check this box, you also need to enter the default number of minutes, days, or hours before the event that the alarm sounds. For events without a time, the alarm settings are based on midnight of the date of the event. The Alarm Preset settings appear as defaults for each new event, but you can change these settings in the Details dialog box for individual events. If you dont want to use alarms for most of your events, dont check this box. Alarm Sound Select the sound the alarm makes when it goes off. Remind Me Select how many times the alarm sounds after the first time it goes off: Once, Twice, 3 Times, 5 Times, and 10 Times. Play Every Select how often the alarm sounds: Minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, and 30 minutes. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 184 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know?

Mac Check out the Holiday Files folder in the Palm folder. It contains various holidays that you can import into Palm Desktop software on your computer. Working with Calendar on your computer IMPORTANT

If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, your email and calendar information synchronize directly with your info on your company's Exchange server. You must retrieve email and calendar updates from the VersaMail application; they do not update when you synchronize your device with your computer. Use Calendar on your computer to view and manage your schedule. Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Calendar on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:

Scheduling events

Rescheduling events

Setting alarms

Deleting events

Marking events as private and hiding them

Printing your schedule

Working with Day View, Week View, Month View, and Year View WINDOWS ONLY To open Calendar on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Calendar on the Launch bar. MAC ONLY To open Calendar on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder, and then click Date Book. LifeDrive from palmOne 185 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Calendar or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Sharing

Beaming events to other Palm Powered devices

Sending events to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device

Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook VersaMail Sending events as attachments to email messages Privacy Keeping events private by turning on security options Categories

Editing and deleting categories

Viewing events by category Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Calendar LifeDrive from palmOne 186 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office File Manager In this chapter Creating and managing Office files Opening files from within Documents Related Topics With its ability to store large amounts of important information, your device lets you take your office with you including your Microsoft Office files. With the Documents application, you can carry, create, view, and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on your device. You can also view, carry, and manage PowerPoint files on your device. You can keep updated copies of the files on both your device and your computer so that you can work on them in the most convenient location any time. Benefits

Manage Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files on your device

Improve productivity by taking important docs, spreadsheets, and presentations with you on the go LifeDrive from palmOne 187 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office File Manager Tip The Documents application has a companion application on your computer called Documents To Go. Use Documents To Go to move or copy files to your device when you synchronize. For complete information on this application, click the Documents To Go icon on your computer and then click Help, or go to www.dataviz.com. Creating and managing Office files The Documents application provides powerful editing and file management features for Office files on your device. Whats more, Documents makes it easy for you to share files between your computer and your device. Here are some of the capabilities of Documents:

View Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files in their native format (DOC, XLS, or PPT); no conversion needed.

Create or edit a Word document or Excel spreadsheet on your device and save it in native format. Create or edit a PowerPoint presentation that is automatically converted for optimal viewing on your device.

Open Office files received as attachments to incoming email messages, and attach files to outgoing messages.

Transfer Office files to a Bluetooth or Wi-Fi printer using your devices built-in wireless technology. You can store and synchronize your Office files and folders in the Documents folder of your device's hard drive. View and access the files and folders using the Files application on your device. You can also view the files and folders using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. You can manage items on the hard drive in various ways: copying, moving, deleting, renaming, and so on, using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows), or Files on your device. If you drop Office files into the Documents folder in LifeDrive Manager, they are automatically set to be synchronized. LifeDrive from palmOne 188 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office File Manager Opening files from within Documents In the Documents application, you can view and open any Word, Excel, or PowerPoint file on your device. 0 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Documents. Select the file you want from the list. Done Tip When you are working on a file, save it to your device or your expansion card by selecting Menu, selecting Save As from the File menu, and then selecting the location where you want to save the file. Tip Do you have a file or folder you are always viewing? Add it to your Favorites list for easy access. Did You Know?

You can also open files using the Files application. By default, Documents application files are located in the Documents folder. LifeDrive from palmOne 189 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office File Manager Related Topics Click the link below to learn about these related topics:

VersaMail Sending and receiving Office files as attachments to email messages Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Documents, click the Documents To Go icon on your computer, and then click Help; or go to www.dataviz.com. LifeDrive from palmOne 190 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos In this chapter Reformatting files and copying supported file types Viewing photos or videos Viewing and editing photo or video details Organizing photos and videos Personalizing a photo Copying a photo or video Deleting a photo or video Sharing photos and videos Related topics A picture may be worth a thousand words, but what happens when you have lots of picturesor videosthat you are trying to keep organized? Or maybe just a few that are so meaningful that you want to have instant access to them at any time?

Solve both problems with palmOne Media. Easy viewing and organization of still photos and videos are all features of Media. You can keep your favorite photos right on your device;

select photos as the background for your Favorites and Applications views and Agenda View in Calendar; even add a photo to a Contacts entry. Benefits

Never be far from your favorite people or places

Simplify photo and video organization

Store multiple videos and hundreds of photos LifeDrive from palmOne 191 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Did You Know?

You can carry a video or photo on your device in its native format with no conversion, so you can view it on the computer in the format you prefer. On your computer, use LifeDrive Manager

(Windows); do not select the Format for device option. You can also use Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. Reformatting files and copying supported file types You can view photos in popular formats such as JPG, BMP, TIFF, and GIF on your device. You can view videos in formats such as MPEG-1, MPEG-4, MJPEG+ADPCM, and MJPEG+PCM. When you copy a photo or video from your computer to your device using LifeDrive Manager

(Windows), you can choose to reformat the photo or video to a format that works best for viewing on your device. There are numerous video formats, and not all types can be converted to a format thats viewable on your device. On a Mac, you can use the Send to Handheld droplet to transfer files to your device. The files are reformatted to a format that works best for viewing on your device. If you choose to reformat the file, the reformatted version is renamed so that it does not overwrite the original version on your computer when you synchronize. Only the new reformatted file is synchronized; the original file is not synchronized. In LifeDrive Manager, you can also choose Keep synchronized, which allows you to keep the photo or video in its original format and update it during synchronization. You can store your photos and videos on your device in the Photos & Videos folder. View and access the files using the Files application on your device. You can also view the files using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. You can manage items on the hard drive in various ways: copying, moving, deleting, renaming, and so on, using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows), or Files on your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 192 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Use your cameras editing software to edit or enhance your photos or videos and copy them to your device for viewing. Viewing photos or videos You can view photos and videos in the following ways:

Thumbnail View miniature preview versions of your photos and videos. List View names and dates of photos and videos on your device or an expansion card. Slide show View all photos and videos in an album, automatically one after another. You can easily see a full-screen view of a photo or play a video by selecting the photo or video from the Thumbnail or List View. You can also rotate the orientation of the photo, zoom in to view a magnified portion of a photo, and view or edit detailed information about a photo or video. Viewing a photo or video in the Thumbnail View 0 1 Press the Media button. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 193 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 2 Go to the folder or album where the photo or video is located:

Location pick list a. Select Device or Expansion Card

. b. Tap Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photo or video you want to view:

If the photo or video is in the Photos & Videos folder on your devices hard drive or on an expansion card, select the correct location from the list.

If the photo or video is located elsewhere on your devices hard drive, select Browse, and then browse to the item. Continued Device Expansion card LifeDrive from palmOne 194 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 3 Select a photo or video:

a. If the Thumbnail View is not displayed, select Thumbnails left. in the lower-

b. Select the photo or video you want to view. A video automatically starts playing when you select it. Select a photo or video to view Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 195 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 4

[ & ] OPTIONAL Access controls:

For photos, press Up on the 5-way navigator to zoom in. Press Down to access the photo controls.

For videos, press Center to access video controls. Photo Rotate Send Add audio Play or Pause Full-screen view Progress indicator Video Volume Send 5 Press Center or tap anywhere in the photo or video to return to the Thumbnail View screen. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 196 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Device Expansion card Viewing a photo or video in the List View 0 1 2 Press the Media button. Go to the folder or album where the photo or video is located:

Location pick list a. Select Device or Expansion Card

. b. Tap Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photo or video you want to view:

If the photo or video is in the Photos & Videos folder on your devices hard drive or on an expansion card, select the correct location from the list.

If the photo or video is located elsewhere on your devices hard drive, select Browse, and then browse to the item. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 197 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip If a photo is larger than your devices screen either because of its original size or because you have zoomed intap and drag with the stylus to view different parts of the photo. 3 Select a photo or video:

a. If the List View is not displayed, select List in the lower-left corner. b. Select the photo or video you want to view. A video automatically starts playing when you select it. Select a photo or video to view Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 198 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 4

[ & ] OPTIONAL Access controls:

For photos, press Up on the 5-way navigator to zoom in. Press Down to access the photo controls.

For videos, press Center to access video controls. Photo Video Rotate Send Add audio Full-screen view Play or Pause Volume Progress indicator Send 5 Press Center or tap anywhere in the photo or video to return to the List View screen. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 199 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Did You Know?

In a slide show, videos play through in their entirety before the next item appears. Viewing a slide show By default, both photos and videos in an album are displayed during a slide show. 0 1 2 Press the Media button.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Set the slide show settings:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options and then select Slideshow. c. Adjust the settings:

Show Videos Show videos during the slide show. Audio Add or remove audio. Play the photo voice clips and video sound or background music. Slide Delay Select the time each photo displays. Transitions Select the type of transition between slides. Auto Rotate Automatically rotate the photo or video for optimal viewing. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 200 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 3 4 5 Go to the folder or album where the photos or videos are located:

Location pick list a. Select Device or Expansion Card

. b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photos or videos you want to view. In the Thumbnail or List View, select Slide Show

. Device Expansion card Slide Show Press Center or tap a photo or video to stop the slide show and return to the Thumbnail or List View. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 201 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip You can also rotate a photo by pressing Down on the 5-way to zoom the photo out and then selecting Rotate at the bottom of the screen. Rotating a photo 0 0 1 2 Press the Media button. Go to the folder or album where the photo is located:

a. Select Device or Expansion Card

. b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photo or video you want to view:

If the photo is in the Photos & Videos folder on your devices hard drive or on an expansion card, select the correct location from the list.

If the photo is located elsewhere on your devices hard drive, select Browse, and then browse to the item. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 202 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 3 4 Rotate the photo:

a. Select the photo you want in the Thumbnail or List View. b. Open the menus. c. Select Rotate Picture from the Media menu. d. Select the rotation you want. Tap anywhere in the photo to return to the Thumbnail or List View. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 203 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip You can also view details for an entire album including last date changed, number of items in the album, and sizeby opening the Album menu and selecting Album Details. Viewing and editing photo or video details 0 0 1 2 3 Press the Media button. Go to the folder or album where the photo or video is located:

a. Select Device or Expansion Card

. b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photo or video you want to view:

If the photo or video is in the Photos & Videos folder on your devices hard drive or on an expansion card, select the correct location from the list.

If the photo or video is located elsewhere on your devices hard drive, select Browse, and then browse to the item. Select the photo or video whose details you want to view. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 204 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Select the scroll arrows at the bottom of the Media Details screen to view other photos in the album. Key Term EXIF Exchangeable Image File Format is a standard for storing interchange information in image files. Most digital cameras use the EXIF format. 4 View photo or video details:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Edit Details from the Media menu. c. In addition to viewing photo or video details, you can do the following:

Change name Select the photo or video name and enter a new name. Move to different album Select the Album pick list and select a new album location for the photo or video. Add notes Select the Notes field and enter a note for the photo or video. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 205 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 5 6

[ & ] OPTIONAL If the photo was taken from a digital camera that uses the EXIF format, you can view the EXIF information about the photo:

a. Select EXIF. b. Select Done when finished viewing the EXIF details. When finished editing and viewing details, select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 206 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Use the copy feature to move a photo from your device to a card and vice versa. If a photo is stored on your device, you can add it only to an album located on the device. Likewise, if a photo is stored on an expansion card, you can add it only to an album that is on the same card. Organizing photos and videos You can organize your photos and videos in the following ways:

Create albums and place your photos and videos in those albums.

Move photos and videos within or between albums.

Sort photos and videos in the List View. 0 Organizing photos or videos into albums 1 2 Select Manage Albums Press the Media button. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 207 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Drag the stylus across multiple photos and/or videos to add or remove them all at once. Did You Know?

If you remove a photo or video from an album, it is moved to the Unfiled category. The photo or video is not deleted from your device or the expansion card. 3 4

[ & ] OPTIONAL Create an album:

a. Select whether to create the album on your device or on an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot. b. Select New, enter the name of the new album, and select OK. c. Select OK on the Manage Albums screen. Do one of the following:

To add photos or videos to a new album Select the photos or videos you want on the Organize Album screen. Select to add Select + to remove To add or remove photos or videos from an existing album From the Thumbnail or List View, select the album you want from the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select Manage Albums

. Select a photo or video without a plus sign to add it to the album; select a photo or video with a plus sign to remove it from the album. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 208 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Move photos within albums to easily put the slide show of your childs birthday party in the sequence you want. 5 Move photos or videos within albums:

a. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album in which you want to move photos or videos. b. Select the photo you want to move, and drag the stylus to move the photo or video to the desired location. Done Moving a photo or video within and between albums 0 1 2 Press the Media button. Move a photo or video within an album:

a. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album containing the photo or video you want to move. b. Use the stylus to drag the photo or video you want to its new position. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 209 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip You can also move a photo or video by adding it to a different album. The item is removed from the original album. 3 Select to move photo or video Move a photo or video between albums:

a. Select the pick list in the upper-

right corner and select the album containing the photo or video you want to move. b. Open the menus. c. Select Edit Details from the Media menu, and then select the photo or video you want to move. d. Select the Album pick list, and then select the new album for the photo. e. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 210 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos

Before You Begin You must be in an album to sort manually. You cannot sort when All Albums is selected from the pick list. 0 Sorting photos and videos 1 Press the Media button. 2 Sort photos and videos:

a. Select the pick list in the upper-

right corner and select the album containing the photos and/or videos you want to sort. b. Open the menus. c. Select Album, and then select one of the following:

Sort by Date Lists photos and videos from the earliest to the most recent date. Select Sort by Date again to list items from the most recent to the earliest date. Sort by Name Lists photos and videos by name in ascending (AZ) order. Select Sort by Name again to list items by name in descending (ZA) order. Sort by Size Lists photos and videos from smallest to largest file size. Select Sort by Size again to list items from largest to smallest file size. Sort manually Lets you tap a photo or video and drag the stylus to where you want the item to appear. A dotted black line indicates the position of the item. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 211 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Did You Know?

Create multicolored art:

Select a color and draw on a photo, and then select a different color and draw some more. Each drawing keeps its original color. Tip Select the drawing tool button to change line size. Select the text tool button to change font size. Tip Use the eraser selection on the drawing tool to erase drawings only;

select Undo to delete text. You can use Undo only once to delete text for a given photo. If you need to delete text after using Undo, select Done and do not save the photo, and then open the photo and try again. Personalizing a photo To add a personal touch to a photo, use the drawing tool or add a voice clip. Drawing on a photo 1 2 Draw on a photo:

Press the Media button. a. In the Thumbnail or List View, select the photo you want. b. Open the menus. c. Select Draw on Picture from the Media menu. d. Draw on the photo using the following tools:

Text tool Drawing tool Color button Drawing tool Draw anywhere on the photo using the stylus. Text tool Enter text in the field. Tap anywhere on the screen to open a text field in a new location. Color button Select a drawing color. e. Select Done. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 212 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 3 Select one of the following to save or reject changes:

Replace Original Saves the photo with the drawing in place of the original photo with no drawing; the original photo is lost. Save as New Picture Saves both the photo with the drawing and the original photo with no drawing. You can enter a name for the new photo. You can also select the pick list to save the updated photo to a different album. Dont Save Changes Saves only the original photo with no drawing. Cancel Returns to the Draw on Photo screen. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 213 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Adding audio to a photo 1 2 Press the Media Access the photo controls:

button. a. In the Thumbnail or List View, select the photo you want. b. Press Down to access the photo controls. 3 Add sound to a photo:

a. Select the Audio button. b. Select the Record button to begin recording. c. Select the Stop Recording button to stop and close the Record dialog box. d. Select the Audio button and select the Play button to listen to the audio clip. e. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 214 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Copy an entire album by opening the Album menu, selecting Album, and then selecting Copy Album to Card or Copy Album to Device. Select the album you want, and then select Done when copying is complete. Copying a photo or video You can copy photos and videos from your device to an expansion card, and vice versa. 0 1 2 3 Press the Media button. Select a photo or video to copy:

a. Select Device or Expansion Card

. b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photos or videos you want to copy. c. Select the photo or video. Copy the photo:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Copy to Card (for photos or videos on your device) or Copy to Device

(for photos or videos on an expansion card) from the Media menu. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 215 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Delete an entire album by opening the Album menu and selecting Album Details. Select the album you want, and then select Delete on the Album Details screen. Tip You can also delete a photo or video from the Media Details screen by selecting Delete on that screen. Deleting a photo or video 0 1 2 3 Press the Media button. Go to the folder or album where the photos or videos are located:

a. Select Device or Expansion Card

. b. Tap Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photos or videos you want to delete. Delete the photo or video:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete from the Media menu. c. Select the photos or videos you want to delete. d. Select Delete. e. Select Delete in the Delete Media dialog box. Done Marked for deletion LifeDrive from palmOne 216 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip You can also beam or send an entire album by opening the Album menu and selecting Beam Album or Send Album. Sharing photos and videos You can easily share photos and videos with family and friends. Use your devices built-in Bluetooth wireless technology to wirelessly send photos and videos to other Bluetooth devices within range. You can also share photos and videos using any of the following methods:

Attach a photo or video to an email message.

Beam a photo or video to other Palm Powered devices.

Copy a photo or video from your device to your desktop computer, or from computer to device, by using LifeDrive Manager (Windows). You can also copy a photo or video from your Mac to your device using the Send to Handheld droplet. NOTE Sending a large number of photos or videos using Bluetooth technology or beaming can take a long time. LifeDrive from palmOne 217 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Media or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Camera Companion

Copying photos and videos from your camera card

Viewing photos and videos on your camera card

Deleting all photos and videos on your camera card Sharing Email Sending information using wireless technology on your device Sending photos and videos as attachments to email messages LifeDrive from palmOne 218 CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media In this chapter Copying photos and videos from your camera card Viewing photos or videos Related topics Maybe you have just filled your digital camera card and you want to keep taking pictures. Do you want to review your pictures on a larger screen? You can do this and more with palmOne Camera Companion. You can quickly transfer your digital camera card contents to your device or computer so that you can keep taking pictures. You can also easily organize your photos and videos with palmOneMedia. Benefits

Transfer your camera card contents to your device

Store multiple videos and hundreds of photos

View camera card contents LifeDrive from palmOne 219 CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media Did You Know?

When you use Copy to Device, the program checks for files with the same file name and content. If found, those files are not copied. Also, files with the same file name but different contents are automatically renamed before copying onto the device. Tip

(Windows only) When copying files to your computer using Drive Mode, you can click the Windows dialog box selection Copy picture to a folder on my computer using Microsoft Scanner and Camera Wizard to automatically copy files to the computer. Copying photos and videos from your camera card To extend your battery life, connect your device to a power source when copying IMPORTANT

media from your camera card. 0. 1 2 Insert your digital camera card into your device. The Camera Companion application automatically opens. Select the copy location:

Copy to Device Copies the photos and videos from the DCIM directory on your camera card to the DCIM directory on your hard drive. Copy to Computer Opens Drive Mode on your device and allows you to copy files to your computer. Your device must be connected to your computer. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 220 CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media 3 4

[ & ] OPTIONAL If you selected Copy to Device, you can select the following:

Delete Media on Card Deletes the contents of your camera card so that your card is immediately available for more photos or videos. View Copied Media View the photos and videos that you copied to your device. Remove your camera card. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 221 CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media Tip Use your cameras editing software to edit or enhance your photos or videos and copy them to your device for viewing. Viewing photos or videos Use your devices large display as a picture viewer. You can view the contents of your camera memory card without transferring the photos or videos to your device. 0 1 2 3 Insert your digital camera card into your device. The Camera Companion application automatically opens. Select View Photos and Video. View your media:

a. Select the folder where the photos and videos are located. b. View the photos and videos. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 222 CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Media or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Media

Viewing photos and videos as thumbnails, lists, albums, and slide shows

Copying photos and videos to other applications or expansion cards

Deleting photos and videos Sharing Email Sending information using wireless technology on your device Sending photos and videos as attachments to email messages LifeDrive from palmOne 223 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music In this chapter Transferring MP3 files to your device Transferring music from a CD to your deviceTransferring music from a CD to your device Playing music on your device Managing playlists Customizing your player Working with Windows Media Player on your computer Related topics Are you tired of listening to small talk during that long commute on the bus or train? Do you need something smaller than a CD player when youre out for a walk or at the gym? There is no need to buy an expensive MP3 player. Your device can carry thousands of songs, and Pocket TunesTM lets you play the music on your device. Simply transfer songs onto your device or an expansion card and then listen through the built-in speaker or stereo headphones (sold separately). Benefits

Carry and listen to thousands of songs in the popular MP3 format

No separate MP3, CD, or mini-disc player required

Be your own DJ LifeDrive from palmOne 224 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music

Before You Begin

(Windows only) Install Windows Media Player and the Pocket Tunes plug-in on your computer. Insert the software installation CD and follow the onscreen instructions for installing extra software. Tip The Star button is assigned to open Pocket Tunes. You can also reassign the Star button to open any of your favorite applications. Tip You can also transfer MP3 files to the Music folder on your device using LifeDrive Manager

(Windows) or Drive Mode

(Mac and Windows) on your computer. Transferring MP3 files to your device The Pocket Tunes software that comes with your device is compatible with the popular MP3 audio file format. If your MP3 files are already on your computers hard drive, you need to transfer them to your devices hard drive to listen to them on your device. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 Prepare your computer and your device:

a. Connect your device and your computer to the USB sync cable. b. Go to Favorites and select Music

. Prepare Windows Media Player on your computer:

a. Open the Windows Media Player application. b. Select the Sync tab. c. Select Palm Device from the device drop-down list. Start Sync Continued Select Palm Device LifeDrive from palmOne 225 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Tip You can also use a card reader accessory (sold separately) to transfer MP3 files from your computer to your expansion card. Tip You can also use a card reader accessory (sold separately) to transfer MP3 files from your computer to your expansion card. Tip You can also transfer MP3 files on a Mac computer by dragging the music file to the Send To Handheld droplet. Select the destination for the file, and then synchronize to transfer it. 3 MAC ONLY 0 1 2 Select Start Sync. The files are transferred to the Music folder on your devices hard drive. Done Prepare your computer and your device:

a. Go to Applications and select Drive Mode

. b. Connect your device and your computer to the USB sync cable. Open Finder, and then drag the music files you want onto the Music folder under the device icon, which appears as an external drive on your desktop. IMPORTANT

properly disconnect from Drive Mode. When you have finished transferring music files, be sure to Done LifeDrive from palmOne 226 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Transferring MP3 files to your device The PocketTunes software that comes with your device is compatible with the popular MP3 audio file format. If your MP3 files are already on your computers hard drive, you need to transfer them to your devices hard drive to listen to them on your device. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Prepare your computer and your device:

a. Connect your device and your computer to the USB sync cable. b. Go to Favorites and select pTunes

. Continued

Before You Begin

(Windows only) Install Real Rhapsody desktop application on your computer. Insert the software installation CD and follow the onscreen instructions for installing extra software. You must install this software, even if you already have a version of RealPlayer installed on your computer. The version on the CD contains all of the components needed to transfer music files to your device. Tip You can also transfer MP3 files to the Audio folder on your device using File Transfer (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne 227 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music 2 Prepare Real Rhapsody on your computer:

a. Open the Real Rhapsody application. b. Click the Transfer tab. c. Click the Device Preferences button and select palmOne Handheld from the pick list. FPO Select palmOne Handheld Device Preference button Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 228 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music 3 Transfer the files to your device:

a. Drag the song files you want from the My Library window into the Transfer window. b. Click Transfer. The files are transferred to the Music folder on your devices internal drive. IMPORTANT

Rhapsody is transferring the files, so theres no need to do anything. Do not press the HotSync button on your cable. Real Done LifeDrive from palmOne 229 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music

Before You Begin Set the Windows Media Player Rip Music format setting for mp3. Right-

click on the Windows Media Player screen and select Tools, and then select Options. Select the Rip Music tab and then select mp3 from the Format pick list. Did You Know?

An interactive tutorial on the software installation CD guides you through adding music. Insert the CD, go to the My Music section of the tutorial and select Add music from a CD. Transferring music from a CD to your device If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your device, you need to use Windows Media Player on your computer to convert and transfer the files. NOTE Mac users can use iTunes, included with OS X, to transfer music from a CD to their device. Music files should be imported in MP3 format. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Access the music CD from Windows Media Player on your computer:

a. Open the Windows Media Player application. b. Insert the CD into your computers CD drive. c. Select the Rip tab. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 230 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music 2 3 Rip the songs you want to add to your library:

a. Select the titles you want to rip from the CD. b. Select Rip Music. Save titles Rip Music Transfer the MP3 files to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 231 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music

Before You Begin

(Windows only) Install Real Rhapsody desktop application on your computer. Insert the software installation CD and follow the onscreen instructions for installing extra software. You must install this software, even if you already have a version of RealPlayer installed on your computer. The version on the CD contains all of the components needed to transfer music files to your device. Transferring music from a CD to your device If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your device, use the Real Rhapsody desktop application on your computer to convert and transfer the files. NOTE Mac users can use iTunes, included with OS X, to transfer music from a CD to their device. Music files should be imported in MP3 format. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Access the music CD from Real Rhapsody on your computer:

a. Open the Real Rhapsody application. b. Insert the CD into your computers CD drive. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 232 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Did You Know?

An interactive tutorial on the LifeDrive software installation CD guides you through adding music. Insert the CD and go to the My Music section of the tutorial and select Add music from a CD. 2 Transfer the songs you want to add to your library:

a. Select the titles you want to transfer from the CD. b. Click Save Tracks. FPO Save Tracks Select titles Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 233 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Tip For tips on using Real Rhapsody on your computer, go to the Help menu in Real Rhapsody or visit www.real.com. 3 4 Prepare your device:

a. Connect your device and your computer to the USB sync cable. b. Turn on your device.

IMPORTANT Do not press the HotSync button on your cable. Transfer the MP3 files to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 234 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Tip For tips on using Pocket Tunes, open the Options menu and select Help. Did You Know?

Pocket Tunes continues playing the songs in your list until it reaches the end of your list or until you tap the Stop button, even if your device screen is off. Tip You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version that supports additional music file formats, such as WMA supports streaming MP3, and includes additional features such as graphic equalizers and bookmarks. For more information, visit www.pocket-tunes.com/

palmone. Playing music on your device 0 1 2 3 Go to Favorites and select Music

. Select a song to play:

To play the current song, tap the Play button.

To play a different song, tap the Choose Song button and select a song from the list. Progress indicator Play/Pause Choose song Previous song Next song Volume Shuffle playlist When youve finished listening, tap the Stop button. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 235 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Managing playlists You can create dozens of playlists with your favorite songs. 0 Creating a playlist 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Music

. Open the Edit Playlist screen:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Actions menu. c. Select Manage Playlists. d. Select New. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 236 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Did You Know?

The Add Songs to Playlist screen displays all songs on your devices internal drive and on your expansion card. 3 4 Create a playlist:

a. Enter a name for the playlist. b. Select Add Song. c. Select the songs you want to include on the playlist. d. Select OK. Put the songs in the order you want to hear them:

a. Select a song you want to move. b. Select Up or Down to move the song up or down one slot. c. Repeat this process until the songs are in the right order. d. Select Save List. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 237 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Tip To quickly select all the songs in the list, select Select All. To quickly deselect all the songs, select Select None. 0 Playing songs from a playlist 1 2 Select a song from a playlist:

Go to Favorites and select Music

. a. Tap Choose Songs button. b. Select the Files icon. c. Select Playlists. d. Select the playlist you want to play. e. Tap the Select All button. Done Your device plays the songs in the playlist beginning with the song you selected. After it plays the last song in the list, it stops. LifeDrive from palmOne 238 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music 0 Editing a playlist 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Music

. Open the playlist you want to edit:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Actions menu. c. Select Manage Playlists. d. Highlight a playlist. e. Select Edit. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 239 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music 3 4 Select Edit and do any of the following:

Remove Select a song and tap Remove to delete the song from the playlist. Add Song Tap Add, check a songs box, and then tap Done. Up or Down Select a song and select Up or Down to move the song up or down one slot. Select Save List. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 240 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music 0 Deleting a playlist 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Music

. Open the playlist you want to delete:

3 a. Open the menus. b. Select Actions menu. c. Select Manage Playlists. d. Select Edit. Delete the list:

a. Select Delete List. b. Select Yes in the confirmation dialog box. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 241 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Customizing your player You can customize your MP3 player by setting preferences. Turning off the screen Turning off the screen while playing music saves battery power. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Music

. Open the menus. Select General Preferences and set screen preferences:

Turn off screen while playing after x seconds When you are playing music and not using any of the other device applications, you can set the time period after which the screen turns off. unless the Palm is in its cradle The screen will always remain on when the device power cable is plugged in. Power button turns off screen Pushing the power button turns off the screen but the music keeps playing. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 242 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music

. FPO Go to Favorites and select Music 0 Setting background preferences 1 2 3 Open the menus. Select Background Prefs and set screen preferences:

Enable background play When you are playing music, you can continue using any of the other device applications. Bring up console with pen swipe A pen swipe between the selected icons in the input area brings up the pTunes console. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 243 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Flashing the LED when the pTunes console is turned off When you are playing music while the pTunes console is turned off, you can set the LED to flash to remind you that pTunes is still on and is playing music. This can be a helpful reminder to extend the devicess battery life when you are not listening to music. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Music

. Open the menus. Set the preference:

a. Select Copy From PC Prefs b. Check the box to the preference Flash LED while screen is off. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 244 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Working with Windows Media Player on your computer WINDOWS ONLY Use Windows Media Player on your computer to play and manage your songs. Learn how to use WMP on your computer by using the online Help in WMP. The online Help includes info about the following topics:

Learning about the parts of the WMP window

Finding media

Playing media

Saving and burning media

WMP premium services

Preferences

Troubleshooting LifeDrive from palmOne 245 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Tip Support If youre having problems with Pocket Tunes, go to www.pocket-tunes.com. Related topics Click the link below to learn about these related topics:

Expansion Cards Managing Info Common Questions

Inserting and removing expansion cards

Naming expansion cards

Viewing the contents of a card

Installing the Windows Media Player software and plug-in on your device and computer

Using palmOne Quick Install and the Send To Handheld droplet Answers to frequently asked questions about Windows Media Player LifeDrive from palmOne 246 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Some of the most successful people in the world are also the busiest. When asked how they manage to do it all, busy people usually say, I make lists. The Tasks application on your device is the perfect place to make a list of the things you need to do. In this chapter Creating a task Organizing your tasks Marking a task complete Deleting tasks Customizing your Tasks list Working with Tasks on your computer Related topics Benefits of Tasks

Set priorities

Track deadlines

Stay focused LifeDrive from palmOne 247 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Tip If no task is currently selected, you can create a new task by writing Graffiti 2 characters in the input area. Tip Add a note to a task. Select the Note button, enter the note text, and then select Done. Did You Know?

You can organize your tasks by filing them into categories. You can also mark tasks as private to hide them from prying eyes. Did You Know?

Tasks info is stored in program memory. This means that you can view the info only by looking at it in the application and you can synchronize the information by pressing the sync button on the USB cable. LifeDrive from palmOne Creating a task 0 1 2 3 Tap the Tasks icon in the input area. Create a task:

a. Select New. b. Enter a description of the task. Due date Long description New task Priority number Note button

[ & ] OPTIONAL Assign a priority and due date:

a. Tap the priority number and select a number (1 is the most important). b. Tap the due date and select a date from the list, or select Choose Date to select a date from the calendar. Done Thats it. Your device automatically saves the task. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. 248 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks

Before You Begin Create a task and assign it a due date. A task must have a due date before you can set an alarm. Tip You can customize the alarm sound for your tasks in the Task Preferences dialog box. Did You Know?

When you set an alarm, a little alarm clock appears to the right of the task description. 0 Setting an alarm 1 2 Tap the Tasks icon in the input area. Open the Set Alarm dialog box:

a. Select the task you want to assign an alarm to. b. Select Details. c. Select the Alarm box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 249 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Tip To select intervals such as the 2nd Tuesday of every month or the 3rd Thursday in November of every year, see Scheduling a repeating taskunusual interval. 3 Set the alarm:

a. Check the Alarm box. b. Enter how many days before the due date you want the alarm to sound. c. Select the time columns to set the time the alarm sounds. d. Select OK, and then select OK again. Done Scheduling a repeating taskstandard interval Repeating tasks are a great way to add tasks that happen over and over again, like taking out the trash every Thursday night or making monthly mortgage or rent payments. 0 1 2 Tap the Tasks icon in the input area. Enter the task you want to repeat and assign it a due date. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 250 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks 3 Set the repeat interval:

a. Select the task description, and then select Details. b. Select the Repeat pick list and select how often the task repeats: Daily until, Every week, Every other week, Every month, or Every year. NOTE If you select Daily, a dialog box appears for you to select the end date. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 251 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Scheduling a repeating taskunusual interval For tasks that dont fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals, you can set up your own repeat intervals. For example, enter tasks for paying a quarterly insurance bill or a credit card bill that is due every 28 days, or changing your smoke detector battery every six months. 0 1 2 3 Tap the Tasks icon in the input area. Enter the task you want to repeat and assign it a due date. Open the Change Repeat dialog box:

a. Select Details. b. Select the Repeat pick list and select Other. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 252 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Tip To schedule an annual task, such as decorating for a holiday on the first Sunday of a particular month, select Month as the repeat unit, enter 12 on the Every line, and then select Day as the Repeat By setting. 4 Set the repeat interval:

a. Select Day, Week, Month, or Year as the repeat unit. b. Select Fixed Schedule to base the due date on the due date of the current task, or select After Completed to base the due date on the date you complete this task. With this option if you complete this task early or late, the due date for the next task adjusts accordingly. c. Select the Every line and enter the frequency at which the task repeats. d. Select the End on pick list and select an end date, if needed. e. If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and Week in step a, select the day of the week the task repeats. If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and Month in step a, select Day to select the week within the month, such as the 4th Thursday, or select Date to select the same date within the month, such as the 15th. f. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 253 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Did You Know?

Overdue tasks have an exclamation point (!) next to the due date. Tip Your Task Preferences settings control which tasks appear in the Tasks list, such as completed or due tasks. To change these settings, open the Options menu and select Preferences. Tip Create a new category for tasks by selecting Edit Categories in the Category pick list. Organizing your tasks Sometimes you want to look at all the things you need to do, while at other times you want to see only certain types of tasks. 0 1 2 Tap the Tasks icon in the input area. In the Tasks list, select one of these options:

All Displays all your tasks. Date Displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame. Select the pick list in the upper-right to select Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or Past Due. Category Displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category. Select the pick list in the upper-right to select a different category. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 254 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Tip You can set Task Preferences to record the date that you finish your tasks, and you can show or hide finished tasks. To change these settings, open the Options menu and select Preferences. Marking a task complete You can check off a task to indicate that youve completed it. 0 1 2 Tap the Tasks icon in the input area. Check the box on the left side of the task. Done NOTE Palm Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook handle completed repeating tasks differently. Palm Desktop software checks off all overdue instances of the task, and Microsoft Outlook checks off only the oldest instance of the task. LifeDrive from palmOne 255 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Tip You can also delete a specific task by selecting the task, selecting Details, and then selecting Delete. Tip If you save an archive copy of your deleted tasks, you can refer to them later by importing them. Deleting tasks If a task is cancelled, you can delete it from your Tasks list. When you delete a repeating task, you delete all other instances of the task. You can also delete all your completed tasks. 0 Tap the Tasks Deleting a specific task 1 2 3 Select the task you want to delete. Open the Delete Task dialog box:

icon in the input area. a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete Task on the Record menu. 4 5

[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the task on your computer. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 256 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Tip Many people find it useful to refer to old tasks for tax purposes. If you save an archive copy of your deleted tasks, you can refer to them later by importing them. 0 Deleting all your completed tasks 1 2 Open the Purge dialog box:

Tap the Tasks icon in the input area. a. Open the menus. b. Select Purge on the Record menu.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of your completed tasks on your computer. Select OK. Done 3 4 LifeDrive from palmOne 257 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Did You Know?

Calendars Agenda View also displays your tasks. Customizing your Tasks list Control which tasks show up in the Tasks list and how they are sorted. These settings also affect tasks in Calendars Agenda View. You can also choose the alarm sound for your tasks. 0 1 2 Tap the Tasks icon in the input area. Open the Preferences dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 258 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks 3 Change any of the following settings, and then select OK:

Sort by Select the order in which the tasks appear in the Tasks list. Show Completed Tasks Display your finished tasks in the Tasks list. If you turn off this setting, your finished tasks disappear from the list when you check them off, but they stay in your devices memory until you purge them. Record Completion Date Replace the due date you assign to a task with the date you really complete and check off the task. If you dont assign a due date to a task, the completion date still records when you complete the task. Show Due Dates Display each tasks due date in the list (if you assigned one), and display an exclamation point next to each task that is overdue. Show Priorities Show the priority setting for each task in the list. Show Categories Show the category for each task in the list. Alarm Sound Select a sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 259 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Working with Tasks on your computer Use Tasks on your computer to view and manage your tasks. Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Tasks on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:

Learning about the parts of the Tasks window

Entering, editing, and deleting tasks

Creating repeating tasks

Marking tasks private

Showing, masking, and hiding private tasks

Assigning tasks to categories

Printing your task list

Selecting how to view tasks

Sorting tasks by due date, priority level, or categories WINDOWS ONLY To open Tasks on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Tasks on the Launch bar. MAC ONLY To open Tasks on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder, and then click To Dos. LifeDrive from palmOne 260 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Tasks or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

VersaMail Sending tasks as attachments to email messages Sharing

Beaming tasks to other Palm Powered devices

Sending tasks to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device

Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook Privacy Keeping tasks private by turning on security options Categories Organizing tasks by type Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Tasks LifeDrive from palmOne 261 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos In this chapter Creating a memo Viewing and editing a memo Moving memos in your memos list Deleting a memo Working with Memos on your computer Related topics Your device contains applications for storing the most common types of information: contact names and numbers, appointments, and so on. Memos is the tool to use for capturing information that is meaningful to you but does not fall into one of these categories. From meeting notes to recipes and favorite quotations, Memos provides a quick and easy way to enter, store, and share your important information. Benefits of Memos

Store essential but hard-to-remember information

Send memos to colleagues wirelessly

Synchronize your information to back it up on your computer LifeDrive from palmOne 262 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos Tip In the Memos list, you can also just start writing to create a new memo. The first letter is automatically capitalized. Tip Use Phone Lookup to quickly add a name and phone number to a memo. Did You Know?

Memos info is stored in program memory. This means that you can view the info only by looking at it in the application and you can synchronize the information by pressing the sync button on the USB cable. Info in Memos can be synchronized with info in either Palm Desktop software or Outlook. Creating a memo 0 1 2 Tap the Memos icon in the input area. Create a memo:

a. Select New. b. Enter your memo. Tap Enter on the onscreen keyboard or draw the Graffiti 2 writing Return stroke to move to a new line in the memo. c. Select Done. Done That's it. Your device automatically saves the memo. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. LifeDrive from palmOne 263 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos Tip The Memos list shows the first line of each memo, so make sure that first line is something you will recognize. Did You Know?

You can connect your device to a portable keyboard and type your memos on the go without carrying around a heavy laptop. You can purchase a variety of portable keyboards. Visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive and click the Accessories link. Tip You can change the size of the text in Memos to enhance readability. Viewing and editing a memo 0 1 2 Tap the Memos icon in the input area. View or edit the memo:

a. In the Memos list, select the memo you want. b. Read or edit the memo, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 264 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos Moving memos in your memos list You can move memos up or down in your memos list. For example, you might want to keep all memos on a certain topic grouped together. 0 1 2 Tap the Memos icon in the input area. Move a memo:

a. Locate the memo you want. Did You Know?

If you use Palm Desktop software for synchronizing, you can send a memo to your computer by synchronizing, and then open the memo on your computer in an application such as Microsoft Word for further editing, formatting, and so on. Right-click the memo on your computer, click Send To, and then select the application to which you want to send the memo. b. Move the memo up or down by dragging the stylus across the screen. A black dotted line appears to represent the memo you are moving. c. When the line is in the location you want for your memo, lift the stylus. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 265 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos Tip Need to retrieve that holiday recipe you stored? If you save an archive copy of your deleted memos, you can refer to them later by importing them. Deleting a memo 0 1 2 3 4 Tap the Memos icon in the input area. Open the Delete Memo dialog box:

a. Locate the memo you want. b. Open the menus. c. Select Delete Memo on the Record menu.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the memo on your computer. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 266 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos Tip You can copy the text of a memo and paste it into a new Word file in Documents on your device. Edit the text in Documents, save it as a Microsoft Word file, and then send the file to your computer by synchronizing so you can view and edit it in Word. Working with Memos on your computer Use Memos on your computer to view and manage the memos you create on your device. Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Memos on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:

Viewing, copying, and deleting memos

Editing memo details

Marking memos private

Showing, masking, and hiding private memos

Printing memos

Changing between the list and single memo views

Adding a date and time stamp to a memo

Organizing memos into categories

Sorting memos

Sharing memos WINDOWS ONLY To open Memos on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Memos on the Launch bar. MAC ONLY To open Memos on your computer, launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder, and then select Memos. LifeDrive from palmOne 267 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Memos or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

lifedrive-userguide. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around

Opening applications

Using menus Entering Information Adding a phone number or other contact information to a memo using Phone Lookup Categories Organizing memos by arranging them into categories and sorting them Privacy Sharing Keeping memos private by turning on security options

Beaming memos to other Palm Powered devices

Sending memos to other Bluetooth devices using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your device

Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook VersaMail Sending memos as attachments to email messages SMS Sending memos as part of a text message Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Memos LifeDrive from palmOne 268 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad In this chapter Creating a note Viewing and editing a note Deleting a note Working with Note Pad on your computer Related topics Need to jot down a phone number or a reminder to yourself? Avoid fumbling for scraps of paper, and write important reminders in Note Pad. You can use Note Pad to do everything you might do with a piece of paper and a pencil, such as drawing a quick sketch. Note Pad gives you a place to draw freehand and take notes in your personal handwriting, which is even faster and more flexible than creating a memo on your device. Benefits of Note Pad

Capture information in the moment

A picture is worth a thousand words

See reminders when you set alarms

Send notes to colleagues wirelessly LifeDrive from palmOne 269 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad

Before You Begin Make sure full-screen writing is turned off. You cannot create or edit notes in Note Pad when full-screen writing is on. Tip Select the pen selector to change the pen width or to select the eraser. To clear the screen completely, select the note (anywhere but the title), open the Edit menu, and select Clear Note. Did You Know?

Note Pad info is stored in program memory. This means that you can view the info only by looking at it in the application and you can synchronize the information by pressing the sync button on the USB cable. Creating a note 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Applications and select Note Pad

. Create a note:

a. Use the stylus to write your note directly on the device screen. b. Select the time at the top of the screen and enter a title using Graffiti 2 writing or the onscreen keyboard. Category box Time or title Scroll bar Pen selector Eraser

[ & ] OPTIONAL Assign the note to a category by selecting the Category box in the upper-right corner, and then selecting a category. Select Done. Done Thats it. Your device automatically saves the note. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. LifeDrive from palmOne 270 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad 0 0 Choosing the pen and paper (background) colors 1 2 Go to Applications and select Note Pad Open the Select Colors dialog box:

. a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list. b. Open the menus. c. Select Options, and then select Preferences. d. Select Color. 3 Select the pen and paper colors:

a. Select Pen, and then select the ink color you want to use. b. Select Paper, and then select the background color you want to use. c. Select OK, and then select OK again. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 271 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Tip Change the alarm sound by opening the Options menu, selecting Preferences, and then selecting a sound from the Alarm Sound pick list. Setting an alarm To use a note as a reminder, set an alarm for that note. 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select Note Pad

. Open the note:

a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list. b. Select the note you want to set an alarm for. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 272 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Tip You can also open the Set Alarm dialog box by selecting a note and tapping the right edge of the screen next to the note title. 3 Set the alarm:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Alarm. c. Select the Date box, and then select the year, month, and date you want the alarm to sound. d. Select the time you want the alarm to sound. e. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 273 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Tip Sort the Note Pad list alphabetically, by date, or manually. Open the Options menu, select Preferences, and then select the Sort by pick list. If you sort manually, you can rearrange the list by dragging notes to another position in the list. Did You Know?

Prevent others from viewing your notes by marking them as private. Viewing and editing a note 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select Note Pad

. Open the note:

a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list. b. Select the note you want to view or edit. Read or edit the note, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 274 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Tip You can also delete a note by opening the Record menu and selecting Delete Note. Tip Want to get rid of those deletion confirmation messages? Open the Options menu, select Preferences, and then uncheck the Confirm note delete box. Deleting a note 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select Note Pad

. Open the note:

a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list. b. Select the note you want to delete. Select Delete, and then select OK to confirm deletion. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 275 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Working with Note Pad on your computer Use Note Pad on your computer to view and manage the handwritten notes you create on your device. Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Note Pad on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:

Learning about the parts of the Note Pad window

Viewing, copying, and deleting notes

Editing note details and titles

Setting an alarm for a note

Marking notes private

Showing, masking, and hiding private notes

Printing notes

Changing between the List and note Preview views

Sorting notes

Sharing notes WINDOWS ONLY To open Note Pad on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Note Pad on the Launch bar. MAC ONLY To open Note Pad on your computer, double-click the Note Pad icon in the Palm folder. LifeDrive from palmOne 276 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Note Pad or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around

Opening applications

Using menus Sharing

Beaming notes to other Palm Powered devices

Sending notes to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device VersaMail Sending notes as attachments to email messages Privacy Keeping notes private by turning on security options Categories Creating categories so you can organize notes Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Notes LifeDrive from palmOne 277 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos In this chapter Creating a voice memo Listening to a voice memo Setting an alarm for a voice memo Saving a voice memo to an expansion card An important idea pops into your head, and you need to record it before you forget it. If a brilliant marketing idea hits when youre away from your office, Voice Memo is the tool you need. Voice Memo provides a place for you to record and play back notes, agenda items, and other important thoughts directly on your handheld. Record client meeting notes on the way to the office, and then send them to your assistant in an e-mail to transcribe them. Or use a voice memo with an alarm as a reminder message for that errand you promised not to forget. Benefits of Voice Memo

Capture thoughts on the fly

Send recorded memos to colleagues

Synchronize voice memos to back them up on your computer LifeDriveDevice 278 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Did You Know?

You can automatically store voice memos on an expansion card. Tip For best results, hold your device within about one foot of your mouth while recording. Tip To pause your recording, you must keep the Voice Memo button held down and then tap Pause. For longer recordings where you want to pause multiple times, use the onscreen control Did You Know?

Voice Memo info is stored in program memory. This means that you can view and listen to memos only in the application and you can synchronize the memos by pressing the sync button on the USB cable. LifeDriveDevice Creating a voice memo You can create a quick voice memo using the application button on the side of your device, or you can use the pause control for a longer memo that you can pause and restart as your ideas flow. 0 Creating a quick voice memo using the application button 1 Hold down the Voice Memo application button tone indicates that recording has started. on the side of your device. A 2 3 Record your voice memo:

a. Face your device and begin speaking. Continue holding the Voice Memo button while recording. b. When you have finished recording, release the Voice Memo button. A tone indicates that recording has stopped and the memo is finished. NOTE Pressing the Voice Memo application button again starts a new memo. Select Done. Done That's it. Your device automatically saves the voice memo. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. 279 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Creating a longer voice memo using the pause control Pause and resume recording as many times as you want to make sure you capture all of your thoughts. 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select Voice Memo

. Alternately, you can press and quickly release the Voice Memo application button

. Record your voice memo:

a. Tap New. b. Tap Record. A tone indicates that recording has started. c. Face your device and begin speaking. Continued Record LifeDriveDevice 280 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Tip Once you pause your recording, you can use other applications and come back later to resume recording. To resume recording, just tap the Voice Memo icon or press and release the Voice Memo application button, and then tap Record. Tip You can organize your voice memos by storing them into categories, such as personal or marketing ideas. 3 4 Pause and restart recording:

a. Tap Pause to stop recording. Recording status A tone indicates that recording has paused. b. Tap Record. A tone indicates that recording has restarted. Pause c. Pause and restart recording as many times as you want. You can use other applications while the voice memo is paused. Tap Stop. A tone sounds to indicate that recording has stopped. Continued Stop LifeDriveDevice 281 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos 5 6

[ & ] OPTIONAL Tap on the title line and enter a title for your memo. You can choose to leave the time as part of the title or remove it. You can also select a category to store your memo. If you want to listen to your memo, tap the Play button. Select Done Done Tap to select a category Tap the title line and enter a name Play LifeDriveDevice 282 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Listening to a voice memo 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select Voice Memo

. In the Voice Memo list, select the voice memo title. The voice memo begins to play after a few seconds. Tip You can sort the Voice Memo list by date, alphabetically, by length of memo, or manually. Go to the Preferences menu and tap the Sort by pick list to select a sorting scheme. Tip Press Right or Left on the navigator to listen to the next or previous voice memo. Pause Speaker icon Continued LifeDriveDevice 283 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos 3 4

[ & ] OPTIONAL Set the volume level:

a. Select the Speaker icon. b. Press Up or Down on the navigator to adjust the volume. c. Press Done. Select Done. Done LifeDriveDevice 284 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Tip You can use a concerto or a bird chirp or to a number of other sounds for your alarm. Open the menus, select Options, and then select Preferences. Tap the Alarm pick list to select a sound. Setting an alarm for a voice memo 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Applications and select Voice Memo

. Select the voice memo to which you want to assign an alarm. Open the Alarm dialog box:

a. Open the menus

. b. Select Options, and then select Alarm. Set the alarm:

a. Tap the Date box and select the year, month, and date you want the alarm to sound. b. Tap the Time box and select the hour and minute you want the alarm to sound. Continued LifeDriveDevice 285 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos 5 6

[ & ] OPTIONAL Select the Auto-play check box to automatically play the voice memo when the alarm goes off. Select OK. Done LifeDriveDevice 286 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos

Before You Begin You must have an expansion card inserted in your devices expansion card slot. Did You Know?

When you store voice memos on an expansion card, they do not appear in the Voice Memo portion of Palm Desktop software after a HotSync operation and are not backed up. Did You Know?

You cannot mark voice memos private or attach alarms to voice memos that are stored on an expansion card. Saving a voice memo to an expansion card You can create voice memos for others by storing your voice memos on an expansion card. Voice Memo enables you to store specific voice memos on an expansion card, or to configure your device to always store voice memos on an expansion card when one is present. 0 Go to Applications and select Voice Memo Saving a specific memo to an expansion card 1 2 3 4 Open a voice memo. Select Done. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner and select Card. Done LifeDriveDevice 287 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos 0 Automatically storing all voice memos on an expansion card 1 2 Go to Applications and select Voice Memo Open the Alarm dialog box:

. a. Open the menus

. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. Select the check box Record automatically to expansion card, if present. Tap OK. Done 3 4 LifeDriveDevice 288 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos My Handheld Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Voice Memo or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around

Opening applications

Using menus Categories Organizing voice memos by arranging them into categories and sorting them Privacy Sharing Keeping voice memos private by turning on security options

Exchanging voice memos with other palmOne device users by beaming them

Sending voice memos to other palmOne Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth technology on your device E-mail Sending voice memos as attachments to e-mail messages Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Voice Memo LifeDriveDevice 289 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections In this chapter What can I do with the built-

in Wi-Fi wireless technology?

What types of connections can I make?

Wi-Fi signal strength indicator Setting up a Wi-Fi network connection Accessing email and the web with Wi-Fi Setting up a Wi-Fi device-to-

device network Related topics Staying connected means you have the latest wireless technology at your fingertips at all times. Now your device can actually connect you to the wireless world using either Wi-Fi or Bluetooth wireless technology. During the day, you need Wi-Fi to access your corporate network. During the evening, connect to the Wi-Fi wireless network at your home or the local coffee shop to access your personal email or browse the Internet. Benefits

Connect to your corporate network wirelessly

Stay up-to-date by connecting wirelessly anywhere

Transfer documents wirelessly LifeDriveDevice 290 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections Key Term Wi-Fi Wireless technology that enables networks with access points to allow devices such as handhelds, printers, and computers to connect wirelessly to the Internet and corporate networks. Did You Know?

If you are out of range of a Wi-Fi access point, you can remain connected using Bluetooth wireless technology. What can I do with the built-in Wi-Fi wireless technology?

Access your corporate network. Whether you are attending a meeting or roaming the hallway, you can stay connected to the information you need. Send email messages. Whether you send email messages once a week or constantly throughout the day, wireless connectivity means that you can share information. Access the web. Connect to the Internet for news and information in a caf or in a meeting. Imagine your desk and workstation without Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly. cable clutter. Wireless technology on your device replaces many of the connecting cables with a wireless connection for tasks such as synchronizing. Connect to other devices to share files wirelessly. Transfer a document wirelessly from your desktop computer to your handheld for review when you are away from your desk. What types of connections can I make?

With built-in Wi-Fi wireless technology, you can make connections at the following times:

When you are in range of Wi-Fi access points for public networks, such as wireless cafs and city networks. You can use the networks to browse the Internet or to send and receive email. Some public networks require a subscription fee. Check with the public network provider for details.

When you are in range of WI-Fi access points for private networks in a corporation or home. If these networks are secure, you must have the necessary keys to access the network. Once you are on the network, you can browse the Internet, send and receive email, or even access network devices such as your computer.

When you in range of other Wi-Fi devices, such as printers or projectors. Create a device-to-

device network between your handheld and the other device. Also, check the user guide for the other Wi-Fi device to enable device-to-device networking. LifeDriveDevice 291 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections Wi-Fi signal strength indicator You can easily check Wi-Fi status and signal strength any time by viewing the Wi-Fi icon on the status bar. You can tap the Wi-Fi icon and open the Preferences screen to also view status, signal strength, and other Wi-Fi information. Status Wi-Fi off

...Icons Wi-Fi on Connected to a network Signal strength:

Full strength decreasing to minimum signal Wi-Fi on Connected to a network No signal Wi-Fi on Not connected to a network LifeDriveDevice 292 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections

Before You Begin Contact the network administrator to get the name of the network, also known as an SSID, and the security information, such as WEP or WPA-PSK keys. Key Term Encryption key A series of letters and numbers that enables data to be encrypted and then decrypted so it can be safely shared within a network. Your handheld supports two encryption systems: WEP and WPA-PSK. Setting up a Wi-Fi network connection 0O 1 2 3 Tap Wi-Fi controls on the status bar. Select On from the Wi-Fi pick list and then select Wi-Fi Prefs. Select the Network pick list, and then do one of the following:

If the network is listed and does not require an encryption key, select the network. Wait for the connection to finish, and then select Done. You are now connected and this procedure is done.

If the network is not listed or if the network requires an encryption key, select Edit Networks and go to step 4. Continued LifeDriveDevice 293 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections 4 5 Add or edit a network:

If the network appears on the list, select the network and then select Edit to add encryption key information.

If the network does not appear on the list, select Add. The network may be hidden for security purposes. Add the network name or SSID if it does not appear. An SSID is required for hidden networks. Continued LifeDriveDevice 294 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections 6 Select a security option:

If your network does not require any encryption settings, select None and go to step 9.

If your network requires WEP encryption, select WEP and go to step 7.

If your network requires WPA-PSK encryption, select WPA-PSK and go to step 8. Continued LifeDriveDevice 295 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections 7 If you selected WEP in step 6:

a. Tap the WEP Key box. b. Enter the WEP encryption information. c. Select OK. d. Go to step 9. Continued LifeDriveDevice 296 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections 8 If you selected WPA-PSK in step 6:

a. Check the WPA-PSK box. b. Tap the Key box. c. Assign a passphrase. d. Select OK. Continued LifeDriveDevice 297 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections 9

[ & ] OPTIONAL Manually set your IP or DNS addresses:

a. Tap Details. b. Select Access Point (infrastructure) from the Connect to pick list. c. Select Advanced. d. Select Manual from the IP Address or DNS Server pick list. e. Enter the IP address or DNS server information. f. If you want to use a preamble, check the Use short preamble box. g. Select OK. 10 Select OK and then select Done. Done You can now connect to the network any time you are within range of the access point. LifeDriveDevice 298 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections Accessing email and the web with Wi-Fi After you set up a connection with a Wi-Fi network, you can send and receive email or browse the web wirelessly using this connection. NOTE Wi-Fi functionality must be turned on before you can use it to make wireless connections. You must also set up an email account on your device before you can send or receive email messages. 0 1 2 3 Open the email application or the web browser. Tap Wi-Fi controls on the status bar. Select On from the Wi-Fi pick list, and then select Wi-Fi Prefs. Continued LifeDriveDevice 299 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections Tip When you enter a URL in the web browser or select Get and Send in the VersaMail application, a connection is automatically initiated with the last used service. 4 Connect to the Wi-Fi network:

a. Select a Network from the Network pick list. b. Wait for the connection to finish, and then select Done. Done You are now ready to send and receive email messages or to browse the web. LifeDriveDevice 300 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections Setting up a Wi-Fi device-to-device network 0O 1 2 3 Tap the Wi-Fi controls on the status bar. Select On from the Wi-Fi pick list, and then select Wi-Fi Prefs. Select Edit Networks. Continued

Before You Begin You need to know the following information:

Name of the network, also known as an SSID

Security information, such as WEP or WPA-PSK keys

Channel number You may also need to know the IP address and DNS server information. Key Term Encryption key A series of letters and numbers that enables data to be encrypted and then decrypted so it can be safely shared within a network. Your handheld supports two encryption systems: WEP and WPA-PSK. LifeDriveDevice 301 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections 4 5 Select Add. Add the network name or SSID. Continued LifeDriveDevice 302 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections 6 Select a security option:

If your network does not require any encryption settings, select None and go to step 9.

If your network requires WEP encryption, select WEP and go to step 7.

If your network requires WPA-PSK encryption, select WPA-PSK and go to step 8. Continued LifeDriveDevice 303 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections 7 If you selected WEP in step 6:

a. Tap the WEP Key box. b. Enter the WEP encryption information. c. Select OK. d. Go to step 9. Continued LifeDriveDevice 304 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections 8 9 If you selected WPA-PSK in step 6:

a. Check the WPA-PSK box. b. Tap the Key box. c. Assign a passphrase. d. Select OK. Set the connection:

a. Tap Details. b. Select Peer-to-Peer (ad hoc) from the Connect to pick list. c. Select the channel number from the Channel pick list. Continued LifeDriveDevice 305 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections 10

[ & ] OPTIONAL Manually set your IP or DNS address:

a. Select Manual from the IP Address or DNS Server pick list. b. Enter the IP address or DNS server information. c. If you want to use a preamble, check the Use short preamble box. d. Select OK. 11 Select OK three times and then select Done. Done You can now connect to the device any time you are within range. LifeDriveDevice 306 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi Wireless Connections Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with your devices wireless capabilities or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around

Opening applications

Using menus Synchronizing Synchronizing your device with your desktop PC Contacts VersaMail Connecting to telephone numbers in your list of contacts Sending and receiving email messages wirelessly using your devices Wi-Fi technology Bluetooth Using your devices Bluetooth wireless technology Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Wi-Fi wireless technology LifeDriveDevice 307 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections In this chapter What can I do with the built-

in Bluetooth wireless technology?

Entering basic Bluetooth settings Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth Setting up a connection for Bluetooth synchronization Setting up a connection to a network Creating trusted devices Setting advanced Bluetooth features Related topics During the day, you need Wi-Fi to access your corporate network. During the evening when you are with your friends, you need Bluetooth wireless technology to share your contacts or your favorite photos. Staying connected in the world means you have the latest wireless technology at your fingertips at all times. Now your device can actually connect you to the wireless world using either Wi-Fi or Bluetooth wireless technology. Your devices built-in Bluetooth functionality helps you easily set up wireless connections to a number of devices so you can enjoy the convenience of cable-free connectivity. Benefits of your devices Bluetooth technology

Connect to your Bluetooth phone to send text or email messages or to access the web

Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly

Connect to other devices, such as cameras, to share files wirelessly LifeDrive from palmOne 308 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Key Term Bluetooth Technology that enables devices such as handhelds, mobile phones, and computers to connect wirelessly to each other.

Before You Begin Any device you connect to must also be a Bluetooth device with Bluetooth features enabled. Check the user guide that came with the device for information on how to enable the Bluetooth features. What can I do with the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology?

Connect to your Bluetooth phone to send text or email messages or to access the web. Whether you access the Internet or send text or email messages once a week or constantly throughout the day, wireless connectivity means that you can go online anytime by connecting by means of your mobile phone or your laptop connected to the Internet. Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly. cable clutter. Bluetooth wireless technology on your device replaces many of the connecting cables with a wireless connection for tasks such as synchronizing. Imagine your desk and workstation without Connect to other devices to share files wirelessly. Wouldnt it be great if you could send files such as photos wirelessly or print wirelessly on a Bluetooth printer? Use the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology to set up connections to devices within approximately 30 feet of your device. What types of connections can I make?

With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can make connections using the following types of devices:

To browse the Internet or access your email account, link through your desktop computers network connection or establish a connection to a Bluetooth LAN Access Point.

To access the Internet or an email account, connect to your mobile phone. To use a mobile phone, you must dial your ISP or sign up for an account with a high-speed wireless carrier.

To send and receive text messages, connect to your mobile phone.

To synchronize your device with your computer wirelessly, connect to your computer.

To share files with another Bluetooth device such as a handheld or printer, form a trusted pair with that device. LifeDrive from palmOne 309 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections What is device discovery?

Discovery is the process in which your device searches for other Bluetooth devices within its range

(approximately thirty feet). As each device is discovered, it shows up in your Discovery Results. After you find the devices you are looking for, you can select the devices with which you want to connect. The Bluetooth application on your device can be turned on and off, and the application has a Discoverable setting that can also be turned on and off. The following is a description of setting combinations and the resulting discovery states:

Bluetooth Off When the Bluetooth setting is off, other users cannot discover your device. This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and a security chain, and disabling the doorbell. When Bluetooth is off, you cannot access the Discoverable setting. Bluetooth On and Discoverable No When your device and Bluetooth are on and the Discoverable setting is set to No, you can receive connections only from devices with which you have previously formed a trusted pair. This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and disabling the doorbell, but any friends who already have the key can enter. By default, the Discoverable setting is enabled when Bluetooth is on. Bluetooth On and Discoverable Yes When your device is on, Bluetooth is on, and the Discoverable setting is set to Yes, you can receive connections from any Bluetooth device. You are automatically connected with devices with which you have previously communicated, but you can refuse invitations to connect with unrecognized devices. This is similar to locking your front door with a dead bolt and enabling the doorbell. Friends who already have the key can enter freely, and if someone without a key rings the bell to request a connection, you can choose to open the door or ignore the request. LifeDrive from palmOne 310 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Key Term Discoverable Setting that allows other devices to find and connect with your device using Bluetooth wireless technology. If your device is not discoverable, other devices cannot find it to make a connection. Your device must be on in order to be discoverable. Did You Know?

When your Bluetooth icon on the status bar is dimmed, Bluetooth is off and your device is not discoverable. Entering basic Bluetooth settings 0 1 2 Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar. Enter the basic Bluetooth settings:

a. Select On. b. Tap the Device Name field and enter a name for your device. This is the name that other Bluetooth devices see when they connect to your device. By default it is the username you use during synchronization, but you can change it. c. Select the Discoverable pick list and select Yes or No. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 311 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections

Before You Begin If you have an IR phone, you must download the Phone Link application from the web. Go to http://

www.palmOne.com/us/

support/downloads/

phonelink.html to download the software. Key Term Trusted pair Two devicesfor example, your device and your mobile phonethat can connect to each other because each device can find the same passkey on the other device. Once you form a trusted pair with a device, you do not need to enter a passkey to connect with that device again. Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection IMPORTANT

enabled with data services. To set up a phone connection, you must have a GSM or GPRS mobile phone You can form a trusted pair between your device and your mobile phone. Once you have set up the trusted pair connection, you automatically connect to your phone when you want a Bluetooth connection. 0O 1 2 Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar. Open the Phone Setup dialog box. a. Select Setup Devices. b. Select Phone Setup. c. Select Phone Connection. d. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 312 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Tip If you receive a message that your phone is not ready to accept a connection, check to make sure that your phone is prepared to make a Bluetooth connection. See the instructions included with your phone. 3 Select the phone you want to connect to:

a. Select the Manufacturer and Model pick lists, select the correct entries for your phone, and then select Next. If the phone does not appear on the list, check for phone compatibility at http://www.palmOne.com/us/support/downloads/phonelink.html. b. The Connection Setup screen displays all Bluetooth phones within range. If your phone is not listed in the discovery results, check whether your phone is Bluetooth discoverable. Select Find More to search again. c. Select the phone you want, select OK, and then select Next again. NOTE Not all features are available if your specific phone model is not in the pick list. Select phone Select if your phone does not appear Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 313 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Key Term Passkey Like a password, the passkey is a security measure. Connections can happen only between your device and a device that has the same passkey. For example, to connect to your mobile phone, you need to enter the same passkey on your device and on your phone. 4 Enter a passkey:

a. Enter a passkey number. This can be any number you choose; it does not, for example, have to be a password you use to access a network or an email account. IMPORTANT

You must enter the same passkey on your device and your mobile phone in order to connect to your phone. b. Select OK. 5 Select Done to finish phone connection setup. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 314 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections 6 7 Determine if you want to be set up with a network:

a. Select Yes to begin network setup. Go to step 7. b. Select No if you want to use your phone connection only to dial phone numbers from your device or to send text messages. You have finished setup. Begin network setup:

a. If you select Yes, go to step 8. b. If you select No, go to step 9. c. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 315 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Key Term GPRS Acronym for General Packet Radio Service, a method of sending information wirelessly at high speeds. Select Yes in step 6 only if you have a GPRS account for your mobile phone. Tip Contact your ISP (for example, AOL or Earthlink) if you are not sure about one or more of the items to enter in step 8. 8 9 If you selected Yes in step 7:

a. Select the pick lists and select the correct information for your cellular carrier. b. Select Next, and then select Done. If you selected No in step 7:

a. Select Next. b. Enter the phone number you use to dial in to your ISP and the username for your dial-up account. c. Select the Password box, enter your account password, and select OK. This is the password you use to access your dial-up account. d. Select Next, and then select Done. Done You now have set up your phone connection to browse the web and send and receive email messages. LifeDrive from palmOne 316 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Tip You can select Bluetooth controls on the status bar to quickly check Bluetooth status and make a connection from any application on your device. Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth After you set up a connection with a mobile phone, you can send and receive email or browse the web wirelessly using this connection. NOTE Bluetooth functionality must be turned on if you want to use wireless features. You must also set up an email account on your device before you can send or receive email messages. 0 1 2 Open the email application or the web browser. Verify Bluetooth status:

a. Tap the Bluetooth controls on the status bar. b. Make sure On is selected. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 317 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Key Term Service Way of connecting to a mobile phone to send information wirelessly, for example, through a high-speed (GPRS) carrier or a dial-up account with an Internet service provider (ISP). Tip When you enter a URL in the web browser or select Get and Send in the VersaMail personal email application, a connection is automatically initiated with the last used service. 3 Connect to your phone:

a. Select Prefs from the Bluetooth status screen. b. On the Bluetooth preferences screen, select the Network Service pick list and select the service that you want to use to connect to the Internet. If you set up a phone connection, the name of the service you configured is listed. c. Select Connect. Done You are now ready to send and receive email messages or to browse the web. LifeDrive from palmOne 318 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Tip After the first time you set up a connection and wirelessly synchronize your device with a computer, you can synchronize with that computer at any time by choosing its device name from the Service pick list and tapping Connect. Setting up a connection for Bluetooth synchronization WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 Tap the Bluetooth controls on the status bar. Open the PC Setup dialog box:

a. Select Prefs. b. Select Setup Devices. c. Select PC Setup. d. Select Bluetooth HotSync. e. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 319 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Tip To open HotSync Manager on your computer in the onscreen instructions (see step 4 in this procedure), click the HotSync Manager icon on the taskbar in the lower-

right corner of your computer screen. Tip Remember that Bluetooth devices generally must be within 30 feet of each other to communicate. 3 4 Select a computer and select OK. The Discovery icon appears to indicate that the discovery process is active. If your computer did not show up on the discovery results, select Find More to search again. Set up a connection for wireless synchronization:

a. Follow the instructions for steps 1 through 3 that appear onscreen, selecting Next after each screen. b. Select Launch HotSync in step 4. Done Now you can easily synchronize your device with your computer wirelessly. LifeDrive from palmOne 320 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections MAC ONLY 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select Prefs

. Open the Edit Connection screen:

a. From the Communications Preferences list, select Connection. b. Tap New. Set up the connection to your computer:

a. Enter a name for the connection, such as BT to Mac. b. Select the Connect to pick list and select PC. c. Select the Via pick list and select Bluetooth. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 321 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Tip Just as it is safer to use different personal identification numbers

(PINs) for different bank accounts, your passkeys are more secure if you use a different passkey for each device with which you want to connectone passkey for a connection to a phone, a different one for a connection to a computer, and so on. Just remember that you must enter the same passkey on your device and on the device with which you want to connect. Contd. d. Make sure the computer is ready to accept a Bluetooth connection. NOTE See the documentation included with the computer for information on how to prepare it to accept a Bluetooth connection. The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pairing or a Bluetooth link. 4 5 e. Check the Device box. Select the computer:

a. When the Discovery Results screen appears, select your computer. If your computer does not appear on the list, select Find More. b. Select OK.

[ & ] OPTIONAL If prompted, enter a passkey:

a. Enter a passkey number. This can be any number you choose; it does not have to be, for example, a password you use to access a network or an email account. IMPORTANT

You must enter the same passkey on your device and your computer in order to wirelessly synchronize your device with your computer. b. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 322 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections 6 Synchronize your device with your computer:

a. Go to Applications and select HotSync

. b. Make sure that Local is selected, and select the connection you created in step 3 from the pick list. c. Tap the HotSync icon. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 323 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections

Before You Begin You must get the passkey, username, and password for the LAN from the system administrator. Key Term LAN Acronym for local area network. LAN refers to a local network that connects computers located in your home or business. Setting up a connection to a network 0 1 2 3 Tap the Bluetooth controls on the status bar. Open the PC Setup dialog box:

a. Select Setup Devices. b. Select LAN Setup. c. Select Next. Select a LAN and select OK. The Discovery icon appears to indicate that the discovery process is active. If the LAN did not show up on the discovery results, select Find More to search again. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 324 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections 4 5 6 Create a trusted connection. a. Select Yes to add the LAN as a trusted device. b. Select Next. c. Enter the passkey number for the LAN and select OK. Enter the username and password for the LAN and select Next. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 325 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Did You Know?

When your device and Bluetooth are on and the Discoverable setting is set to No, you can receive connections only from devices with which you have previously communicated. Creating trusted devices After you have set up your phone and computer as trusted devices, you may want to set up other trusted devices, such as a friends device. When your device recognizes a trusted device, your device automatically accepts communication, bypassing the discovery and authentication process. 0 1 2 3 Tap the Bluetooth controls on the status bar. Begin the discovery process:

a. Select Setup Devices. b. Select Trusted Devices. c. Select Add Device. d. Select Trusted Devices to begin the discovery process. The Discovery icon appears to indicate that the discovery process is active. Select the device you want to add as a trusted device. If the device you want to add does not appear on the discovery results list, select Find More to search again. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 326 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Tip You can delete a trusted device or view the details about a trusted device, such as the device address and your most recent connection. In Bluetooth Manager, select Setup Devices, and then select Trusted Devices. Select the appropriate device and select Details. 4 5 Enter the same passkey on your device and the other device and select OK. IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices have a built-in passkey; others

enable you to choose the passkey; see the documentation included with your Bluetooth device for information. In either case you must use the same passkey on both the device and your device. Many phones also require you to put the phone into a mode where it can accept a key exchange for bonding in a trusted pair. See the documentation included with your phone for information. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 327 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Tip If the remote device name has changed, disabling and then enabling the device name cache forces your device to retrieve the new device name. Setting advanced Bluetooth features These advanced settings are used in special circumstances. Storing recently found device names When you enable or disable the device name cache you control whether or not your device retrieves the names of remote devices each time the discovery process takes place. By default, the device name cache is enabled, which means the names of devices that are found are stored in cache. The next time the device is discovered, the name appears very quickly. 0 1 2 3 Tap the Bluetooth controls on the status bar. Open the menus. Select Options, and then select Disable device name cache. The selection on the Option menu toggles to Enable device name cache. This indicates that the cache is disabled. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 328 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Allowing your device to wake up when it is turned off You can set your device to receive information through Bluetooth connections when your device is turned off. The radio remains on, but your device is not discoverable. For another Bluetooth device or application to wake up your device, it must know your device name. This limits the connections to devices that are trusted or that have connected with you before. 0 1 2 3 Tap the Bluetooth controls on the status bar. Open the menus. Select Options, and then select Allow wakeup. The selection on the Option menu toggles to Do not allow wakeup indicating that Allow Wakeup is enabled. IMPORTANT

when your device is turned off. Be sure to monitor your battery level. Enabling the Allow Wakeup setting uses battery power even Done LifeDrive from palmOne 329 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with your devices wireless capabilities or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around

Opening applications

Using menus Synchronizing Synchronizing your device with your desktop PC Contacts VersaMail SMS Wi-Fi Connecting to telephone numbers in your list of contacts Sending and receiving email messages wirelessly using your devices Bluetooth technology Sending and receiving text messages wirelessly using your devices Bluetooth technology Using your devices Wi-Fi wireless technology Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Bluetooth wireless technology LifeDrive from palmOne 330 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages You already know how efficient email is for staying in touch with personal and business contacts. Now the VersaMail application brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and colleagues anywhere you can make an Internet connection. You can email photos to your friends and family. Or use Documents on your device to create Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your colleagues. You can also receive any of these file types as attachments to view and edit at your convenience. In this chapter Upgrading an existing email account About email accounts Creating an account Getting and reading messages Sending an email message Working with email folders Working with email messages Working with attachments Advanced VersaMail application features Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Benefits

Access email on the go

Send and receive photos, sound files, Word and Excel files, and more

Save messages from your computer to view at a convenient time 331 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Upgrading an existing email account If you already use the VersaMail application on a different device and want to keep your username, you can upgrade your existing email account for use on your new device. 0 1 2 3 Synchronize your new device with your computer. When prompted, select the username associated with your old device;

this contains your existing account information. On your device, go to Favorites and select VersaMail

. Select Yes to accept the upgrade. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 332 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

You can create up to eight email accounts. Did You Know?

The VersaMail application provides strong 128-bit AES encryption for your password. Tip Go to your email providers website or contact their customer support to obtain the setup information you need. About email accounts The VersaMail application is software that lets you use your device to access email from an account with an email provider (either an Internet service provider, or ISP, such as Earthlink or Yahoo!, or a wireless carrier) or from your corporate email account. For each email account you want to access, you must set up an account in VersaMail. For example, if you have an Earthlink account and a corporate account, set up one account for each in VersaMail. After you set up an account, you can send and receive email directly to and from your device wirelessly. Or you can download new messages from your computer to your deviceand upload messages from your device to be sent from your computers email programwhen you synchronize. IMPORTANT

VersaMail works with these accounts to transfer messages to and from your device. The application is not an email service provider. You must have an account with an email provider or a corporate account. Using an email provider If you are setting up a new email account and have a well-known email provider (ISP or wireless carrier) such as Earthlink or Yahoo!, many of the settings you need during account setup are automatically filled in. For other ISPs, you need the following information:

Your email address and password

The protocol used for incoming mail, such as Post Office Protocol (POP) or Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) NOTE Some free web-based email providers such as Hotmail do not support either the POP or the IMAP protocol. You cannot use VersaMail to download messages to your device from an account with one of these providers.

The name of the incoming mail server LifeDrive from palmOne 333 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Key Term Firewall A system set up to protect against unauthorized access into a private network. Did You Know?

With a corporate email account, you may be able to access Microsoft Exchange, IBM Lotus Domino, or Sun iPlanet mail servers, among others.

The name of the outgoing mail (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, or SMTP) server

Your accounts security feature (if it has one), such as Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), Authenticated Post Office Protocol (APOP), or Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (ESMTP) Using a corporate email account If you want to access email on your device using your corporate email account, you create this account in exactly the same way that you would with any other account, with one exception: For a corporate email account, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN). If your company has a Wi-Fi wireless technology network or a Bluetooth wireless technology access point located behind the corporate firewall, you may not need to set up a VPN to access your corporate email account. See the next section for details. To set up a corporate email account, you need certain information. Check with your companys server administrator to obtain the following:

Username and password This might be your Windows username and password, your Lotus Notes ID username and password, or something else. Protocol Most corporate mail servers use the IMAP protocol for retrieving mail. In rare cases, your company server may use the POP protocol. NOTE Some corporate mail servers do not use either protocol. In this case, you cannot send and receive email wirelessly using VersaMail. You can, however, synchronize email on your device with email in Outlook or Lotus Notes on your computer (Windows only). Incoming and outgoing mail server settings Check with your companys server administrator to obtain these settings. NOTE If your corporate mail system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to set up an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your device. For more information, see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. LifeDrive from palmOne 334 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages VPNs If you want to access email on your device using your corporate email account, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your device. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate mail server through the companys firewall (security layer). Without a VPN, you cannot pass through the firewall to gain access to the mail server. You need to set up a VPN to access corporate email in either of the following situations:

Your companys wireless local area network (LAN) is located outside the firewall.

Your companys wireless LAN is located inside the firewall, but you are trying to access the network from outside the firewall (for example, from a public location or at home). Check with your companys server administrator to see if a VPN is required for you to access the corporate network. Your device software installation CD contains a link to purchase and download VPN software for the device. Once you purchase and download the software, you set up a VPN connection in Preferences on your device. If you are using a VPN connection, make sure the connection is on in VersaMail. In the message list, open the Options menu, and then select Turn VPN On. NOTE The Auto Sync feature in VersaMail may not work with a VPN connection. Also, you cannot use scheduled sending retry of email with accounts that use a VPN connection. LifeDrive from palmOne 335 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Connecting to a VPN After you set up a VPN, you need to connect to it in order to retrieve email messages from your corporate mail server. You may need to connect to the VPN each time you open VersaMail to retrieve messages from the server. 0 1 2 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail

. Connect to your VPN:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Connect VPN. c. Enter the username and password you use to log in to the VPN. d. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 336 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Creating an account Before you can use the VersaMail application with a given email account, you need to set up the account in VersaMail. If you have multiple email accounts, you must set up a VersaMail account for each one. You have three setup options:

On a Windows computer, if the email account is already set up on your computerfor example, if you use Outlook Express on your computer to access your Earthlink accountyou can transfer the account settings to your device in just a few steps.

On a Windows computer, if this is a new account, you can quickly set up the account on your computer and synchronize the information to your device. The steps for setting up an account on your computer depend on whether you are using a common email provider such as Earthlink or Yahoo! or whether you are using a less common provider.

For either a new or an existing account, you can set up the account directly on your device. If you are setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for setup instructions. You can open VersaMail account setup in one of two ways:

During software CD installation, select the option to set up your email software on the final installation screen.

From the Start menu, select Programs, navigate to the palmOne program group, and then select VersaMail Setup. IMPORTANT If you plan to synchronize your new device using an existing username from

another device, you must do so before you enter your email account information in VersaMail. If you enter the email account information first and then synchronize your device with your computer using an existing username, the email account information you entered is overwritten. LifeDrive from palmOne 337 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

Your username and email address are already entered on the Account Settings screen based on the account settings that VersaMail finds on your computer. Transferring settings from an existing account WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 3 4 5 Open VersaMail account setup. Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next. Select the option to synchronize with an email account detected on your PC, and then select the account from the list. Click Next. Enter the basic account information:

a. In the Name this account field, enter a descriptive name or use the one shown. b. In the Enter your Password field, enter your email account password. c. Click Next. Click Next on the mail servers screen. This information is already filled in based on the account whose settings you are transferring to your device. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 338 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 6 7 8

[ & ] OPTIONAL Set up other accounts:

a. Select the option to set up another account, and then click Next. b. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account you want to set up. When you have set up the last account, go to the next step. Finish setting up accounts:

a. Select the option to synchronize information for this account, and then click Next. b. Click Finish. Do a full sync to transfer all account information to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 339 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting up an account on your computer: Common providers WINDOWS ONLY The settings for many common providers are already included in VersaMail. If you have an account with one of these providers, you just need to enter your username and password during account setup. 0 0 1 2 3 Open VersaMail account setup. Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next. Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list, and then select your mail service from the list. Click Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 340 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

Your incoming and outgoing server settings and whether the account needs ESMTP authentication are already entered based on the account type you select. 4 5 6 7 Enter the basic account information:

a. Enter a descriptive name for the account or use the one shown. b. Enter your account username and password. Your email address is entered automatically based on the username you enter. Click Next on the mail servers screen. This information is already filled in based on the mail service you selected.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Do one of the following:

To enter advanced settings for this account, click Advanced Settings.

To test the account settings you have entered, click Test My Settings. Click OK after settings have been tested. Click Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 341 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 8 9

[ & ] OPTIONAL Set up other accounts:

a. Select the option to set up another account, and then click Next. b. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account you want to set up. When you have set up the last account, go to step 9. Finish setting up accounts:

a. Select the option to synchronize information for this account, and then click Next. b. Click Finish. 10 Do a full sync to transfer all account information to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 342 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Key Term Protocol Settings your email provider uses to receive email messages. Most providers use the Post Office Protocol

(POP); a few use the Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP). Setting up an account on your computer: Other providers WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 3 4 Open VersaMail account setup. Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next. Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list, and then select Other. Click Next. Select the protocol for this account. Check with your system administrator if you do not know which protocol is used. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 343 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

Your incoming mail server is also called your POP or IMAP server; your outgoing mail server is also called your SMTP server. 5 6 7 8 Enter the basic account information:

a. Enter a descriptive name for the account. b. Enter your account username and password. c. Enter your email address for this account. d. Click Next. Enter the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers for this account, whether the account requires Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (ESMTP), and, if so, the username and password required for ESMTP. Check with your email service provider for this information.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Do one of the following:

To enter advanced settings for this account, click Advanced Settings.

To test the account settings you have entered, click Test My Settings. Click OK after settings have been tested. Click Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 344 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 9 10 11

[ & ] OPTIONAL Set up other accounts:

a. Select the option to set up another account, and then click Next. b. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account you want to set up. When you have set up the last account, go to step 10. Finish setting up accounts:

a. Select the option to synchronize information for this account, and then click Next. b. Click Finish. Do a full sync to transfer all account information to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 345 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

The Desktop Connection field displays the mail client you use to download messages to your computerfor example, Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes based on the settings VersaMail detects. If no client is detected, VersaMail displays Direct POP or Direct IMAP connection to server, depending on your account protocol. Entering advanced account settings on your computer When you set up an account, VersaMail automatically enters advanced settings such as incoming and outgoing server names, any authentication required, maximum message size, and so on. You can check the advanced settings either to verify that VersaMail entered the information you want or to change a default entryfor example, to change the maximum message size. 0 1 2 During account setup on your computer, click Advanced Settings on the Account Information screen. Click the General tab and verify or edit any of the following settings:

(Lotus Synchronize Local Notes Notes accounts only) Check the box to synchronize email on your device with email in the local copy of Notes on your computer. You are prompted to enter your Lotus Notes ID and password. Click Browse if you need to locate your Notes ID. Enable HotSync synchronization By default, this box is checked, meaning you can both send and receive email wirelessly and transfer messages to your device from your computer when you synchronize. If you uncheck the box, you can send and receive email wirelessly only. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 346 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server. If you have a POP email account, VersaMail downloads all messages from the server regardless of whether you have read them (for example, on your desktop or on the web). Did You Know?

The actual message size you can download may be smaller than 5000KB, because some message space is necessary for transferring the message over the Internet. Contd Unread Messages Only For IMAP accounts only, select whether to download all messages to your device, or unread messages only. By default, the box is unchecked, meaning that all messages are downloaded. For POP accounts, this box does not appear on the screen. Download Attachments Select whether to download attachments when you retrieve new messages. By default, the box is checked; if you uncheck it, only the body text of any message containing an attachment is downloaded to your device. Mail from the last X Days Set how many days worth of email should be downloaded. Max Message Size (KB) Enter the maximum message size that can be downloaded to your devicefrom 1 to 5000KB. The smaller the maximum size, the faster the download, but you must use the More button to download any messages over that size. On the other hand, choosing a larger size means that more messages can be completely downloaded automatically, but downloading takes longer. Format of Incoming Messages Select HTML or Plain Text. If you select HTML, any email messages sent as HTML are displayed on your device with basic HTML formatting intact. If you select plain text, all messages are received as plain text only, regardless of the format in which they were sent. The default is HTML. Synchronize Outbox Folder Check the box to synchronize messages in your devices Outbox with messages on your computer during the next synchronization. If the box is unchecked, your Outbox is not included when you synchronize, so messages in your devices Outbox are not sent. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 347 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Check with your email provider or your system administrator for any incoming or outgoing mail settings you do not know. Also check to see if your account uses SSL, APOP, or ESMTP; or whether you need to change the default port number. Contd 3 Synchronize Inbox Folder Check the box to synchronize messages in your devices Inbox with messages on your computer during the next synchronization. The box is checked by default; if unchecked, your Inbox is not included when you synchronize, so new messages in your computers Inbox are not downloaded to your device. Click the Incoming Mail tab and verify or edit any of the following settings:

Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on email messages. User Name Enter the username you use to access email for this account. Password Enter your email account password. E-mail Enter the email address for this account. Incoming Server Enter the address of your incoming mail server. Mail Server Protocol Select the protocol for this account. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 348 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Do not check the Secure connection box if VersaMail displays Direct POP or Direct IMAP connection to server in the Desktop Connection field. If you check the box, you cannot receive incoming messages correctly. To use SSL with your account, set up the account on your device and check the Use Secure Connection box on the appropriate screen. Contd Port Number By default, the port number setting is 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers. You may need to change the port number if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection (see the next item). Secure connection To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection, check the box. The port number for incoming mail then changes to 995. APOP (POP accounts only) To encrypt your username and password when they travel over the network, check this box. Some services work properly only if APOP is used, while others do not work properly if APOP is used. 4 Click the Outgoing Mail tab and verify or edit any of the following settings:

Outgoing Server Enter the address of your outgoing mail server. Port Number The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. Secure connection To send outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection, check the box. This server requires a secure connection (SSL). Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 349 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

If you synchronize a folder, any changes you make to a folder on your devicefor example, moving or deleting messagesare automatically updated on the mail server, and vice versa. Contd Authentication Check the box if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires ESMTP authentication. If you select this option, username and password fields appear. These fields are already filled in based on the account information you entered. In most cases, the information displayed is correct; however, occasionally your authentication username and/or password is different from your account username or password. 5 6

(IMAP accounts only) Click the Folders tab and verify or edit any of the following settings:

Sent Folder Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on the server. Trash Folder Stores deleted email in the folder you specify on the server. Server Folder Synchronization To synchronize messages on your device with messages on a server folder, click in the Synchronize column to the right of the folder name to select Yes. When you have finished entering or verifying advanced settings, click OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 350 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Key Term Protocol Settings your email provider uses to receive email messages. Most providers use the Post Office Protocol

(POP); a few use the Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP). Tip If your email provider appears on the Mail Service pick list, you dont need to select a protocol. The correct protocol is automatically displayed. Setting up an account on your device If you have already set up an account on your computer, you dont need to set up the account on your device. Just do a full sync to transfer the account settings to your device. If you are setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your device to synchronize email and Calendar information on your device with the info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for setup instructions. 0 0 1 2 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail

. Open the Account Setup screen:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select Account Setup. c. Select New. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 351 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

Your incoming mail server is also called your POP or IMAP server; your outgoing mail server is also called your SMTP server. 3 4 Enter the basic account information:

a. In the Account Name field, enter a descriptive name. b. Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select your email provider. Select Other if your provider is not listed. c. If you chose Other, select the Protocol pick list, and then select POP or IMAP. d. Select Next. Enter the account username and password:

a. Enter the username you use to access your email. b. Select the Password box, enter your email account password, and then select OK. c. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 352 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 5 6 If you chose a common email provider in step 3b, this screen is already filled in. If not, enter the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers:

a. Enter your email address. b. Enter the names of your mail servers. c. Select Next. Do one of the following:

Finish setup Select Done to finish setup and go to the Inbox of the account you set up, where you can begin getting and sending email. Set additional mail options Select Advanced to set advanced mail options. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 353 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Check with your email provider or your system administrator for any incoming or outgoing mail settings you do not know. Also check to see if your account uses SSL, APOP, or ESMTP, or whether you need to change the default port number. Setting advanced mail options on your device 0 1 Set incoming mail server options for the account:

a. Select any of the following:

Port Number By default, the port number setting is 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers. You may need to change the port number if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection. Use Secure Connection (SSL) To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection, check the Use Secure Connection box. If you check the box, the port number for incoming mail changes to 995. Use Authentication (APOP) (POP accounts only) Encrypts your username and password when they travel over the network. Some services do not work properly without APOP, while others do not work properly if APOP is used. b. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 354 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you need to enter new authentication information, enter your username, select the Password box, enter a password, and then select OK. Check with your email service provider for authentication username and password information. 2 Set outgoing mail options:

a. Select any of the following:

Port Number The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. Use Secure Connection (SSL) Check the box to send outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection. Use authentication (ESMTP) Check the box if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires ESMTP authentication. If you select this option, username and password fields appear. These fields are already filled in based on the account information you entered. In most cases, the information displayed is correct;

however, occasionally your authentication username and/or password is different from your account username or password. b. Select Done. Done Testing your new account After you finish setting up a new email account, the Inbox of the account you just created is displayed. You can test whether the email account is set up and working properly by getting messages. LifeDrive from palmOne 355 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can also edit an account by selecting Start in the lower-left corner of your computer screen, selecting Programs, navigating to palmOne, and then selecting VersaMail Setup. Select the username associated with the account, click the Edit an existing account button, and then click Next. Edit the information on the account information screens. Editing an account As with setup, you can edit an account either on your computer or on your device. Editing an account on your computer WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 Select the account to edit:

a. Select HotSync Manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen. b. Select Custom, and then select VersaMail. c. Click Change, and then select the name of the account to edit in the pane on the left of the screen. Select one of the following:

Delete Account Click the button and click to confirm the deletion. Edit Account Click the button and edit the account settings on the following screens. Advanced Click the button and edit the advanced account settings on the following screens. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 356 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 0 Editing an account on your device 1 Select the account you want to edit:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select Account Setup. c. Select the name of the account to edit, and then select Edit. 2 The same series of screens appears for editing an account as for creating an account. Go through the screens by selecting Next, and change the entries you want to edit on the appropriate screens. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 357 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip On a Windows computer, do a full sync to free up the memory associated with an account after you delete it. Tip You can also delete an account on a Windows computer by selecting HotSync Manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, selecting Custom, selecting VersaMail, and then selecting Change. Select the account you want, and then click Delete Account. Deleting an account When you delete an account in the VersaMail application, the account is removed from your device. The account still exists on the server, however. For example, deleting your Yahoo! account from the VersaMail application deletes the account only from your device. Your email account still exists at Yahoo.com. You can delete all but one of your email accounts; you must have at least one account. 0 1 2 Select the account you want to delete:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select Account Setup. c. Select the name of the account that you want to delete, and then select Delete. Delete the account:

a. Select Yes in the Delete Account dialog box to delete the account and all associated email messages. b. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 358 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Key Term ESMTP Acronym for Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A method for authenticating outgoing email messages. Tip If you need to enter new authentication information, enter your username, select the Password box, enter a password, and then select OK. Check with your email service provider for authentication username and password information. Adding ESMTP to an account Some services require ESMTP authentication to validate your username and password on an SMTP server. If you arent sure if your ISP or web email provider supports ESMTP, check with your email provider. 0 1 2 Select the account to which you want to add ESMTP:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select Account Setup. c. Select the name of the account, and then select Edit. The same series of screens appears for editing an account as for creating an account. Go through the screens by selecting Next, and check the Authentication box on the advanced outgoing mail options screen. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 359 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip To get and view messages for a different account, open the Accounts menu and select the account you want. Select the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then select Inbox to display messages in the Inbox. Tip For IMAP accounts, you have the option of wirelessly synchronizing mail folders if the Get Mail Options dialog box is displayed. Getting and reading messages When you get messages, you can choose to see only the subjects of your email (which include message size, sender, and subject), so that you can decide if you want to download the entire message. Or you can choose to get the entire message for all of your incoming email. NOTE See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for special considerations when using a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information on your device with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003. 0 1 2 3 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail

[ & ] OPTIONAL If you are using a VPN connection, connect to your VPN. Choose whether to get message subjects only or full messages:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select the account you want. c. Select Get or Get & Send. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 360 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

If more than one scheduled Auto Sync happens at the same time

(for example, for two separate email accounts), Auto Sync performs any past-due Auto Sync first, and then performs current Auto Sync retrievals according to the order of email accounts in the Accounts menu list. 4

[ & ] OPTIONAL If you have selected Ask Every Time in VersaMail Preferences, select whether to download subjects only or entire messages. Done A list of your messages appears in the Inbox. Auto Sync with notification You can set up VersaMail to automatically download new email messages to your device with the Auto Sync feature. If Auto Sync downloads any new messages, your device lets you know with a sound or vibration. A list with the number of new messages retrieved appears on the Reminders screen. The Auto Sync feature downloads only the first 3KB of each message. You can select the More button on the message screen to download the entire message. Auto Sync recognizes any filter criteria you set up for downloading messages. Messages that dont meet these filter criteria are not downloaded during Auto Sync. You need to turn off all filters and manually retrieve these messages. NOTE See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for special considerations when using Auto Sync with a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003. Scheduling Auto Sync You can set up different schedules for each of your email accounts, but you can set up only one schedule for each account. For example, if you set up a schedule to get mail on weekdays for your Yahoo! account, you cant set up a separate schedule for weekends for that account. LifeDrive from palmOne 361 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Be sure to manually retrieve any messages using Get or Get & Send after setting up a scheduled Auto Sync. Then only new messages are retrieved during Auto Sync. Auto Sync may not work with your specific VPN connection. It also doesnt work if your security preferences include encrypting databases on the device. 0 1 2 Select Auto Sync for a given account:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Auto Sync, and then check the Sync automatically box. Set schedule options:

Interval Select the Every pick list and select the time interval, from 5 minutes to 12 hours. Note that if you set a more frequent interval, you may need to recharge your devices battery more often. Start/End Time Select the Start and End Time boxes, and then select the hour, the minute, and AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last Auto Sync to take place. Select OK. Days Select the days you want the schedule to be active. You can choose any number of days, but you can set up only one schedule for each email account. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 362 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 4 Select OK.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Select Get or Get & Send. Done Auto Sync notifications The Auto Sync feature provides two types of notifications during and after it gets messages:

Alerts You can choose to have your device alert you with a beep or other sound when a new message arrives in your account. Reminders screen If Auto Sync discovers and downloads new messages for an email account, a notification appears on the Reminders screen, telling you the account name and the number of new messages. If Auto Sync is scheduled for more than one account, a separate notification appears for each account. LifeDrive from palmOne 363 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

Any custom sound you install on your device appears on the Alert Sound pick list. Tip You can also adjust the volume of the alert sound. Setting alert options You can choose an alertsuch as a bird, a phone, or an alarmto let you know when new email arrives. 0 1 Open the Alerts screen:

a. From the Inbox or another folder, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Auto Sync, and then select Alerts. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 364 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

If you are viewing the Inbox and an Auto Sync downloads new messages, those messages do not appear on the Reminders screen, because you can already view them in the Inbox. 2 Select alert options:

a. Check the Alert me of new mail box. b. Select the Alert Sound pick list, and then select a sound. The device plays a brief demo of the sound. c. To receive alerts of successful Auto Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of failures box. Leave the box checked if you want to receive alerts for both successful and failed Auto Sync retrievals. d. Select OK. Done Viewing and using the Reminders screen The Reminders screen on your device shows info about new email messages. It also shows alerts from other applications, such as Calendar appointments. To view the Reminders screen, tap Alert on the status bar when it is blinking. You can do any of the following:

Check the box to clear a reminder from the list.

Select the reminder (either the mail icon or the text description) to go to the Inbox of that account or to read a detailed error message. LifeDrive from palmOne 365 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If the Reminders screen shows an Auto Sync error message for an account, select the message to view more detailed information about the error. You can choose to disable notifications for Auto Sync failures.

Select Done to close the Reminders screen and return to whatever you were doing on your device before the Reminders screen appeared.

Select Clear All to delete all reminders on the Reminders screen. When a notification appears on the Reminders screen, select it to go to the Inbox of that account, or open the VersaMail application and go to that account. Once you open the Inbox, any new messages are removed from the Reminders screen, even if you dont open them. Auto Sync then starts at the next scheduled interval, with the Reminders screen counter reset to 1. Auto Sync retries If the interval for a scheduled Auto Sync is set at Every 1 hour or less frequently, and an Auto Sync fails for any reason, the VersaMail application tries to retrieve email every 30 minutes until either the next scheduled Auto Sync occurs or the end time for scheduled email retrieval is reached. If the interval is set for more frequently than Every 1 hour, the VersaMail application waits until the next scheduled Auto Sync. Resource issues with Auto Sync The Auto Sync feature can cause the following resource constraints:

Decreased battery life If you set the Auto Sync interval for more often than once per hour, your devices battery charge may drain more quickly, and you may need to recharge the battery more frequently. Increased monthly charges Some wireless providers charge a fee for data transactions. If you use one of these providers, using the Auto Sync feature can substantially add to your monthly charges. This is especially true for POP accounts, because POP messages take longer to download than IMAP messages. LifeDrive from palmOne 366 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Inbox icons in the VersaMail application The icons to the left of a message in the Inbox tell you the messages status. Only the subject header information is downloaded. Part or all of the message text is downloaded. Part or all of the message text and attachment information is downloaded. Downloaded message has been marked high priority by the sender. 0 Setting preferences for getting messages 1 Open the Delivery Options preferences:

a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Delivery Options. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 367 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server. If you have a POP email account, the VersaMail application downloads all messages from the server regardless of whether you have read them (for example, on your desktop or on the web). 2 Select preferences:

Get Select whether to get message subjects only or entire messages. Ask Every Time Check to display a dialog box for choosing subjects only or entire messages each time you retrieve email. Leave unchecked to retrieve messages according to the option you select in the Get pick list. Get only Unread messages (IMAP account only) Check the box to download only unread mail to your device. If you dont select this option and you select Get & Send, all of your messages on your providers mail server are downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you have already read. NOTE For POP accounts, the Unread messages box does not appear on the Delivery Options screen. Mail from last X days Get messages sent within the number of days you specify (default is 7). Download attachments Check the box to automatically download files attached to email messages to your device. Attachments that exceed the maximum message size cannot be downloaded. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 368 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Contd Maximum message size Enter the maximum size of an incoming email message in kilobytes (KB). The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default, but you can enter any size up to 5000KB (approximately 5 megabytes, or 5MB), including attachments. The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments. Message Format Select to retrieve messages in HTML or plain text format. If you select HTML, any messages sent to you in HTML format are displayed with basic HTML formatting intact. Other messages are displayed as plain text. If you select Plain Text, all messages are displayed as plain text, regardless of the format in which they were sent. The default setting is HTML. NOTE The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only, with all HTML tags stripped, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally received as HTML. Done Did You Know?

Basic HTML includes bold, italics (small font only), colored words, bulleted and numbered lists, and so on. In an HTML message, certain types of graphics

(for example, JPEG or GIF files) may be displayed as a URL in the body of the email message. In some cases, you can select the URL to open the graphic. Tip Because downloading large messages can consume device resources, the VersaMail application displays the size of the message and asks if you want to continue downloading any message that exceeds your maximum message size, up to a total size of 5MB. LifeDrive from palmOne 369 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Reading email messages To read email, select the email message in the Inbox or the folder where the message is located. Select to read If you chose to get messages by subjects only, select the More button to view the body of the email message, plus any attachments, up to the maximum message size you select. If the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size, only a partial message is displayed. Select the More button to view the entire message. on the message screen If you chose to get entire messages, the body of the message is displayed. However, if the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size, only part of the message is displayed. Select the More button to view the entire message. Tip If you use the 5-way navigator to select and open a message, press Center after reading the message to close it and return to the folder where you started. Tip Highlight a message and press Right on the 5-way to open a menu of message commands such as Forward, Reply, and Delete. Tip Change the font size of a message you are reading by opening the Options menu and selecting Use smaller font or Use standard font. Tip Use landscape mode to see more of the message on a single screen. LifeDrive from palmOne 370 Select More to view the entire message CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can also update an existing Contacts record with a new email address, or create a second Contacts record for a name that has an existing record. The procedure is the same as for adding a new Contacts record. If you select Add to Contacts from an email message and a record already exists for the recipient name, you are prompted either to update the email address for the recipient or to create a new record for the recipient. Adding or updating a contact directly from a message You can add an email address to Contacts directly from the body of a received email message. 0 1 2 3 Open the Add Contact dialog box:

a. Open the message you want. b. On the message screen, open the menus. c. Select Options, and then select Add to Contacts.

[ & ] OPTIONAL If a display name exists for this Contacts record, the dialog box displays the name in the Last name and First name fields. If the Last name and First name fields are blank, enter the first and last name associated with the From email address. Select OK to add the email address to Contacts, and then select OK in the confirmation dialog box. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 371 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip To mark an outgoing message as high priority, on the message screen, open the Options menu and select Set Priority To High. Did You Know?

You can set up your device to automatically try resending any messages that are not sent correctly the first time. 0 Sending an email message 1 2 Open a new message:

Go to Favorites and select VersaMail

. a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, select the account you want, and then select New. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 372 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You cant see the whole list of addresses in a field if the list is longer than two lines. To see the whole list, select the word To, cc, or bcc. 3 4 5 Address and compose your message:

a. Enter the recipients email address. b. In the Subject field, enter the subject of your email. c. In the area below the Subject line, enter the text of your email.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Attach one or more files to send with your message. Select one of the following options to send your message:

Send Sends the email immediately. If the message is not sent successfully on the first attempt, it is moved to the Outbox. Outbox Stores email so you can compose email offline and then send it all during one connection with the server. To send your email, select Get & Send. Drafts Saves your message so you can work on it at another time. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 373 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Continue typing until the entry you want is automatically entered on the To line. For example, if you have a Joe Smith and a Joan Smith in Contacts (and no other names starting with J), once you type Joe, the entry Joe Smith is entered on the To line with the correct email address. Tip Tap the email header icon in the upper-right corner of the screen to display the cc: and bcc: fields. Entering an address using Smart Addressing Smart Addressing completes a recognized email address. 0 1 2 3 On the New Message screen, navigate to or tap in the To field. Start entering the persons name. Smart Addressing displays matching names and email addresses from Contacts. Email header When the name you want appears, select it to enter it on the To line. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 374 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

When you put addresses in the copies (cc:) field, they are visible to all other recipients. Addresses in the blind copies (bcc:) field are hidden from all other recipients. Tip As with Smart Addressing, when you begin to enter a name or address on the Recipient List screen, VersaMail displays any matching entries from Contacts. Select a match to automatically enter it in the Recipient List. Tip Its OK to enter commas instead of semicolons between addresses, because theyre changed to semicolons. But you cant use other punctuation or no punctuation between addresses. 0 Entering an address directly in the To field 1 2 Enter an address using one of the following methods:

On the New Message screen, select or navigate to the To field. To field Enter the address, and then select Done. For multiple addresses, enter a semicolon (;) and then a space between recipient names. Recipient List Select To and enter the name or address on the Recipient List screen, and then select Done. Use the shortcut buttons at the bottom of the screen for quick address entry. For multiple recipients, enter a semicolon (;) and then a space between recipient names. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 375 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Entering an address using Contacts You can enter a recipients address by using the Lookup screen to select the address. The names and addresses on the Lookup screen come from Contacts. 0 1 2 Open the Lookup screen:

a. On the New Message screen, select the word To. b. On the Recipient List screen, select Lookup. Enter the address:

a. On the Address Lookup screen, select the address you want, and then select Add. b. Select Lookup and repeat step a for each address you want to add. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 376 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Attaching a personal signature You can attach a personal signature, with info like your company's address and telephone number, to the bottom of all messages you send. 0 1 2 Open the VersaMail Preferences:

a. From the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Signature. Add a signature:

a. Check the Attach Signature box. b. Enter your signature information, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 377

 

 

SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

Send retry doesnt work for VPN or SSL connections, or for accounts for which your ISP requires you to log in to the mail server before sending mail. It also doesnt work if you have configured the security preferences on your device to encrypt databases on the device. Tip Select the notification to view a detailed error message. Viewing the error message deletes the notification from the Reminders screen. Send retry If a send attempt fails for any reason after you select Send (for example, your device is out of range, or the application cannot connect to the mail server), you can choose to have the application move the message to the Outbox and keep trying to send the message every 30 minutes, a maximum of three times. If you put a message in the Outbox, you must select Send to send the message on the first try. The VersaMail application attempts automatic send retry only after the first send attempt fails. Keep in mind the following regarding automatic send retry:

Automatic send retry occurs only if you select Send to send the message manually. It doesnt work if you select Get & Send. To select automatic send retry, select Yes in the dialog box notifying you that manual send has failed. If automatic send retry succeeds, the message is moved to the Sent folder. If automatic send retry fails after the third try, you must send the message manually. Send retry notifications If automatic send retry fails after the third try, a notification appears on the Reminders screen. Send retry notification features include the following:

A broken envelope icon shows that automatic send retry has failed. A separate notification appears for each email account. You can choose to disable notifications for send retry failures. The Reminders screen shows only the most recent notification for an email account, no matter how many automatic send retries have been attempted for that account. LifeDrive from palmOne 378 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you perform a soft reset or synchronize during a send retry, the retry is canceled. You must manually send any messages in the Outbox. Modifying messages in the Outbox A message in the Outbox waiting for the next automatic send retry can be edited, moved, or deleted. However, if you edit the message, you must manually send the message. If the manual send fails, you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to wait for the next automatic send retry. During automatic send retry, any message that the VersaMail application is trying to send is in a locked state. You cannot edit, move, or delete these messages. If you try to modify a message in the locked state, an error message appears. If a send retry fails after the third try, the message is stored in the Outbox in the error state. You can send the message again manually, or edit, move, or delete the message. However, if you edit the message, you must send the message manually. If the manual send fails, you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to wait for the next automatic send retry. Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications The icons to the left of a message in the Outbox show the messages status. Message is waiting either to be manually sent or to be sent during the next send retry. You can edit, move, or delete a message in this state. Send retry is currently in process; you cannot edit, move, or delete a message in this state. Third automatic send retry has failed. You must manually send a message in this state by selecting Get & Send. LifeDrive from palmOne 379 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with email folders By default, the VersaMail application displays the messages in an accounts Inbox folder. You can easily view the messages in a different folder. You can also customize the appearance of the message list in your email folders, move messages between folders, and create and edit folders. 0 Viewing another folder 1 On a folder screen, select the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen. 2 Select the folder you want to view. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 380 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

The customization options you choose apply to all email folders, not just the one you are in. Tip Select Sort on the message list to quickly sort the list by date, subject, or sender. Customizing the appearance of the message list You can change display options on the message list, as well as the size of columns in the list. NOTE Changing column size is available for one-line message view only. 0 1 2 In the Inbox or on another folder screen, select Display. Customize any of the following:

Sort by Select the Sort by pick list, and then select the column name. Default is Date. Sort order Select Descend or Ascend. Default is Descend. One- or two-line column view Select the Show pick list, and then select 1 line or 2 line view. Default is 2 line. Columns shown Check the box under the Show pick list for each column you want to show. The column options change depending on whether you choose a one-line or a two-line view. Defaults are Sender, Date, and Subject. Font Select the Font field. Select each pick list in the Select Font dialog box

(Font, Size, Style) and select the option you want. Default is Palm 9 Plain. Unread and read message color Select the Read and Unread pick lists, and then select the color you want for each type of message. Default is black. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 381 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 4 Select OK. If you selected 1 line view in step 2, change the size of columns in the message list:

a. Tap on the column divider. b. Drag the column divider to change the width of the column. Done Column divider LifeDrive from palmOne 382 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can use the 5-way to move a single message. Select the message you want to move, press Right to open the Message menu, and then select Move To. Then select the folder you want from the folders list. Tip You can also open the menus, select Message, and then select Move To. Moving messages between folders You can move one or more email messages between folders. 0 1 In the Inbox or on another folder screen, select the folder pick list in the upper-right corner and select the folder containing the message(s) you want to move. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 383 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip To select a group of adjacent messages, drag the stylus to the left of the message icons. 2 3 4 Move a single message:

a. Tap the envelope icon to the left of the message you want to move, and then select Move To from the list. b. From the folders list, select the destination folder you want. Move multiple messages:

a. Tap to the left of the icon for each message you want to move. A checkmark appears next to each selected message. b. Tap a message icon next to a selected message, and then select Move To from the list. c. From the folders list, select the destination folder you want. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 384 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Creating and editing mail folders The VersaMail application has certain preset folders, such as Inbox, Outbox, Sent, Drafts, and Trash. You can create new folders so that you can store email messages by subject, person, or project. 0 1 2 3 In the Inbox or on another folder screen, select the folder pick list in the upper-

right corner, and then select Edit Folders. Do one of the following:

Create a new folder Select New, and then enter the new folder name. Rename a folder Select the folder name from the list on the screen, select Rename, and then enter the new folder name. Delete a folder Select the folder name from the list on the screen, and then select Delete. NOTE For IMAP accounts only, check the box if you want the change (create, rename, or delete) to take place on the server as well as on your device. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 385 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

You can forward email messages from any folder other than the Outbox folder. Did You Know?

Forwarded messages are always sent as text only, even if you received the original message in HTML format. Working with email messages When you receive an email message, you can reply to it or forward it to someone else. You can also open web addresses (URLs) within messages. 0 Forwarding an email message 1 On a folder screen, select the folder pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select the folder that contains the message you want to forward. 2 3 4 Select the message you want to forward:

a. Select the email message to open it. b. Select Fwd (Forward).

[ & ] OPTIONAL Add any desired text to the message beneath the subject line. Select Fwd Address and send the message. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 386 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

Replies are always sent as text only, even if you received the original message in HTML format. Tip On the message screen, you can also select Reply from the Options menu. Tip To reply to a message from the message list, tap the envelope icon next to the message you want, and then select Reply from the list. Or open the Options menu and select Reply. Replying to an email message You can reply to an email message as you are reading it, or you can reply to messages in the message list. 0 1 2 3 Select the message you want to reply to. Create the reply:

a. Select Reply. b. Select whether to reply to the sender only or to all message recipients listed in the menu. c. Enter a reply. Select Send to send the reply now, Outbox to send it later, or Drafts to work on it later. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 387 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting reply preferences You can set reply preferences, including whether to include the original message text in a reply, as well as the name and email address to show on your reply. The preferences you set apply to all reply messages you send. 01 Open Reply Options preferences:

a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Reply Options. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 388 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Set the preferences you want:

Message text Select whether to include original message text with a reply. Your name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages, such as Joe Smith. Reply to Address with Enter the email address that you want recipients to see and reply to on your email messages, only if this is different from the email address from which you are sending the message. For example, if you are sending a message from me@yahoo.com but you want recipients to reply to me@earthlink.net, enter the reply-to address here. A reply-to address makes it look as though the email came from the address you entered. BCC Check the BCC box to send a blind copy of any email message you send to another email address. The blind copy email address is not seen by the other recipients of the message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages you send from your device to be sent to your corporate email account, enter that email address. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 389 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip URLs, email addresses, and phone numbers in HTML messages appear as blue underlined text. In text messages, most URLs begin with http://

or www. To view a page or file associated with a URL that does not begin with http:// or www, select the URL, copy it, and paste it into the address bar in the web browser. Tip To receive an alert confirming that you want to delete a message, open the Preferences menu, select Deletion, and check the Confirm deletions box. Working with URLs, email addresses, and phone numbers in a message In email messages you receive, you can do the following:

Select a URL to view the web page or file associated with the URL. Selecting the URL opens the web browser on your device so that you can view the page or file. Select an email address to open a new message screen with the address in the To field. Select a phone number to dial that number. Deleting a message You can delete email messages from any folder. For example, you can delete old messages in the Inbox or messages that you were working on in the Drafts folder. When you delete a message, it is placed in the Trash folder. 0 1 2 On a folder screen, select the folders pick list, and then select the folder that contains the message you want to delete. Select the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want to delete. To select adjacent messages, drag the stylus across the bullet to the left of each message. Lift the stylus and drag again to select additional adjacent messages. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 390 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can also select the message icon next to a message and select Delete in the menu to delete a message. Tip To delete messages on the server when you empty the trash on your device, select the Delete Msgs on Server setting in VersaMail Preferences. Many email providers have size restrictions for mail storage. If your mailbox on the server becomes full, messages are returned to the senders. 3 Delete the message or messages:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete in the Message menu. c. Select Also delete message(s) on server if you want to delete the messages from the server now. IMPORTANT

and view it again later. If you delete a message from the server, you cannot retrieve it d. Select OK. Done 0 Deleting old messages 1 Open the Delete Old Messages dialog box:

a. On a folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Delete Old on the Message menu. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 391 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

Messages you delete from a folder are moved to the Trash folder and remain there until you empty the trash. 2 3 Choose settings for deleting old messages:

a. Select the Folder pick list, and then select the folder that contains the messages you want to delete. b. Select the Older than pick list, and then select One Week, One Month, or Choose Date. If you select Choose Date, select a date from the calendar. Delete messages:

a. Select Delete. b. Select Also delete message(s) on server if you want to delete the messages from the server now. IMPORTANT

and view it again later. If you delete a message from the server, you cannot retrieve it c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 392 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can set a preference to automatically empty the trash. Did You Know?

Many email providers, such as Yahoo!, have size restrictions for mail storage. If your mailbox on the server becomes full, messages are returned to the senders. Emptying the trash When you delete a message, it is moved to the Trash folder. Deleted email accumulates in the Trash folder and takes up space on your device. To increase memory, you should empty the trash regularly. 0 1 2 3 Open the Empty Trash dialog box:

a. On a folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Empty Trash on the Message menu. NOTE If you select to automatically empty the trash, a message asks if you want to delete the trash.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Select Details to see how many messages are in the trash and whether the messages are set to be deleted from the server. Select one of the following options for emptying the trash:

To delete messages from your device as well as from the server Select Both. Select Yes if you want to update the server now. To delete the message from only your device now Select Device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 393 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

By default, trash is set to be emptied automatically, and the time interval is set at Older Than 1 Day. 0 Setting the trash to be emptied automatically 1 Open the Deletion preferences:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Deletion. 2 Select the settings for automatically emptying the trash:

a. Check the Auto-Empty Mail from Trash box if it is not checked. b. Select the pick list, and then select one of the following:

Select Immediately if you want the trash emptied automatically each time you delete messages. Select a time period if you want messages emptied from the trash periodically. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 394 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

In one-line view, read messages appear in plain text in the message list;

unread messages appear in bold text. Did You Know?

POP mail servers do not support the read or unread message feature. For POP accounts, messages that you mark appear in plain or bold text on your device, but the difference is not recognized on the server. Marking messages as read or unread When you select a message to read it, it is automatically marked as read. You can also manually mark messages as read or unread. 0 1 2 Select the message or messages to mark:

a. In the Inbox or on another folders screen, select the folders pick list, and then select the folder containing the message you want to mark. b. Select the icon next to the message you want to mark. To mark multiple messages, select the bullets next to the messages you want to mark. Do one of the following to mark the message or messages:

Single message Select Mark Read or Mark Unread from the list. Multiple messages Open the menus, select Message, and then select Mark Read or Mark Unread. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 395 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Selecting Both and then OK also processes any other pending actions on the server, such as deleting messages in the Trash folder. 3 For IMAP accounts only, select one of the following:

To mark the messages as read or unread on your device only Select Device. To mark the messages on both your device and the server and have the messages marked on the server immediately Select Both, and then select OK on the confirmation screen. To mark the messages on both the device and the server and have the messages marked on the server the next time you synchronize or connect to the server Select Both, and then select Cancel on the confirmation screen. Done Working with attachments Email may contain attached files, such as Microsoft Word documents, photos, or videos, that you want to save, view, or install on your device. When you receive a message that has an attachment, the VersaMail application scans your device to see if you have an application that can open the attachment. Attachment file types you can download and open include photos and videos; Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files; HTML pages; text files; and information from applications on your device such as Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks. You can also work with attached Palm OS applications and related files (PRC and PDB files), as well as compressed ZIP files that contain other files. LifeDrive from palmOne 396 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If an attachment is not downloaded, the paper clip does not appear on the envelope icon. You need to open the message and download the complete message to see if there are any attachments. Did You Know?

You can download a maximum of ten attachments for any received messages. For other types of files, your device may contain a viewer that can open and view attachments for that file type. You can open the attachment only if your device has such a viewer. Among the file types that may be supported are MP3 and AAC files. Working with a downloaded attachment In the message list, a paper clip on a messages envelope icon indicates that the message has an attachment that has been downloaded. You can save an attached file or view, edit, or install the file, depending on the file type. 0 1 2 In the Inbox, select the message with the attachment. Paper clip

[ & ] OPTIONAL If you choose to get messages by subject only, or if you choose to get entire messages but the message plus any attachments exceeds your maximum message size, select More to view the body of the email message plus any attachments. If prompted, select Yes if you want to download an attachment that exceeds your maximum message size. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 397 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 4 Did You Know?

Because downloading large messages can consume device resources, the VersaMail application displays the size and asks if you want to continue downloading any message that exceeds your maximum message size, up to a total size of 5MB. Tip Downloaded attachments are automatically saved to the VersaMail Attachments folder on the hard drive. Select Save if you want to also save the attachment to a specific location on the drive or to an expansion card. Select the attachment you want from the list at the bottom of the screen, and then do one of the following:

To open the attachment in the default viewer Tap the attachment name. To open the attachment menu Tap the folder icon to the left of the attachment name.

[ & ] OPTIONAL If you open the attachment menu, select Save to save the attachment to the hard drive or to an expansion card, or do one of the following, depending on the attachment file type:

FPO Viewable file: text, Word document, task, HTML, graphic, and so on Select View to view the attachment, or select Select Viewer to choose a viewer for that attachment. For example, if you have two photo-viewing applications on your device and you select a photo attachment from the list, you can select which application to use to view the photo. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 398 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Contd Palm OS application or database file (PRC or PDB) Select View. The file is installed automatically. Compressed Zip file Select Unzip. The file decompresses, and the files it contains are listed. Select the name of the file you want, and then select Save, View, or Install. 5 When you finish with the attachment, do one of the following:

Done button appears on screen Select Done. This returns you to the list of attachments, where you can select another attachment. No Done button appears Go to Favorites and select VersaMail to the Inbox of the account you were viewing. to return Done LifeDrive from palmOne 399 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Saving attachments Downloaded attachments are saved automatically to a default location on your devices hard drive; in addition, you can manually save them to a location you choose. Automatic By default, whenever an attachment is downloaded, it is saved in the VersaMail Attachments folder on your drive. The email message containing the attachment is saved in your devices program memory; only the attachment is saved on the drive. Items in the VersaMail Attachments folder remain linked to the message to which they were attached. For example, if you delete the message in VersaMail, the attachment is deleted from the folder. Or, if the message is automatically deleted after a certain number of days, the attachment is deleted from the folder at that time. You can view and work with attachments in the VersaMail Attachments folder in the same way that you can view and work with any other file on your drive. Use Files to open, edit, or move the attachment, or use LifeDrive Manager to copy the attachment to your computer or to identify it as a sync item. NOTE If you edit an attachment in the VersaMail Attachments folder, you are prompted to save the attachment to a different location on the drive so that the original attachment stays unchanged. Manual When an attachment is downloaded, you can choose to save the attachment to a location you specify on your drive or to an expansion card. If you choose this option, the attachment is saved both in the VersaMail Attachments folder and to the selected location, where you can work with it as you do with any other file on the drive or on an expansion card. Attachments you manually save are no longer linked to the original message. If you delete the message in VersaMail, the attachment remains on the drive or on the card. LifeDrive from palmOne 400 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you open a message from the Drafts folder, you must first select Edit before you can add an attachment. Did You Know?

You can attach a file to forwarded messages and replies as well as to messages you create. Tip You can attach files from any location on the hard drive or from an expansion card inserted into your devices expansion slot. Attaching files to outgoing messages You can attach files on your device to email messages you send. For example, you can attach photos or videos; Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files; and entries from Contacts, Calendar, Memos, and Tasks. The maximum size message you can send is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments. The maximum number of attachments for any email message is ten, regardless of the attachments total size. 0 1 On the New Message screen, tap the red paper clip icon in the upper-right corner. Continued Tap here LifeDrive from palmOne 401 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Attach the file:

a. Select the Type pick list, and then select the file type. The VersaMail application displays all file types on your device that you can attach to an email message. Or select to browse files on your devices internal drive or on an expansion card. Did You Know?

If you select Files on Card, the VersaMail application displays all file types on the card. You can select a particular file type, or select All Files to view all files on the card. Tip To remove an attachment from an email message, select the attached file in the Attachments box, and then select Delete. b. Select the file that you want to attach, select Add or Attach, and then select Done. For photos and videos, check the box next to the items you want, and then select Done. NOTE For some file typesfor example, addresses or memosthe files to attach appear in the box at the top of the Attachments screen. For othersfor example, Word or Excel filesa new screen appears from which you can select the file to attach. c. Repeat steps a and b for each attachment you want to add, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 0 402 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Advanced VersaMail application features You can customize and optimize your experience using the VersaMail application in any of the following ways:

Creating and using filters to determine the types of email messages that are downloaded to your device Managing settings for incoming and outgoing mail Adding APOP to an account Setting advanced account preferences Changing email header details Backing up mail databases Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly Working with root folders Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Creating and using filters Filters provide efficient ways to manage email retrieval and storage. When you select Get or Get &

Send, filters determine which email messages are downloaded to your device and in which folder the downloaded messages are stored. IMPORTANT

If you create a filter, only messages that meet the filter criteria are downloaded to your device. You dont see any other messages that have been sent to you, even in your Inbox. To avoid this, you must set up two filters. For example, suppose you create a filter to have all messages with onlinebroker in the From field moved to your Finance folder. You must then create a second filter specifying that all mail not containing onlinebroker in the From field should be moved to the Inbox (or other folder you designate). If you dont create this second filter, only messages containing onlinebroker in the From field are downloaded to your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 403 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Use filters to organize your incoming messages. For example, create a filter so that whenever you receive email about sales meetings, it goes immediately into a folder you create called Sales. Or create a filter so that stock quotes sent to you by your online brokerage service go to a folder you create called Finance. 0 1 2 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail

. Open the Filters dialog box:

a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Filters. d. Select New. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 404 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

Filters you create on your device also apply when you synchronize email on your device with email on your computer. 3 Enter the filter information:

a. Enter a short description of the filter in the Name field. b. Enter filter criteria:

To pick list Select the message header field with the information contained in the edit line: To, From, Subject, cc, Size. For example, you might select From to download only messages from a particular sender. Contains pick list Select a filter action: Contains, Starts with, Does NOT Contain. Edit line Enter the text that must be found in the header field. For example, if you want to sort email with the subject Sales, enter Sales. If you enter more than one criteria, separate each with a commafor example, Sales, New York. Then get mail and move to pick list Select the folder or mailbox into which you want your filtered email to go. You can also create a new folder for storing the incoming email. Select Edit Folders, and then create a new folder or delete or rename existing ones. c. Select OK. The filter appears in the Filters list. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 405 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Filters that are turned on execute in the order in which they appear on the Filters list. To ensure that filters execute in the correct order, move them up and down the list by selecting the pick list to the left of the filter name. Turning filters on and off A filter that is turned on applies to all subsequent downloads of email until you deselect it. More than one filter can be in effect at once. Before you download email, be sure to turn on the filters you want and turn off those you dont want. 0 1 Open the Filters dialog box:

a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Filters. The Filters dialog box appears with the filters you created. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 406 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you dont want a filter to apply to any downloads at all, be sure to deselect the filter under both Connected and Synchronize. 2 Turn filters on or off:

a. Select the pick list in the upper-left corner and select one of the following:

Connected Applies a filter to messages downloaded to your handheld over a network connection. Synchronize Applies a filter to messages downloaded to your handheld when you synchronize. b. Check or uncheck the filter boxes to select the filters you do and dont want to use for subsequent email transactions. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 407 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Edit a filter to change either its name or any of its criteria. 0 Editing or deleting a filter 1 Select the filter to edit or delete:

a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Filters, and then select the name of the filter. Do one of the following:

Edit Revise your entry in the Name field, your selections in the pick lists, or the text in the edit line. Select OK. Delete Select Delete, select Yes to confirm the deletion, and then select OK. Select OK. Done 2 3 LifeDrive from palmOne 408 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Any connection preferences you set are account-specific; they apply only to the account you are currently in. Did You Know?

The default Timeout setting is 45 seconds. It can be any number greater than 0 seconds;

however, if you set the number too low, your connection attempt may time out before you make a connection with the email service provider. 0 Setting connection preferences 1 Open the Connection Preferences screen:

a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Connection. 2 Select any of the following preferences:

Timeout Sets the number of seconds to try to connect before timing out. To change the timeout period, select the Timeout field and enter a new value. Auto-disconnect Automatically disconnects your remote connections after each command. Each command you perform initiates a new call to your ISP. This setting is not recommended if you plan to perform multiple email transactions in a short amount of time. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 409 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Contd Disconnect on Exit Disconnects from the network only after you leave VersaMail. This feature is an alternative to Auto-disconnect. This option keeps your connection active while you perform multiple transactions in the VersaMail application, but automatically disconnects when you move on to a different application on your device. If this option is not selected, you must manually disconnect from your ISP. Modem wait Displays the number of seconds that the modem takes to initialize itself. If you have a modem, select and enter a number of seconds for the wait. The typical setting for a wireless modem is 3, and the typical setting for most normal modems is 0. Done Setting server preferences Server preferences differ for POP and IMAP email accounts. 0 1 Open the Server Preferences screen:

a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Server. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 410 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Any server preferences you set are account-

specific; they apply only to the account you are currently viewing. 2 Select any of the following preferences:

Leave mail on server (POP accounts only) To get email on your device but leave it on the server so you can view it later on your computer, check the Leave mail on server box. Root Folders (IMAP accounts only) Defines the root folder on your IMAP server. Deleted Mail (IMAP accounts only) Stores deleted email in the folder you specify on the server. Sent Mail (IMAP accounts only) Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on the server. Delete mail on the server Check this box to delete messages on your providers mail server when they are deleted in the VersaMail application. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 411 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Changing email header details When viewing a message in any folder, you can change the view of the message header. The email header options are as follows:

Short header Shows senders name or address (From field) and subject line (Subj field). Select icon to switch to full header Full header Shows the following:

Senders name or email address (From field) Subject line (Subj field) Date message was composed, sent, or received (Date field) Size of message including any attachments (Size field) Recipients name or email address (To field) Select icon to switch to short header LifeDrive from palmOne 412 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages You can also switch between a short header and a full header for a message you are composing. Short header shows the To and Subject fields only; full header shows the To, cc:, bcc:, and Subject fields. Select to switch to full header Select to switch to short header To switch between short and full headers on either a folder screen or a message screen, select the header icon in the upper-right corner of the screen. Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly If you create an IMAP folder in an account on your device that matches a folder on the mail server, you can wirelessly synchronize email messages that you move into or out of the IMAP folder or that you delete in the folder with messages on your device. When you synchronize a folder with your device, any email messages in the selected folder on the mail server are downloaded to the same folder on your device. Any messages moved out of the selected folder on your device or deleted on your device are moved or deleted in the folder on the mail server. LifeDrive from palmOne 413 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

You can synchronize folders whose names are up to 16 characters in length. You can synchronize up to 11 custom folders you create, in addition to the default folders Inbox, Outbox, Drafts, Sent, and Trash. Tip If you have a folder on your handheld that matches a folder on the mail server, you do not need to do anything before synchronizing wirelessly. Prerequisites for wireless IMAP folder synchronization Depending on how you have set up IMAP folders on your device and/or the mail server, you may need to do one of the following before you can wirelessly synchronize email messages on your device with messages on the server:

If you need to create a folder on both your device and the server, create the folder on your device and check the Also create on server box. If there is a folder on the mail server but you need to create it on your device, you do not need to check the Also create on server box. You can turn folder synchronization on or off when getting mail, or you can set synchronization options from a menu. Turning IMAP folder synchronization on or off If you choose to display the Get Mail Options dialog box, you can turn IMAP folder synchronization on or off in the box. 0 1 2 From within an IMAP email account, select Get or Get & Send. Check or uncheck the Sync IMAP Folders box, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 414 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

After you select the folders to synchronize, a connection is made to your email service provider to update the server with changes from your handheld, and to update your device with changes from the server. Synchronizing device and mail server IMAP folders from the Options menu 1 Open the Sync IMAP Folders screen:

0 a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen of an IMAP account, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Sync IMAP Folders. 2 Select the folder or folders you want to synchronize from the pick list. Done Working with root folders For IMAP accounts, if you want to synchronize email messages on your device with messages on the mail server folder, you need to enter the root folder for the account on your device. Check with your email provider to find out the root folder for your IMAP account. Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a protocol designed to ensure that data you send or receive over a network or the Internet is secure and authentic. The VersaMail application uses SSL to help guarantee the secure transmission of email messages that you send or receive. When you set up an account in the VersaMail application, you are given the option of selecting SSL for incoming and outgoing mail. LifeDrive from palmOne 415 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages IMPORTANT

incoming and outgoing mail. If you select just one or the other, your messages cannot be sent or received successfully. For most email providers that support SSL, you must select SSL for both If you set up an account that uses an SSL connection on Outlook, Outlook Express, or Eudora, then SSL is supported in the VersaMail conduit when you synchronize with that account as well. You cannot use scheduled sending retry of email with accounts that use an SSL connection. Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync If your corporate email system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your device. Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with the VersaMail and Calendar applications on your device to directly download email and calendar information from the serverwithout going through your desktop computer. When you create a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in the VersaMail application, both your email and calendar info synchronize directly with info on the Exchange server; they do not synchronize with info in your desktop software application, such as Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook. Other information on your device, such as contacts, tasks, and memos, continues to synchronize with information in your desktop software application. What do I need to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync?

To use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your device, you must obtain the following information from your system administrator:

Whether the corporate mail system uses a Microsoft Exchange 2003 mail server. If it does not, you cannot use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. The name of the mail server that provides wireless access to your mail system. Some companies do not give out this information because they do not want wireless access to the system. If you cannot obtain the server name, you cannot use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. LifeDrive from palmOne 416 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

When you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, all existing Calendar events are purged from your device. Then, when you synchronize your device with your Exchange server, events from the past seven days are downloaded to your device. So you dont end up with duplicate events. Tip Another way an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync differs from other accounts is that there is no bcc option when you send a message. Whether a proxy server is used, and, if so, the name of the server. Whether a virtual private network (VPN) is required to access the server. How does a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account differ from other accounts?

An email account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync differs from other accounts in the following areas:

Setting up an account Getting messages Downloading attachments Receiving and working with meeting invitations Receiving and working with Calendar events These features are discussed in this chapter. Most other features of a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, such as sending messages or attaching files to messages, work like the features of any other account. NOTE Email accounts that use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync do not support mail filters. Also, you cannot set server preferences from the VersaMail Preferences screen for this type of account. Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account Although Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with both the VersaMail and Calendar applications, you must set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in VersaMail. LifeDrive from palmOne 417 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages On a Windows computer, you can quickly set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your computer and then synchronize the settings to your device. On a Mac computer, you must set up the account on your device. You can set up only one Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account. IMPORTANT

If you set up an email account to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, Calendar events on your device automatically synchronize directly with info on the Exchange server, along with email messages. You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in Palm Desktop software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. If you do not want to synchronize Calendar events with info on the server, do not set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in VersaMail. Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your computer WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 3 Open VersaMail account setup. Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next. Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list, and then select Exchange ActiveSync. Click Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 418 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 4 5 Enter the basic account information:

a. Enter a descriptive name for the account. b. Enter your account username and password. c. Enter your email address for this account. d. Click Next. Enter the name of the Exchange server, the port number for the server, and the maximum message size you want to download. Check one or both boxes if the server requires authentication and/or if you are using a proxy server. Check with your system administrator to obtain this information. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 419 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 6 7 8 9 10 11

[ & ] OPTIONAL If you are using a proxy server, enter the server name. Click Next.

[ & ] OPTIONAL To test the account settings you have entered, click Test My Settings. Click OK after settings have been tested. Click Finish. Do one of the following:

a. To synchronize the account information to your device, click the top button. b. To set up another email account, click the bottom button. NOTE You can set up only one Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account. If you choose to set up another email account, it must be a different type. Click Next. When you have finished setting up all accounts, click Finish on the Transfer Settings screen. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 420 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 0 Setting up an account on your device 1 2 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail Open the Account Setup screen:

. a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select Account Setup. c. Select New. 3 Enter the basic account information:

a. In the Account Name field, enter a descriptive name. b. Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select Exchange ActiveSync. c. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 421 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 4 5 Enter the account username and password:

a. Enter the username you use to access your email. b. Select the Password box, enter your email account password, and then select OK. c. Select Next. Enter your email address and Exchange mail server name. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 422 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 6 Do one of the following:

Finish setup Select Done to finish setup and go to the Inbox of the account you set up, where you can begin getting and sending email. Set additional mail options Select Advanced to set advanced mail options. Test settings Select Test My Settings to test settings for this account, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 423 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip In most cases, you do not need to change the default advanced mail options. Check with your system administrator to see if you need to change the port number, uncheck the Use Secure Connection box, or enter proxy server information. Setting advanced mail options on your device 0 1 2 Set incoming mail server options:

a. Select any of the following:

Port Number By default, the port number setting is 443. You may need to change the port number if you choose not to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection. Use Secure Connection (SSL) By default, this box is checked, meaning you can retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection. Uncheck the box if you do not want to receive email over an SSL connection. b. Select Next. If you use a proxy server, enter the proxy server name and port number, and check the box if your server requires authentication. Check with your system administrator for this information. When you have finished, select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 424 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Increase the time interval for how many days worth of email to retrieve so that recent messages are not removed from your device. Note that the interval for Calendar event retrieval is always seven days. Did You Know?

When you set preferences for getting messages for a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, the Ask Every Time option does not appear. Getting email messages The steps you take for manually getting messages in a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account are the same as for all other accounts, with one exception: You select Sync instead of Get or Get &

Send. However, what takes place during message retrieval for this type of account is different from that of other accounts. Here are the important differences:

NOTE These differences apply to an account that uses Microsoft Exchange AutoSync whether you manually retrieve messages or set up an Auto Sync schedule. Message retrieval When you get messages manually or through Auto Sync, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync not only retrieves email messages directly from the server for the time interval set on your device (default is seven days); it also retrieves all Calendar events directly from the server for the preceding seven days. The interval for Calendar event retrieval is always seven days, regardless of the interval you set on your device. Wireless synchronization Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync supports wireless synchronization with the server only. To retrieve email messages and Calendar events, you must select Sync in VersaMail to make a wireless connection to the server. If you synchronize your device with your computer, info from other applicationsContacts, Memos, and so onis synchronized, but email messages and Calendar events are not. Message removal Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync removes any email messages from your device that fall outside the time interval set on the device. For example, if the time interval is set at seven days, any email messages that are eight days old are removed from your device. This info is not removed from the Exchange server. LifeDrive from palmOne 425 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 0 1 2 3 Did You Know?

When you synchronize a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, a copy of any messages sent from your device is placed in the Sent Items folder on the Exchange server. A copy of any messages deleted from your device is placed in the Deleted Items folder on the server. Did You Know?

When you forward or reply to a message, the text is sent from the server copy of the message, not from the copy on your device. This is faster and may save on data charges. Go to Favorites and select VersaMail

[ & ] OPTIONAL If you are using a VPN connection, connect to your VPN. Get messages:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select your Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account. c. Select Sync. This updates your Calendar events also. Done A list of your messages appears in the Inbox. To see downloaded Calendar events, tap Calendar

. LifeDrive from palmOne 426 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can add names and email addresses directly to Contacts from the To field of an invitation. Did You Know?

If you receive meeting invitations, the Reminders screen displays both the number of new email messages and the number of new meeting invitations for that accountfor example, 5 new messages/2 new meetings. Previewing attachments 0 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts let you view a list of all attachments to a message, with approximate file size, so you can decide which ones you want to download. Unlike with other accounts, you do not need to fully download a message to view the list of attachments; it appears dimmed at the bottom of the message screen whether or not the message is fully downloaded. Select an attachment from the list to download it. Once the message is downloaded, you can work with it just like any you work with other attachment. Working with meeting invitations For Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts only, each time you retrieve messages either manually or through Auto Sync, Exchange meeting invitations are downloaded to your Inbox. NOTE You cannot create meeting invitations on your device. You can only receive meeting invitations sent to you. 0 1 2 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail

. Get messages. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 427 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip After opening an invitation, you can switch between full and concise meeting details by switching between full header view and short header view. Did You Know?

You can forward meeting invitations in the same way that you forward email messages. The recipient receives the message as a meeting invitation. 3 4 Select a meeting invitation to open it. Meeting invitations are displayed with a unique icon

[ & ] OPTIONAL If the invitation contains an attachment, open the attachment and view or save it before responding to the invitation. Once you respond to the invitation the attachment is removed. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 428 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

When you send your response, the server is updated with the new meeting event and immediately synchronizes the event to the Calendar application on your device. If you select Accept, the event appears as a confirmed appointment. Tip If you receive an updated meeting invitation, you can again choose to accept, decline, or tentatively accept. If you receive a meeting cancellation, you dont need to do anything. 5 Respond to the invitation:

a. After reading the invitation,

, Decline

(tentatively select Accept or Tentative accept). b. Select the response option you want from the dialog box:

Respond without comments Sends an immediate email response to the meeting organizer by means of the Exchange server. Respond with comments Opens an email response form to which you can add comments before sending your response. Select Send to send the response to the meeting organizer by means of the Exchange server. Respond without reply Updates the server with your reply, but does not send a response to the meeting organizer. NOTE If you decline an invitation, the invitation is automatically put into the Trash folder. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 429 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with Calendar events When you set up an account in VersaMail that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, the Calendar application is synchronized directly with the info on the Exchange server as well. Any new Calendar events on the server for the preceding seven days are downloaded to your device. The interval for synchronizing Calendar events is always seven days, even if you set a different interval on your device for synchronizing email messages. IMPORTANT You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in Palm Desktop

software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. If you want to stop synchronizing Calendar events with the server, you must delete the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. Only Calendar and VersaMail information is synchronized directly with info on the Exchange server. Other information on your device, such as contacts, tasks, and memos, continues to be synchronized with information in your desktop software applicationeither Palm Desktop or Outlook. When using Calendar with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, note the following important features:

Time zones Time zones are always included for Calendar events when you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. When you synchronize your device with the Exchange server and download new events, the time zone information is included with each event. If you travel to a different time zone, the event times are automatically adjusted in Calendar on your device when you update your location on your device. Attendees For meetings, you can see a full list of attendees to the meeting. From the Day View, select the event, and then select Details. Select the With field. NOTE The Attendees field does not appear if the event is not a meeting. It is not available for events you create on your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 430 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know?

All Calendar events are also purged from your device when you change the time interval for retrieving email for a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, or when you change the username, password, or server name for this type of account. The next time you synchronize your device with the Exchange server, events for the past seven days are downloaded to your device, so you dont end up with duplicate events. Synchronizing Calendar events using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync When you synchronize Calendar events with the info on Exchange server, all of the following take place:

Any events you create on your device are synchronized with info on the server. NOTE You cannot create meeting invitations on your device. You can only receive meeting invitations sent to you. Any events you create or change in Outlook on your computer that are on the Exchange server are synchronized to your device. Any meeting invitations are displayed in the Inbox of your Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in VersaMail. When you respond to an invitation, the response is synchronized to the server, and then synchronized from the server to Calendar on your device. Updating Calendar events when you delete a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in Palm Desktop software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. If you want to stop synchronizing Calendar events with info on the server, you must delete the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. When you delete a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, all Calendar events are purged from your device. Then, when you synchronize Calendar with your desktop software application Palm Desktop or Outlookthe events synchronize to your device, so you dont end up with duplicate events. LifeDrive from palmOne 431 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with the VersaMail application or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around Using the Graffiti 2 command stroke in email messages Entering Info Cutting, copying, and pasting text from an email message Managing Info Downloading email messages from your computer to your device Connecting Setting up a phone connection for sending and receiving email wirelessly Customizing Setting preferences for connecting to a network Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about the VersaMail application LifeDrive from palmOne 432 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages In this chapter Creating and sending a text message Receiving and viewing a text message Editing a draft text message Setting advanced messaging features Related Topics If you need to get a short message to a friend or co-worker fast, send a text message from your device by means of your mobile phone (GSM phone with IR or Bluetooth wireless technology required; sold separately) to their mobile phone. Messaging is a popular way for people to stay connected using the text messaging features of their mobile phone. Benefits Enjoy quick communication Use text messaging to chat with friends LifeDrive from palmOne 433 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages

Before You Begin Before you can send and receive text messages, you must set up a phone connection on your device to send and receive information wirelessly. Key Term SMS More commonly known as text messages, Short Message Service messages can be received by most mobile phones. Creating and sending a text message IMPORTANT

Many SMS service providers charge per text message or part of a text message. Each message or part is 160 characters. If you create a text message under 161 characters, you are charged for one message. If you create a message that is 161 to 320 characters, you may be charged for two messages, and so forth. A counter appears at the top of the page to indicate the number of characters. Even though a message has more than 160 characters, the message appears as one message to the person receiving the message. 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select SMS

. Select New. Unread message Read message Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 434 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Tip If you are concerned about the length of your messages, you can have a warning appear when multipart messages exceed the specified number of parts. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Select Details and then select the number of parts from the Warn over pick list. Did You Know?

You can create a signature that you use to sign your messages by opening the Options menu and selecting Preferences. Enter a signature on the lines. You can add your signature to your message by opening the Options menu and selecting Add Signature. 3 4 5 Enter the recipients address using one of the following methods:

Select To Select the recipients name on the Mobile Number Lookup list, and then select Add. Enter directly Enter the recipients mobile phone number on the To line. In the area below the To line, enter the text of your message. Number of characters

[ & ] OPTIONAL You can store your message in your Draft category and work on it later:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Draft on the Message menu. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 435 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages 6 Send your message:

Select Send Sends the current message now. Selecting Send does not send any of the other messages in your Outbox. Select Outbox Sends your message to the Outbox to be sent later. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 436 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Tip If you want to check your messages but you dont want to send the messages stored in your Outbox, open the Messages menu and select Check. Tip You can also send all the messages in your Outbox by opening the Messages menu and selecting Send. Did You Know?

You can set an alert that lets you know a new message has arrived. Open the Preferences menu and check the Alert sound box. Select the Alarm pick list to choose a sound. Receiving and viewing a text message 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select SMS

. Select Send & Check. Select the message to open and read it. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 437 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Did You Know?

You can change how your messages are listed. You can sort the messages in order of one of the following: Alphabetic, Date, Phone Number, and Status. You can also choose to display the date the message was received. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Select from the Sort by pick list and select Show date. 4 Store, delete, or reply to the message:

Select Done The message is kept in the Inbox. Select Reply A new message is created with the senders phone number in the To line. Any selected text is copied into the new message. Select Delete The message is sent to the Trash category. Archive the message You can store your message in the Archive category:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Archive on the Message menu. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 438 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Did You Know?

You can store your message in your Draft folder and work on it later by opening the Message menu and selecting Draft. Editing a draft text message 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select SMS

. Edit the message:

a. Select Draft from the categories pick list. b. Select the message you want to edit. c. In the message view, select Edit and edit your message. Send or store the draft message:

Select Send Sends the current message now. Selecting Send does not send any of the other messages in your Outbox. Select Outbox Sends your message to the Outbox to be sent later. Select Cancel Opens a dialog box that asks if you want to save the message in the Draft category. Select Yes to keep your changes and return the message to the Draft category. Select No to discard your changes and return the message to the Draft category. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 439 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Setting advanced messaging features 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select SMS

. Go to the Preferences menu:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. elect

[ & ] OPTIONAL Set the following parameters:

Confirm Deleted Message Indicates whether a confirmation message appears each time you delete a message or you select the Empty Trash option from the Message menu. To display confirmation messages, check this box. Delete After Transfer accept the data in the appropriate application. To keep data messages after you transfer them to the application, uncheck this box. Indicates whether data messages are deleted after you Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 440 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Did You Know?

Outgoing SMS message settings may depend on the service offered by your SMS carrier. 4 5

[ & ] OPTIONAL Select Details and set the following parameters:

Leave Messages on Phone Indicates whether messages are deleted from your phone after you download them to your device. To keep messages on your phone after you transfer them to your device, select this box. Return Receipt Determines whether you receive receipt confirmation notices. To receive receipt confirmation notices, select Requested. Indicates how long unsent messages remain in your Outbox. Select Expires from the following options: 4 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 2 Weeks, 1 Month, and Max. Time. Indicates whether your device obtains your mobile phone Message Center service providers Message Center number directly from the phone, or whether you need to enter the number manually. If your phone is already configured to use SMS, you do not need to change this setting. Select OK twice. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 441 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with SMS or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related Topics Click the link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around Opening applications Using menus Categories Organizing messages by arranging them into categories and sorting them Privacy Sharing Keeping messages private by turning on security options Exchanging messages with other palmOne device users by beaming them Sending messages to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device Connecting Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth technology on your device to send and receive messages wirelessly LifeDrive from palmOne 442 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web You use the web for so many things:

checking email, finding driving directions, getting news, buying gifts. Now you can take the web with you almost anywhere you go. Use your device to make an Internet connection through your mobile phone, and the web browser opens the entire web to you. In this chapter Accessing a web page Quickly jumping to a page Changing how you view a page Bookmarking your favorite pages Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet Downloading files and pages Communicating with other users Returning to a web page you recently visited Changing your home and start pages Setting advanced browser options Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Benefits of the web browser Carry the web with you View web pages in device-friendly format Store pages for offline viewing 443 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Accessing a web page You can open web pages, navigate the pages, and do the same things you can do with a desktop browser. Accessing a web page using the action bar 1 2 Go to the web page you want to view:

Go to Favorites and select Web

. a. Select Go to Web Page

Before You Begin To browse the web, you must set up a connection to the Internet from your device. If you are accessing a VPN network, you need to install VPN software and set up VPN access. You can turn on VPN from the web browser by opening the Options menu and selecting Turn VPN On. Key Term URL Stands for uniform resource locator, the technical name for a web address. For example, the URL for palmOne is http://

www.palmone.com. b. Enter the address of the web page you want to visit. Use the buttons in the Go to Web Page dialog box for quick entry of characters commonly used in web addresses. If the web browser recognizes the address that you are entering due to a previous entry and autofill is enabled, autofill automatically completes the address. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 444 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip You can also hide the address field to show more of the web page. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Uncheck the Show Address Bar box. Tip Are you going to need the information on a web page when you are disconnected from the Internet? You can easily save a web page for off-

line viewing. 0 Accessing a web page using the address field 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web Go to the web page you want to view:

Address field

. a. Enter the address of the web page in the address field. b. Select Go. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 445 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip Some websites allow you to check a box to have your sign-in name automatically entered each time you visit a particular web page. Using a password to access a web page Some websites require you to use a password to gain access to information. 0 1 2 3 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Go to the web page where you must enter the password. Enter your password to access the web page:

a. Enter your sign-in name in the appropriate field. b. Tap in the password box, enter your password, and then select OK. c. Select the button that lets you view the page (Sign In, Enter, Go, and so on). Done LifeDrive from palmOne 446 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Did You Know?

Find locates any text, whether it is letters or numbers. Find is not case-sensitive. Tip Because of the limited space on the device screen, sometimes the current web address

(URL) is not fully visible. Use the Page Properties dialog box to view the full URL. Open the Page menu, select Page, and then select Page Info. 0 Finding information on a web page 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web Open the Find field:

. a. Go to the web page you want to search. b. Open the menus. c. Select Page, and then select Find Text on Page. 3 Search the web page:

a. Type the text you want to find. b. Select Find. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 447 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Quickly jumping to a page The action bar icons allow you to quickly move from page to page. Following a link Many web pages contain underlined links, which are text or pictures that, when selected, take you to another web page or to another part of the same page. Select the link to go to another web page Returning to your home page or a page you recently visited No matter where you navigate on the Internet, you can always return to your home page quickly or return to a page you have recently visited. Select the back and forward arrows to go to previous pages Select the Home icon to go to your home page LifeDrive from palmOne 448 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip You can change your font size for easier viewing. Did You Know?

In the Optimized mode, use the 5-way to browse the web page. Press Left or Right to jump to the previous or next link. When a link is highlighted, press Center to go to the link. Press Up and Down to scroll through the web page. Changing how you view a page You can change how you view web pages by selecting different display views and dragging the screen to view different parts. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Go to the web page you want to view. Select the Display View icon in the action bar. Display View icon Select from one of the following views:

Optimized Displays a modified version of the web page so that it is optimized for device viewing. Wide Page Displays the web page as it would appear in a desktop computer web browser. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 449 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web 5

[ & ] OPTIONAL If the web page is larger than your screen, you can tap and drag the stylus to move the web page in any direction to view different parts of the web page. To activate the Tap and Drag scrolling, you must set the Tap and Drag setting in the General Preferences tab under the Options menu. This feature is disabled when you turn on Writing Area Preferences and use the full screen for Graffiti 2 writing. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 450 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Key Term Bookmark A pointer to a web page. The actual page is not stored, only the URL. Also called a Favorite in some browsers. Tip You can set your bookmark list as your start page. Bookmarking your favorite pages Bookmarking your favorite web pages allows you to quickly return to those pages. 0 Adding a bookmark 1 2 3 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Go to the web page that you want to bookmark. Open the Bookmark Page dialog box:

4 5 a. Open the menus. b. Select Page, and then select Add Bookmark.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Change the bookmark name, description, or URL. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 451 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip You can also view your list of bookmarks by selecting View Bookmarks from the Page menu. Did You Know?

A saved page is displayed like a bookmarked page, except that at the top of the page appears the text Page saved on date -

size k. Viewing a bookmarked or saved page Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in the Bookmarks View. Saved pages are indicated by a small triangle in the upper-right corner of the bookmark. 0 1 2 3 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Select the Bookmark icon

. Select the name of the bookmarked or saved page you want to visit. On the bottom right of the screen are five icons representing the first five bookmark pages. Select the bookmark page icon to display the page. You can also tap the arrow to go to the next page. Done Bookmark page arrow Bookmark page icons LifeDrive from palmOne 452 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip You can clean up your bookmark list by deleting old bookmarks or saved pages you no longer use. Select the bookmark, select Edit, and then select Delete. Editing information about a bookmark or saved page You can edit or delete any bookmark or saved page that does not have a lock icon next to it. 0 1 2 3 4 5 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Select the Bookmark icon

. Go to the Edit Bookmarks List dialog box:

a. Select the Bookmark icon

. b. Open the menus. c. Select Bookmarks, and then select Edit Bookmarks. Edit the bookmark information:

a. Select the name of the bookmarked or saved page that you want to edit. b. Change the bookmark or saved page name, description, or address (URL) by selecting the appropriate option. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 453 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Arranging the bookmark list The web browser includes ten pages so that you can arrange bookmarks and saved pages in a logical fashion. For example, you can store travel links on one page, stock links on another, and business links on a third page. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Go to the Edit Bookmarks List dialog box:

a. Select the Bookmark icon

. b. Open the menus. c. Select Bookmarks, and then select Edit Bookmarks. Arrange the bookmarks:

a. Use the stylus to drag and drop bookmarks into different slots on the current page to organize them. b. Move a bookmark to a different page by dragging and dropping it onto the Page icon. Page icons represent the ten bookmarked pages with ten slots each for bookmarks. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 454 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Did You Know?

Generally, if you are using a GPRS service, you are charged only for the data sent. If you are using a GSM service, you are charged for the time you are connected. Tip When you are in another application and you tap a URL, the web browser connects to the Internet and displays the page. The web browser also opens when you select an HTML file that you receive as an email attachment. Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet While youre working with stored information in the web browser, such as saved pages, stored versions of pages, and so forth, you can disconnect from the Internet to reduce usage charges. You can connect to the Internet again when you need access. 0 Disconnecting from the Internet 1 2 Disconnect from the Internet:

Go to Favorites and select Web

. a. Open the menus. b. Select Page, and then select Disconnect. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 455 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip If the connection is not established, do one of the following:

Select Cancel to stop the connection process. Select Change Network to select a different service to connect to. 0 Connecting to the Internet 1 2 Connect to the Internet:

Go to Favorites and select Web

. a. Open the menus. b. Select Page, and then select Connect. Alternately, you can enter a URL on the address line and select Go. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 456 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip If you decide that the download process is taking too long, you can stop it. To stop a web page from downloading, select the Stop icon in the action bar. To stop a file from downloading, select Cancel in the Download dialog box. Did You Know?

The maximum file size you can download through the web browser is 2MB. Downloading files and pages You can download files or save files for viewing when you are not connected to the Internet. 0 Downloading a file 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Go to the web page you want to view. Select the link of the file you want to download. Select a download option:

Application name Downloads the file to an application. For example, if you are downloading a Word document, the file downloads into Documents To Go. Card If you have an expansion card installed, the file downloads onto the card. If you dont have an expansion card installed, the file is downloaded into the default folder for that file type on the devices internal drive. If that file type does not have a default folder, it downloads into a folder called Blazer Downloads. 5 Select Save, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 457 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Did You Know?

Saved pages are listed with the bookmarks in the Bookmark List. The saved pages have an orange corner. Did You Know?

The web browser also functions as a viewer, enabling you to quickly view certain files while working in other applications. For example, if you read an email message that has a file attached in HTML format, select the file and the web browser opens so that you can view the file. Tip Saving a web page on your device allows you to view a web page without being online. Saving a web page If you want to save a web page (such as a travel itinerary or Internet order receipt) indefinitely, you can create a saved page. The copy is stored on the device until you delete it. 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Go to the web page you want to save. Go to the Save Page dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Page, and then select Save Page. Save the web page:

a. Change the page name or description if you want. b. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 458 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip Suppose you have an HTML file on your desktop computer that you want to carry with you. Download the file onto devices internal drive or expansion card and use the web browser to view the page on your device. Viewing a saved file You can use the web browser to view web pages or image files that are on the devices internal drive or an expansion card. The types of file that can be viewed include HTML, HTM, GIF, and JPG. 0 1 2 Press the Files button

. Select a file or folder to open it. A web browser icon appears to the left of the file name in the Files list if it is a file that is automatically opened in web browser. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 459 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Communicating with other users You can communicate with others by means of email or beaming. Sending email by means of an Internet email account You can use your Internet email account to send an email message and attachments. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Log in to your Internet email account:

a. Go to the web page that allows you to log in to your email account. b. Enter your username and password. Compose your email message. Send or save the email message. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 460 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip You can delete all pages saved in the History list by selecting Clear All. Tip Create a bookmark to save the location, or create a saved page to save the content of a web page indefinitely. Returning to a web page you recently visited Using the Back and Forward icons to browse through the pages you recently visited, one page at a time, can be tedious. Instead, open the History list to go to a page you recently visited. You can go back to a page you remember visiting but did not bookmark. Use the History list to jump directly to that page. Items in the History list are sorted chronologically. 0R 1 2 3 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Open the History dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Page, and then select History. Select the web page you recently visited. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 461 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Changing your home and start pages You can change the page that your Home Page icon browser starts with when it is first opened. goes to, or change the page that the web Changing your home page You can choose a home page from any web address. 0C 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Open the Preferences Page dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select the Page tab. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 462 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web 3 4 5 Select the Home Page box. Enter the URL you want as your home page by doing one of the following:

To select one of the last five pages you viewed, select the Previously Viewed pick list and select a URL. Enter a URL on the Address line. Select OK twice. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 463 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Changing your start page You can select the start page you want your device to open to when you first open the web browser. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Open the Preferences Page dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select the Page tab. Select the Start with pick list, and select the page you want to start with when you first open the web browser:

Home Page The page you have set as your home page. Last Page Viewed The last page you viewed before exiting the web browser. Bookmarks The Bookmarks dialog box opens. The web browser does not connect to the Internet. Blank Page An empty page with no URL or dialog box Select OK. Done 0 LifeDrive from palmOne 464 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Setting advanced browser options You can change options on your device to improve the speed, ease of use, and security of your browsing experience. Changing how images are downloaded Images in web pages can be very large. You can set an option to make web pages download faster by removing images altogether. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Open the General Preferences dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select General tab. Check or uncheck the Disable Images box to disable or enable images. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 465 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip Filling out an order form or application on the web usually requires entering several pieces of information: your name, address, phone number, and so on. When you enable autofill, your device stores the information you entered in these fields. The next time you use that order form and type the first few letters in a field, your device remembers the last item you entered in that field that started with those letters, and fills in the field. Setting whether to automatically complete web addresses and form fields Your device can store information, such as web addresses and form fields. If autofill is enabled, when you enter the first few letters of a URL youve entered before in the URL Entry field, your device completes the URL for you. Also, when you are filling out forms and applications, your device can complete the information for you. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Open the General Preferences dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select General tab. Check or uncheck the Disable Auto Complete box to enable or disable autofill. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 466 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Key Term Cookie Some websites store information in a small text file, called a cookie, that is saved on your device. A cookie usually stores information about you and your preferences for that website. A site can use this information to customize the pages you see the next time you visit. Allowing a website to create a cookie does not give the site access to the rest of your device. A cookie stores only the information you provide while visiting the website. Allowing websites to remember personal information By default, your device saves the cookies it receives. If you want more privacy, you can tell your device not to accept cookies. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Open the General Preferences dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select General tab. Check or uncheck the Disable cookies box. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 467 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Setting preferences for storing web pages Your device stores web pages automatically in the cache. 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Open the Advanced Preferences dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Advanced. Continued Key Term Cache The cache in your device is a block of memory that stores web pages so you can view them again without accessing the Internet. Cached web pages are saved, thereby saving the content youve viewed even when you exit the web browser. Tip Remember that your device has a limited amount of memory. Choose a cache size that lets you store at least a few pages but still leaves room on your device for other data and applications. A value of at least 1MB is recommended. LifeDrive from palmOne 468 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web 3 4 Change the size and content of the cache by using the following options:

Set memory limit for storing pages Sets the amount of memory used for your cache. Pages are cached so they load faster the next time you view them. Cookies memory is being used by cookies. Indicates how much Clear Cache Clears the cache immediately and frees the memory. Clear cache on exit Check the box to clear the cache each time you exit the web browser. Uncheck the box to keep the cache from session to session. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 469 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Key Term Proxy server A server that provides access to files from other servers by retrieving them either from its local cache or from the remote server. Setting preferences for using a proxy server Your device comes with the proxy server turned off. You can turn the proxy server on and configure a proxy server. 0 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Open the Advanced Preferences dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Advanced. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 470 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web 3 4 Set your proxy server preferences:

a. Select Set Proxy. b. Check or uncheck the Use proxy server box to use or not use a proxy server. c. If you want to use a proxy server, select the Use Proxy box and enter the appropriate server address and port number. d. Select OK. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 471 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Setting whether to accept JavaScript You can choose to bypass JavaScript elements on the web pages you view. JavaScript is often used on web pages for interactive content. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Favorites and select Web

. Open the General Preferences dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select General tab. Check or uncheck the Disable JavaScript box to enable or disable JavaScript. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 472 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with the web browser or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around Opening applications Using menus Categories Organizing messages by arranging them into categories and sorting them Connecting Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your device VersaMail Sending email messages using a link from a web page. LifeDrive from palmOne 473 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device In this chapter Dialing a number Using speed dial Related topics Need to dial a number? You can dial phone numbers directly from a Contact using Quick Connect. If you dont have the number listed as a contact, you can tap the number on the Dialer keypad, select Dial, and your mobile phone begins dialing (GSM phone required;

sold separately). Your call history stays on your device for easy access later. Benefits of Dialer Easily dial numbers that are not in Contacts by using the keypad on your device screen Keep your call history on your device Quickly dial numbers using speed dial LifeDrive from palmOne 474 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device

Before You Begin Before you can dial a number, you must set up a phone connection on your device. Dialing a number Tapping out a number on your device is sometimes easier than using your mobile phone. 0 Entering a number 1 2 Go to Applications and select Dialer

. Tap the telephone number on the keypad. Digits appear in the numeric display Enter phone number and select Dial Select Clear to delete last digit from numeric display. Select and hold to clear entire numeric display Select and hold the 0 key to add a + (plus) to the number sequence 3 Select Dial. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 475 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device 0 Redialing the most recently used number 1 2 Go to Applications and select Dialer Dial the most recently used number:

. a. Select Dial to display the most recently used number. The most recently dialed number is displayed Select Dial b. Select Dial again to dial the number. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 476 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Did You Know?

Dialer keeps a list of 11 of the most recently dialed numbers. Did You Know?

If the number is a speed dial entry, the name from the speed-dial entry appears in the Call History list. 0 Dialing a number from the Call History List 1 2 Go to Applications and select Dialer Dial the number from the list:

. a. Select History. b. Select an entry from the History list. Select entry to enter number on Dialer screen c. Select Dial. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 477 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Using speed dial Speed dial allows you to store ten of your most commonly used numbers and to dial one with a single tap. 0 Adding a speed-dial entry 1 2 Add a speed-dial entry:

Go to Applications and select Dialer

. a. Select Speed. b. Select an empty speed-dial button. Select empty speed-dial button c. Enter a name and telephone number. d. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 478 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device 0 Dialing a number using speed dial 1 2 Dial the number:

Go to Applications and select Dialer

. a. Select Speed. b. Select one of the named speed-dial buttons. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 479 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Tip You can go directly to the Edit Entry dialog box by tapping and holding a speed-dial button. 0 Editing a speed-dial entry 1 2 Select an entry to edit:

Go to Applications and select Dialer

. a. Select Speed. b. Select Edit. c. Select an entry. Select Edit 3 4 Edit the entry. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 480 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around Opening applications Connecting Connecting your device to a mobile phone Contacts Using Quick Connect and Tap-to-Connect in Contacts to dial phone numbers Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Dialer or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. LifeDrive from palmOne 481 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information In this chapter Using the Send command Beaming Other ways of sharing information Related topics You have to get this memo to your bossnow. Or the photo of the grandkids in their Halloween costumes to your mom. After youve used your device to create or capture that important business and personal information, its time to share it with others. Your device comes equipped with a variety of options for sharing information, so that you can choose the quickest, most convenient way of sending your info. Benefits of sharing Keep others up-to-date with meaningful business and personal information Choose the most convenient sharing method from a variety of options Create an informal backup copy of important info LifeDrive from palmOne 482 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information

Before You Begin You must complete all the prerequisites for the messaging application. To use your devices built-

in Bluetooth wireless technology, you must set up a phone connection. To use it with your devices IR port, run Phone Link Updater, and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection. Did You Know?

You can also easily send information from the desktop component of many applications. For example, you can send photos from the palmOne Media desktop application. See the online desktop help for information. Tip If you are unable to send information to another device, try moving closer to the receiving device. LifeDrive from palmOne Using the Send command You can send information from within an applicationsuch as a photo or video, a contact, or an appointmentto other Palm OS device users. You can also send a category of information or even an entire application. You can use the Send command in many applications to send information wirelessly using one of the following methods:

Using the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology on your device As an attachment to an e-mail message As part of a text message Sending information from within an application using Bluetooth technology You can use your devices built-in Bluetooth technology to send information directly to another device that includes Bluetooth technology. You must be within range of the receiving device to send information using Bluetooth technology. The maximum range is approximately 2530 feet

(810 meters); however, the shorter the range, the more quickly and accurately you can send information. 483 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information 0 1 2 3 Select the information you want to send:

a. Open an application. b. Select the entry you want. Select a sending method:

a. Open the menus. b. Select the Send menu item in the leftmost menu. In most applications, the leftmost menu is named Record. c. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK. Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK. The information is sent to the receiving device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 484 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Tip Create a category of Calendar events such as your childs soccer schedule, and then send the entire category to your spouses device. Did You Know?

When you send a category, the individual entries within the category (contacts, memos, photos, and so on) appear as unfiled items on the receiving device. 0 Sending a category using Bluetooth technology 1 Select the category you want to send:

a. Open an application. b. From the list view, select the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the category you want. This takes you to the list view within the selected category. Send the category:

a. Open the menus. b. Select the Send Category menu item in the leftmost menu. c. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK. Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK. The information is sent to the receiving device. Done 2 3 LifeDrive from palmOne 485 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Did You Know?

You can send an application from an expansion card inserted into expansion slot. Tap the Send From pick list and select the expansion card. 0 Sending an application using Bluetooth technology 1 Select the application you want to send:

a. Go to Applications. b. Open the menus. c. Select Send on the App menu. d. Select the application you want to send. NOTE You cannot send an application that has a lock icon next to the application size. Send the application:

a. Select Send. b. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK. Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK. The information is sent to the receiving device. Done 2 3 LifeDrive from palmOne 486 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Using the Send command with the VersaMail application You can send information as an attachment to an email message using the Send command. Follow the procedures for sending information, a category, or an application. Select VersaMail in the Send With dialog box. The VersaMail application opens, displaying a blank message with the information you want to send as an attachment. Address the message, enter a subject line, and then select Send or Get & Send. Using the Send command with SMS NOTE You cannot send a category or an application with SMS. You can send information as part of a text message using the Send command. Follow the procedure for sending information. Select SMS in the Send With dialog box. The SMS application opens, displaying a new text message with the information you want to send as the body of the message. Address the message, and then select Send. LifeDrive from palmOne 487 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Tip For best results when beaming, the devices should be between 4 and 39 inches (10 centimeters and one meter) apart, and there should be a clear path between them. Tip Beaming works best for smaller items. If you have larger items, you can use Bluetooth wireless technology. Expansion cards are convenient for sharing very large items. Beaming Using the IR port on your device, you can beam information from within an application, such as a photo or video, a contact, an appointment, or a task, to other Palm Powered devices. You can also beam a category of information or even an entire application. NOTE The receiving device must be turned on. Depending on the receiving device model, not all information may be sent correctly. 0 Beaming information from within an application 1 Select the information you want to beam:

a. Open an application. b. Select the entry you want. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 488 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information 2 3 Beam the information:

a. Open the menus. b. Select the Beam menu item in the leftmost menu. The leftmost menu in most applications is named Record. c. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your devices IR port directly at the IR port of the other device. IR port Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 489 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Tip Create a category of Calendar events such as your meeting schedule, and then beam the entire category to your business partners device. Tip When you receive a beamed item, you can file the item in a category using the Receive dialog box. 0 Beaming a category 1 Select the category you want to beam:

a. Open an application. b. From the list view, select the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the category you want. This takes you to the list view within the selected category. Beam the category:

a. Open the menus. b. Select the Beam Category menu item in the leftmost menu. c. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your devices IR port directly at the IR port of the other device. IR port Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete. Done 2 3 LifeDrive from palmOne 490 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information 0 Beaming an application 1 Select the application you want to beam:

a. Go to Applications. b. Open the menus. c. Select Beam in the App menu. d. Select the location of the app from the Beam From pick list. e. Select the application you want to beam. NOTE You cannot beam an application that has a lock icon next to the application size. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 491 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information 2 3 Beam the application:

a. Select Beam. b. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your devices IR port directly at the IR port of the other device. IR port Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete. Done Other ways of sharing information Here are some other ways of sharing information:

Copy information or an application onto an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot, and view the information by inserting the card into the slot on another Palm Powered device. Copy information such as a photo or video from your device to your computer, or from your computer to your device by synchronizing. LifeDrive from palmOne 492 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with sharing information or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Synchronizing Sharing information by synchronizing your device with your computer Expansion Sharing information by saving it to an expansion card that can be viewed from another device Connecting Setting up a connection with a phone to share information wirelessly VersaMail Sending information as an attachment to an email message SMS Sending information as part of a text message Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about sharing information LifeDrive from palmOne 493 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses In this chapter Adding an expense Choosing currency options Deleting expenses Customizing the expense list Working with Expense on your computer Related topics Tired of trying to re-create your business trip when you return?

Expense makes it easy to keep track of what you paid for that dinner in New York with your new sales group. You can track costs for meals, lodging, transportation, entertainment, and more, and save all of the information in one convenient place. You can even transfer the information to a spreadsheet on your computer. Benefits of Expense Monitor your business and personal expenses Easily retrieve expense information Create expense reports faster LifeDrive from palmOne 494 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Did You Know?

Expense is not just for business. Use it to help plan your budget by figuring out how much you spend each month on things like entertainment and dining out. Tip Add an expense simply by writing the first letter of the expense type. For example, entering D opens a dinner item with todays date. To enable this feature on your device, open the Options menu and select Preferences. Check the automatic fill box. Tip Change the date of an expense by selecting the date of the item. 0 Adding an expense 1 2 Enter the expense:

Go to Applications and select Expense

. a. Select New. b. Enter the amount of the expense. c. Select the Expense type pick list and select a type. NOTE You must select an Expense type if you want to save the item. Expense type pick list Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 495 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Tip Add extra information to your expense items. Select the item and select Details. Then select Note and enter the information. Tip Select Lookup in the Attendees list to pull names from Contacts. Did You Know?

After you synchronize, you can send your expense information to a spreadsheet on your computer. 3 Enter the details of the expense:

a. Select Details. b. Select each field where you want to enter information, and enter it. Category Select a category to sort your expenses. Type Enter the expense type. Payment Select how you paid for the expense. Currency Select the currency used to pay the expense. You can preset this symbol. Vendor and City Enter the vendor and city associated with the expense. For example, a business lunch might be at Rosies Cafe in San Francisco. Attendees Enter the people associated with the expense. c. Select OK. Done Thats it. Your device automatically saves the expense. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. LifeDrive from palmOne 496 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Tip If you travel a lot, update the currency pick list, so that you can quickly get to the symbols you need. Did You Know?

Use separate categories for related expenses. For example, create a London category for a trip to London. After you file your expense report for the London trip, you can easily delete the related expenses with the Purge command. Choosing currency options Expense is even easier to use when you customize the currency list. You can choose what currencies appear in the pick list, and what symbol automatically appears in new expenses, and you can even create your own currency symbol. Customizing the currency pick list Place the currency symbols that you use most often in the currency pick list. 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select Expense

. Open the Receipt Details dialog box:

a. Select an expense item. b. Select Details. Select the currency symbol(s) that you want to see in the pick list:

a. Select the Currency pick list, and then select Edit currencies. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 497 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Tip If youre entering several expenses that all use the same currency, change the preset currency to that symbol to save time. When youre finished with those expenses, change it again to the next one youll use. Contd. b. Select one of the Currency pick lists and select the name of the country whose currency symbol you want to display. c. Select OK, and then select OK again. Currency pick list Done The expense list now displays the currencies you selected. Presetting the currency symbol Choose which currency symbols appear when you add a new expense. 0S 1 2 Go to Applications and select Expense

. Open Expense Preferences dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 498 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses 3 Choose the default currency:

a. Select the Default Currency pick list. b. Select the symbol you want to appear when you add new expenses. c. Select OK. 0 Done Creating a currency symbol If the currency you want to use is not in the pick list of countries, you can create your own symbol. 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select Expense

. Open the Custom Currencies dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Custom Currencies. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 499 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses 3 Create the custom symbol:

a. Select a Country box. b. Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want. c. Select OK, and then select OK again. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 500 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Deleting expenses Delete individual expenses, or an entire category of expenses at once. Go to Applications and select Expense

. 0 Deleting an individual expense 1 2 3 Delete the item:

Select the expense you want to delete. 4 5 a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete Item in the Record menu.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the expense on your computer. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 501 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Tip To combine expenses from different categories, rename one category to match the other categorys name. Did You Know?

There is another way to delete a category. Select the Category pick list and select Edit Categories. Select the Delete command to delete the selected category and move all of its entries to the Unfiled category. 0 Deleting an entire category of expenses 1 2 Go to Applications and select Expense Open the Purge Categories dialog box:

. a. Open the menus. b. Select Purge on the Record menu. 3 Delete the category and all of its items:

a. Select the category you want to delete. b. Select Purge. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 502 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Did You Know?

Customizing the expense list makes it easy to see how much you spent on each type of expense. For example, to see how much you spent on taxis, sort your expenses by type so that all your taxi expenses appear together in the list. Use categories to further refine your list. Customizing the expense list You can change the appearance of the expense list. 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select Expense

. Select Show. Select the pick lists to change any of the following items, and then select OK:

Sort by Sort expenses by date or type. Distance Show distance in miles or kilometers. Show currency Show or hide the currency symbol in the expense list. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 503 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Working with Expense on your computer WINDOWS ONLY Use Expense on your computer to view and manage the expenses you create on your device. Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Expense on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:

Adding, editing and deleting expense items Organizing your expenses by date, type, amount, notes, or category Viewing expense items as a list, large icons, or small icons Converting a list of expenses to a single currency Printing expense reports Transferring expense information to other applications, such as Microsoft Excel, using the Send or Export command in Palm Desktop software To open Expense on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Expense on the Launch bar. LifeDrive from palmOne 504 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Expense or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around Opening applications Using menus Entering Information Adding contacts to the attendees list with Lookup Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and ShortCuts Calculator Performing basic math calculations associated with your expenses Categories Creating and editing categories Organizing expenses by type and sorting them Customizing Setting number formats LifeDrive from palmOne 505 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations In this chapter Calculator buttons Viewing recent calculations Related topics Whether youre figuring the tip on a restaurant bill or balancing your checkbook, its always nice to have a calculator on hand. And because its part of your device, theres no need to carry a separate calculator. Benefits of Calculator Always have a calculator with you Store calculations for later use LifeDrive from palmOne 506 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations Tip Use the memory buttons to store and recall a number you enter in multiple calculations. Tip If you make a mistake entering a number in the middle of a calculation, use the CE button to re-enter the number without starting the calculation over. Tip Open the Options menu and select Advanced Mode to display a scientific calculator. Calculator buttons 0 Clear any value in the Calculator memory. Recall the stored value from the memory and enter it into the current calculation. Place the current number into memory. The current number is added to the total that is already in the memory. Tapping this button does not affect the current calculation; it just places the value in memory. Clear the last number you entered. Clear the entire calculation so that you can start over. Enter a number, and then select this button to change it to a percentage. Enter a number, and then select this button to calculate the square root of the number. Enter a number, and then select this button to make it negative. LifeDrive from palmOne 507 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations Did You Know?

Viewing recent calculations is helpful when double-checking the math in your checkbook register. Did You Know?

Calculator History also has these functions:

Clear Select to clear the calculators history. Copy Select to copy the history of calculations. Then paste them into another application by opening the Edit menu and selecting Paste in the other application. Viewing recent calculations View recent calculations to confirm that you entered everything correctly. 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select Calculator

. Open the History dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Edit, and then select Show History. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 508 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations Accessing different calculators Do you need a scientific or financial calculator? Your calculator has a variety of modes that can help you calculate formulas in a number of different areas. 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select Calculator

. Access the advanced mode calculators:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Advanced Mode. You can now use the scientific calculator. c. If you want to use other calculators, such as finance, logic, statistics, or area, open the menus, select Options, and then select a mode from the list. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 509 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations Related topics Click the links below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around Opening applications Using menus Entering Information Entering numbers with Graffiti 2 characters Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with Calculator or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. LifeDrive from palmOne 510 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private You probably wouldnt leave your door unlocked at night, so why should it be any different with your device? When you think about the amount of personal and private information stored there, youll definitely want to protect it. In this chapter Choosing a security level Marking information as private Setting the level of privacy Using a password Locking your device Using Quick Unlock Encrypting your information Limiting the number of password attempts Related topics Benefits of privacy Protect information if your device is misplaced Hide private information Unlock your device using only one hand LifeDrive from palmOne 511 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Choosing a security level There are a variety of security levels available for your device. Choose the level that provides the best mix of security and convenience. Activating no security features All entries are accessible to anyone who has your device. This includes entries that are marked private but are not masked or hidden. Masking private entries without creating a password Masked entries are displayed when selected. This provides some degree of privacy for private entries, but anyone can view the info by simply selecting it. Hiding private entries and creating a password Private entries are displayed when the password is entered. This is the basic level of security. Encrypting entries (requires assigning a password) Entries are scrambled whenever your device locks, and are only displayed when the password is entered. Choose to encrypt all information, or just private entries. This feature provides better security than hiding private entries and assigning a password. Limiting the number of password attempts Selected information is deleted after a specified number of incorrect password attempts. Use this feature along with encryption for the highest level of security. LifeDrive from palmOne 512 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Marking information as private Marking an entry as private is the first step in protecting your info. 0 1 2 3 Open an application. Create a new entry, or select the entry that you want to make private. Mark it as private:

a. For existing Contacts, select Edit. b. Select Details. c. Check the Private box. d. Select OK. e. In Contacts and Memos, select Done. Done Private box LifeDrive from palmOne 513 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Tip You can also set the level of privacy from within certain applications. Open the Options menu, select Security, and then select the level of privacy from the Privacy pick list. Setting the level of privacy Add further protection to your private entries by setting the privacy level (hidden/masked). 0 Hiding or masking private entries 1 Open Security:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Security. 2 Select the display option for private entries:

a. Select the Private Records pick list. b. Select one of these options, and then select Done. Show Display private entries. Mask Block entries with a gray bar; you can see the bar onscreen, but you cant see the entries content. Hide Make private entries invisible. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 514 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Tip Use a password to protect confidential work or personal information. If your device is lost or stolen, this information will be safe. Contd. Masked entry Done Viewing an entry that is masked To open a masked entry, select the entry. If you have a password, enter it in the Show Private Records dialog box, and then select OK. When you close a masked entry, it remains masked. Using a password Further protect your hidden or masked entries by creating a password, which is needed to display the contents of hidden/masked entries. LifeDrive from palmOne 515 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Tip The best passwords consist of a mix of letters, characters, and numbers. Longer passwords are better than short ones. Any password you create is case-sensitive. 0 Creating a password 1 Open Security:

Password box 2 a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Security. Create a password:

a. Select the Password box. b. Enter a password with Graffiti 2 writing, the numeric keypad, or the onscreen keyboard. c. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 516 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Tip In Palm Desktop software, you can require password entry for private info to display. Open the Tools menu and select Options, and then select Security. 3 4 Confirm the password and enter a hint:

a. Enter the password again, and then select OK. b. Enter a hint to help you remember the password if you forget it, and then select Done. Select Done. Done Changing a password You can change your password at any time. You must enter the current password before you can change it. 0 1 Open Security:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Security. Continued Password box LifeDrive from palmOne 517 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 2 3 4 5 Enter your current password:

a. Select the Password box. b. Enter the current password, and then select OK. Change your password:

a. Select OK. b. Enter a new password, and then select OK. Confirm the password and enter a hint:

a. Enter the password again, and then select OK. b. Enter a hint to help you remember the password if you forget it, and then select Done. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 518 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Deleting a password You can delete your password at any time. You must enter the current password before you can delete it. 0 1 2 Enter your password:

a. Select the Password box. b. Enter the current password, and then select OK. Delete your password:

a. Select Unassign. b. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 519 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Deleting a forgotten password If you forget your password, your device displays the password hint (if you entered one) to help you remember the password. If you still cant remember the password, you can delete it from your device. Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries marked as private. IMPORTANT

Be sure to synchronize your device with your computer before and after this procedure, so you can restore any private entries that were deleted along with the password. Password box 0 1 2 Open Security:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Security. Open the Incorrect Password dialog box:

a. Select the Password box. b. Tap any number on the keypad, and then select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 520 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 3 4 5 Delete the forgotten password:

a. Select Lost Password. b. Select Delete Password. Synchronize your device with your computer to restore any private entries that were deleted.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Create a new password. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 521 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private

Before You Begin To use the locking feature, you must first create a password for your device. Tip To start your device when it is locked, turn it on. Enter your password, and then select Done. Locking your device Protect the entire contents of your device, whether marked private or not, by using your password to lock your device. You can set your device to lock automatically, or you can lock it manually. IMPORTANT

If you lock your device, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If you forget the password, your device will show you the hint you entered to help you remember the password. If you still cannot remember the password, you must do a hard reset to resume using your device. A hard reset deletes all of the information on your device, including your password. You can restore the information by synchronizing your device with your computer. 0 Locking your device automatically 1 Open Security:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Security. Auto Lock box 2 Open the Lock Device dialog box:

a. Select the Auto Lock box. b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 522 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 3 4 Select one of these lock options:

Never Always leave your device unlocked. When power is off Automatically lock your device whenever you turn it off. At a preset time Set a time when your device will automatically lock. After a preset delay Set a period of inactivity after which your device will automatically lock. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 523 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 0 Locking your device manually 1 Open Security:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Security. 2 3 Select Lock. Select Lock Device. Done Lock LifeDrive from palmOne 524 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private

Before You Begin To use Quick Unlock, you must first create a password for your device. Tip You can change a Quick Unlock combination at any time. Follow the same steps you used to create the combination. Using Quick Unlock You can unlock your device by creating a special combination sequence with the 5-way navigatorsimilar to the combination you use to open a padlock. Use this sequence in place of your password to quickly unlock your device. Quick Unlock works only with your first three attempts to unlock your device. After three attempts, you must use your password to unlock your device. 0 Creating a Quick Unlock combination 1 Open Security:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Security. Quick Unlock box 2 Open the Quick Unlock dialog box:

a. Select the Quick Unlock box. b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 525 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 3 4 Create a Quick Unlock combination sequence:

a. Use the 5-way or tap the onscreen navigator to create a combination. For example, you might choose Left-Right-Left as a combination. b. Select OK. Select Done. Done When your device is locked, you can now unlock it by using the Quick Unlock combination, or by entering your password. LifeDrive from palmOne 526 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 0 Deleting your Quick Unlock combination 1 Open Security:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Security. Quick Unlock box 2 3 Open the Quick Unlock dialog box:

a. Select the Quick Unlock box. b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK. Delete the Quick Unlock combination:

a. Select Unassign. b. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 527 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private

Before You Begin To use encryption, you must first create a password for your device. Encrypting your information You can encrypt selected information whenever your device locks. This means that your information is scrambled so that it cannot be read. When you unlock your device and enter your password or Quick Unlock combination, the encrypted information is unscrambled. The more information you select for encryption, the longer your device takes to scramble (and unscramble) the information. Also, applications that use large files, such as palmOne Media, take a long time to encrypt. In these cases, consider the trade-off between security and convenience. 0 1 Open Security:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Security. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 528 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 2 3 Open the Encrypt Data dialog box:

a. Select Options. b. Check the Encrypt data when locked box. c. Select Choose Applications. Select the applications you want to encrypt, and then select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 529 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Tip Synchronize your device with your computer frequently to prevent loss of information if intrusion protection is triggered. Did You Know?

Incorrect Quick Unlock attempts are not included in the intrusion protection counter. 4 5

[ & ] OPTIONAL To encrypt only the private entries in the applications you selected, check the Encrypt private records only box. Select OK, and then select Done. Done Limiting the number of password attempts You can set the number of incorrect password attempts that are allowed before selected information is deleted from your device. This feature, called intrusion protection, protects sensitive information from an intruder who uses an automated means to try every possible combination until the password is found. Use intrusion protection if you keep highly confidential information on your device. IMPORTANT

accidental password attempts while your device is in a purse or pocket. If you limit the number of password attempts, be sure to use Keylock to prevent LifeDrive from palmOne 530 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 0 1 2 Open Security:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Security. Set the number of password attempts:

a. Select Options. b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK. c. Select the Intrusion Protection box. d. Enter the number of password attempts that are allowed before selected information on your device is deleted. Continued Intrusion Protection box LifeDrive from palmOne 531 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Tip The number of password attempts must be between 5 and 99. 3 Select the information that is deleted after the set number of failed attempts:

a. Select the Delete pick list and select one of these options:

No Data No information is deleted after the set number of failed attempts. Private Records All entries marked private are deleted after the set number of failed attempts. All Data All information you entered and all applications you installed on your device are deleted after the set number of failed attempts. b. Select OK. 4 Select OK two more times, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 532 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with private entries or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around Opening applications Using menus Managing Info Creating a backup of your information Customizing Entering your owner information in case your device is lost or stolen Maintaining Doing a hard reset Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about privacy LifeDrive from palmOne 533 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information In this chapter Adding a category Renaming a category Deleting a category Placing information in a category Viewing information by category Related topics If youre like most people, you use your device to manage your work life and your personal life. Yet these two areas contain so many details: your childrens after-school activities, your conference schedule, your shopping list for the week, and entertainment. Categories help you organize different aspects of your life, no matter how you choose to group them. Benefits of categories Better organize your information Easily retrieve the information you need LifeDrive from palmOne 534 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Did You Know?

You can have up to 15 categories in an application. Tip Colors make it easy to find the info you need in Calendar. Tip Add a category in Contacts that contains all of your medical numbers for quick access. Other useful categories in Contacts are Emergency, for fire, ambulance, and police; Children, for your childrens school and friends; and Entertainment, for restaurants or theaters that you visit often. Adding a category You can add categories in many applications: Contacts, Expense, Memos, Note Pad, Tasks, and palmOne Media. (In palmOne Media, categories are called albums.) Place individual entries in these categories to easily get to a group of related items. In addition to putting individual entries into a category, you can also put entire applications into categories. For instance, you may find it convenient to put Expense and Calculator into a category called Money. 0 1 2 To add a category for individual entries in one of the applications above, open that application. To add a category for applications, go to Applications. Add a new category:

a. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select Edit Categories. b. Select New and enter the name of the new category. c. Select OK, and then select OK again. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 535 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tip If you want to combine items in different categories, rename one category to the other category name. Did You Know?

Some categories, like All and Unfiled, come with your device and cannot be changed. Renaming a category 0 1 2 To rename a category within an application, open that application. To rename a category for applications, go to Applications. Rename the category:

a. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select Edit Categories. b. Select the name of the category you want to change, and then select Rename. c. Enter a new category name, and then select OK. d. Select OK again. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 536 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tip In Expense, you can delete a category, including its contents, with the Purge command. Deleting a category If you delete a category, the items in that category will move to the Unfiled category. 0 1 2 To delete a category within an application, open that application. To delete a category for applications, go to Applications. Delete the category:

a. In Calendar, select an event, and then select Details. b. Open the list of categories:

Calendar Select the Category pick list. All other applications Select the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select Edit Categories. c. Select the name of the category you want to delete, and then select Delete. d. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 537 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tip You can also enter new information into a category by opening the application, and then selecting the category from the upper-right corner. Select New and enter the information. Placing information in a category You can place individual entries into categories within an application. For example, you may want to place some of your contacts in a category called Medical. You may also find it convenient to view applications in groups. You may want all of your games in one category, or all of your multimedia applications in another. Then you can go right to the group of applications you need. NOTE An entry or application cannot be placed in more than one category. 0 Placing an entry in a category 1 Open an application that contains a category option. In Calendar, go to Day View. 2 3 4 Open an entry. In Note Pad only: skip to step 5. Open the Details dialog box:

Contacts Select Edit, and then select Details. All other applications Select Details. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 538 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tip To place an entry in a different category, simply select a different category from the Category pick list. 5 Place the entry in a category:

a. Select a category from the Category pick list. Category b. If necessary, select OK. c. If necessary, select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 539 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information 0 Placing an application in a category 1 2 Open the Category dialog box:

Go to Applications. 3 a. Open the menus. b. Select Category in the App menu. Place the application in a category:

a. Select the pick list next to the application you want to place in a category. b. Select a category, and then select Done. Done FPO LifeDrive from palmOne 540 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tip In Applications view, scroll through the categories by pressing Right or Left on the 5-way navigator. To view all of the applications on your device, select the All category. Tip Scroll through the categories in Contacts by repeatedly pressing the Contacts button. Viewing information by category 0 1 2 To view entries by category, open an application that contains categories. To view applications by category, go to Applications. Display the category you want to view:

Calendar Select Show Category List, and then select the category you want to view from the pick list. All other applications Select the category you want to view from the pick list in the upper-right corner. Pick list Done LifeDrive from palmOne 541 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with categories or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around Opening applications Calendar Media Sharing Using menus Color-coding your events in Calendar Organizing photos or videos into albums Beaming a category to another Palm Powered device LifeDrive from palmOne 542 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Forget your watch? Or just forget to reset it when you landed in Toronto?

Neither matters, as long as you have your device. Not only can you rely on it for the correct time, but you can even set an alarm so you dont miss that early flight back home. In this chapter Checking the current date and time Setting the primary location Choosing secondary locations for other time zones Modifying the locations list Setting the alarm clock Changing the clock display Related topics Benefits of World Clock Always have the correct time, no matter where you are No need to carry a separate alarm clock LifeDrive from palmOne 543 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Key Term Primary location Typically a city in the time zone in which you live. Checking the current date and time You can easily check the current date and time by going to Applications and selecting World Clock to display the date and time. Setting the primary location In World Clock, you can set the location, date, and time for a primary location. The settings for this primary location are used by all of the applications on your device. 0. 1 2 Go to Applications and select World Clock

. Primary location pick list Select the primary location:

a. Select the primary location pick list. b. Select the location you want to be the primary location. If you need more choices, modify the locations list. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 544 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Did You Know?

When the Daylight Savings settings are active, the time changes according to the rule for the primary location. For example, in North America, the time changes at 2:00 a.m.; in Europe, it changes at 1:00 a.m. Setting the date and time for the primary location You can set the date and time in Preferences, as you did during the initial setup of your device, or in World Clock. When you change the date and time in one application, it is automatically changed in the other. 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select World Clock

. Select Set Date & Time. Set the date:

a. Select the Set Date box. b. Select the arrows to select the current year. c. Select the current month. d. Select the current day. Continued Year Month Day LifeDrive from palmOne 545 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings 4 5 Hour Minute Set the time:

a. Select the Set Time box. b. Select the hour and minute boxes, and then select the arrows to change them. c. Select AM or PM, and then select OK. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 546 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Tip If you have friends, family, or colleagues in another time zone, select a city in their zone as your secondary location. When you need to contact them, you can easily check to see what time it is where they are. Choosing secondary locations for other time zones Set World Clock to display the date and time for two other locations. 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select World Clock

. Select the pick list next to one of the secondary locations. Pick list Select the location you want to use as the new secondary location. If you need more choices, modify the locations list. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 547 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Tip If you know what youre looking for in a long pick list, use Graffiti 2 writing to find it faster. Enter the first letter of the word, and then locate your item. Modifying the locations list You can edit the locations list so that the locations you use most often are easy to find. 0 Adding new locations 1 2 Open the Edit List dialog box:

Go to Applications and select World Clock

. 3 a. Select a location pick list. b. Select Edit List. Add the new location:

a. Select Add. b. Scroll through the list to select a location that is in the same time zone as the city you want to add. c. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 548 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings 4 5

[ & ] OPTIONAL Select each setting you want to change. Name Enter the name of the location. Time Zone Select the time zone for the location. Daylight Saving Time Check for your device to automatically adjust the date and time for Daylight Saving Time in this location. Start and End dates Select the boxes to change the start and end dates of Daylight Saving Time, if necessary. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 549 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings 0 Deleting a location 1 2 Select the location you want to delete:

Go to Applications and select World Clock

. a. Select a location pick list. b. Select Edit List. c. Select a location, and then select Remove. 3 Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 550 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Did You Know?

Use World Clock to set an alarm within the next 24 hours. Set alarms outside of this timeframe in Calendar. Did You Know?

Remember to put your device on local time. If you travel from San Francisco to London, make London your primary location so that all your alarms ring on time, instead of eight hours late. Tip Set an alarm while youre working to remind you when to leave to get to your appointment on time. 0 Setting the alarm clock 1 2 Set the alarm:

Go to Applications and select World Clock

. a. Select the Alarm box. b. Select the time columns to set the hour and minute, and then select OK. NOTE Alarms set in World Clock use the time set for the primary location. Alarm box Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 551 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Tip To turn off an alarm before it sounds, select the Alarm box, and then select Alarm Off. 3

[ & ] OPTIONAL Select the alarm sound and volume:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Alarm Preferences. c. Select the pick lists to select the alarm sound and volume. NOTE This volume setting does not affect the other sounds on your device, including the alarms you set in Calendar. You can change the volume of these other sounds in Preferences. d. Select OK. Done Responding to the alarm clock When the World Clock alarm sounds, select one of these three options:

OK Cancel the reminder message and return to the current screen. Snooze Close the alarm reminder message and return to the current screen. The message appears again in five minutes. In the meantime, an indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen to remind you of the upcoming alarm. Go To Cancel the reminder message and open World Clock. LifeDrive from palmOne 552 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings 0 Changing the clock display 1 2 Open the Display Options dialog box:

Go to Applications and select World Clock

. a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Display Options. 3 Select any of the following options, and then select OK:

Show Multiple Locations Display the secondary locations. Deselect it to display only the primary location. Show Date Display the date in World Clock. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 553 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with World Clock or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Moving Around Opening applications Using menus Calendar Setting an alarm outside of the next 24 hours Customizing Changing the volume of other system sounds LifeDrive from palmOne 554 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Although customizing your device is optional, its like changing the preset radio stations in your car. Since youre probably not driving around with the dealers preset radio stations, why not personalize your device, too?

You can easily customize the sound levels, fonts, and screen colors on your device by using preferences and menus. Or customize the Star button to open your most important application with one press. Preference settings can even help extend the life of your devices battery. In this chapter Customizing Favorites View Customizing Applications View Making the screen easier to read Assigning a button to your frequently used applications Setting the date and time Customizing the way you enter information Selecting sound settings Entering your owner information Conserving battery power Connecting your device to other devices Customizing network settings Setting up a VPN Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Benefits of customizing Access applications quickly Conserve power Enjoy your device more Make your screen easy to read 555 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Customizing Favorites View You can personalize Favorites View by changing the background image to your favorite photo. You can also change the entries to those you use most often. Changing the background photo in Favorites View Use your favorite photo as the background in Favorites View. 0 1 2 3 Go to Favorites. Open the Display Options dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Display Options. Select a photo for the background:

a. Check the Background box. b. Select the picture box. c. Select a picture. d. Select Done. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 556 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Did You Know?

You can move a favorite to a different location on the Favorites list by opening the Favorite menu and then selecting Rearrange Favorites. Drag the favorite you want to the new location. Tip You can also tap and hold on the favorite you want to change. 4 Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo, and select OK. Done Changing entries in Favorites Change the entries in Favorites View to include the applications, files, folders, or web links you use most often. 0 1 2 Go to Favorites. Open the Edit Favorites dialog box:

a. Using the 5-way, highlight the favorite you want to change. b. Tap Menu on the status bar. c. Select Edit Favorites. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 557 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 3 Change the favorite:

a. Select the favorite type from the Type pick list: application, file/folder, or web link. b. Select the application from the Original pick list, select to browse to the file or folder, or select to enter the web address you want. c. Enter a name for your new favorite and select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 558 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Customizing Applications View Use your favorite photo as the background in Applications View. You can also display your application icons in list format with small icons so that you can see more applications without scrolling. 0 1 2 3 4 Go to Applications. Open the Display Options dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Display Options. Select the View By pick list and select List or Icon as the display format. If you want the last category you viewed to reappear the next time you go to Applications, check the Remember Last Category box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 559 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 5 Select a photo for the background:

a. Check the Background box. b. Select the picture box. c. Select a picture. d. Select Done. e. Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo. f. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 560 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Making the screen easier to read In many applications, you can change the font style to make text easier to read. There are four font styles available. In certain lighting conditions, you may also need to adjust the brightness to read the information on the screen. Changing the screen fonts Small font Large font Small bold font Large bold font LifeDrive from palmOne 561 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 0 1 2 3 Open an application. Open the Select Font dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Font. Select the font style you want to use, and then select OK. Small Done Small bold Large bold Large LifeDrive from palmOne 562 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 0 Adjusting the brightness 1 2 Tap System Info Drag the slider to adjust the brightness level, and then tap outside the dialog box. on the status bar. Done Brightness slider LifeDrive from palmOne 563 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Changing screen colors Choose a new set of text and background colors for all your applications. 0 1 2 Open Color Theme Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Color Theme. Select a theme, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 564 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Changing handedness orientation of the screen The Handedness preferences enable you to select right-hand or left-hand orientation when you rotate the screen into landscape mode. 0 1 2 Open Handedness Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Handedness. Select your orientation, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 565 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip To restore all the buttons to the original palmOne settings, select Default. Did You Know?

You can assign input area icons to different applications also. Tap and hold the input area icon and select an application from the dialog box. Assigning a button to your frequently used applications Tired of going to Applications View to open an application you use frequently? Use the Buttons Preferences screen to reassign the applications associated with the buttons on the front of your device and the sync button. Customize the Star button so that it opens your most important application, and then reassign the other buttons as needed. For example, if you use Documents often, you can assign Documents to a button so that you dont have to scroll through Applications View whenever you want to use that application. 0 1 2 Open Buttons Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Buttons. Select pick list Select the pick list next to the button you want to reassign, and select the application that you want to assign to that button. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 566 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Key Term Full-screen pen stroke A stroke that is drawn from the bottom of the input area to the top of the screen. You can use this stroke as a quick way to do a selected task, such as opening the Graffiti 2 help screen. Tip If you have purchased an external modem accessory (sold separately), you can also assign the sync button on the modem by selecting the second pick list. 3 4 5 Assign the full-screen pen stroke:

a. Select More. b. Select the pick list and select the action you want to assign to the full-screen pen stroke. c. Select OK. Assign the sync button:

a. Select HotSync. b. Select the pick list next to the icon labeled Cradle and select the application you want to assign to the button. c. Select OK. Select Done. Done Pick list LifeDrive from palmOne 567 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Did You Know?

The location you select also appears as the primary location in World Clock. Setting the date and time You can set the date, time, and location for all the applications on your device that require this information. You can also select the format in which the date, time, and numbers appear. Selecting a location You can set the current date and time based on your location. When you travel to a new time zone, change the Location setting to quickly reset the date and time. Your appointments stay at the time you entered themno adjustments for time zones. So always enter your schedule based on the time zone you will be in on the day of the event. 0. 1 Open Date & Time Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Date & Time. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 568 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip You can rename the location to the city where you live. Select the Name field, and then modify the location name. 2 3 Name field Select the location:

a. Select the Location pick list, and select a city in your time zone. If you found a city in the list, go to step 3. No nearby city? Select Edit List, and do steps b through e. b. Select Add. c. Select a city in your time zone, and then select OK. d. Select OK again, and then select Done. e. Select the Location pick list, and select the city you just added. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 569 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Resetting the date and time In most cases you wont need to reset the date and time. However, you may need to do this if you do a hard reset on your device. 0 1 2 Open Date & Time Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Date & Time. Select the location. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 570 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Year arrows 3 4 5 Set the date:

a. Select the Set Date box. b. Select the arrows to select the current year. c. Select the current month. d. Select the current date. Set the time:

a. Select the Set Time box. b. Select the hour and minute boxes, and then select the arrows to change them. c. Select AM or PM, and then select OK. NOTE If youre using a 24-hour clock format, you wont see the AM and PM options. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 571 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Selecting formats for dates, times, and numbers Would you rather see the time displayed in a 24-hour format, or dates that begin with the month or year? Use the Formats Preferences screen to change these settings and to apply them to all the applications on your device. You can quickly choose the preset formats based on geographic regions where you might use your device. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is expressed using a 24-hour clock. In the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or PM suffix. You can use the original preset formats or change them based on your personal preferences. 0 1 Open Formats Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Formats. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 572 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip The country setting changes only the way the date and time look. It doesnt change your devices time to that countrys time. To do that, go to Date & Time Preferences or to World Clock. 2 3 4 Select a country:

a. Select the Preset to box to open the Set Country dialog box. b. Select a country. c. Select OK.

[ & ] OPTIONAL Customize any of the following preset formats:

Time Controls whether the time is displayed in 12-hour or 24-hour format and which symbol separates the numbers. Date Controls the sequence in which the day, month, and year appear and which symbol separates the segments. Week starts Controls whether applications treat Sunday or Monday as the first day of the week. Numbers Controls the decimal and thousands separator symbols. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 573 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Did You Know?

You can change the input area anytime by tapping Input on the status bar. Customizing the way you enter information Your device lets you choose how you enter information. You can choose the input area or the writing area, choose Graffiti 2 strokes, and create shortcuts to make entering information faster. Customizing the input area You can configure your input area with preferences for keyboards or for Graffiti 2 writing. You can also choose to see your strokes as you write. 0 1 2 Open Input Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Input. Select the type of input area you want:

Keyboard Wide Classic Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 574 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip Right after you write a character, your device interprets a quick tap on the screen as a period character. If you want to tap a button, either wait a few seconds or tap the Full-screen writing icon on the status bar. 3

[ & ] OPTIONAL Uncheck the Show Graffiti Strokes box if you dont want to have the Graffiti strokes shown as you write a character in the input area. Done Customizing Graffiti 2 strokes There is more than one way to write certain Graffiti 2 characters. Use the Graffiti 2 Preferences screen to select an alternate stroke shape for these characters. 0 1 Open Graffiti 2 Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Graffiti 2. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 575 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 3 Select alternate strokes:

a. Tap a character to view its alternate stroke. b. Check the box to use the alternate stroke, and then select Done. Repeat step 2 for each stroke you want to reassign, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 576 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip You may want to add a space character after the last word in your ShortCut text. This way, a space automatically follows the ShortCut text. Tip To learn how to use ShortCuts while entering information, see Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts. Did You Know?

Your ShortCuts are backed up on your computer when you synchronize. Setting up ShortCuts Are you looking for a quicker way to enter information on your device? Use ShortCuts to define abbreviations for any words, letters, or numbers that you enter often. You can use your ShortCuts anywhere you enter info with Graffiti 2 writing. 0 1 Open ShortCuts Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select ShortCuts. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 577 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip The ShortCut Text can be 45 characters long. Thats long enough for a name whose spelling you always forget or a complex email address. 2 Create a ShortCut:

a. Select New. b. On the ShortCut Name line, enter the abbreviation. c. On the ShortCut Text line(s), enter the text you want to insert when you write the abbreviation. d. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 578 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip To delete a ShortCut, open ShortCuts Preferences and select the ShortCut. Select Delete, select Yes, and then select Done. Changing ShortCuts After you create a ShortCut, you can modify it at any time. 0 1 2 Open ShortCuts Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Shortcuts. Edit the ShortCut:

a. Select the ShortCut you want to change. b. Select Edit. c. Make your changes. d. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 579 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Key Term Touchscreen Another name for your devices screen and the internal circuitry that enables it to respond appropriately to taps. Tip If your screen is not responding to taps, use the 5-way navigator to open Touchscreen Preferences. Key Term Calibration The process of aligning your devices touch-sensitive screen so that when you tap an element on the screen, your device detects exactly what you want it to do. Correcting problems with tapping Is your screen not responding to taps? Are you getting unexpected results when you tap? For example, when you tap the number keyboard icon, does the Bluetooth dialog box open instead?

If this happens, its time to align the screen. 0 1 2 Open Touchscreen Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Touchscreen. Tap the targets on the screen as precisely as possible, and then select Done. You need to tap at least three targetsmaybe more if you dont tap NOTE carefully. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 580 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip You can choose different types of sounds for Calendar, Tasks, and World Clock. Go to the application, open the Options menu, and then select Preferences. Did You Know?

When you connect headphones to your device, the external speaker is automatically silenced, the Sounds &

Alerts settings are maintained, and all volume levels are automatically adjusted for use with headphones. Selecting sound settings Are sounds too soft or too loud? Set the volume levels for the system, game, and alarm tones, or turn sounds off altogether with the Silent profile. Profile boxes Open Sounds & Alerts Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Sounds & Alerts. Select Custom, Silent, or All Off. If you selected Silent or All Off in step 2, select Done. If you selected Custom in step 2, select the System Sound, Game Sound, Alarm Sound, and Alarm LED pick lists and select the volume level for each sound;

then select Done. Done 0 1 2 3 0 LifeDrive from palmOne 581 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip In addition to entering owner information, you can assign a name to your device for Bluetooth communication. Did You Know?

If you use Security Preferences to turn off and lock your device with a password, your owner info appears when you select the Owner button the next time you turn on your device. Tip If you assigned a password in Security Preferences, you must select Unlock and enter your password to change your owner info. Entering your owner information Its a good idea to enter information that could help someone contact you if you ever lose your device (if theres enough battery power to turn it on). By default, the Owner Preferences screen contains the information you entered when you installed the software installation CD and set up your device, but you can update or add to this information. Owner information does not include your username or passwords. 0 1 2 Open Owner Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Owner. Modify or enter the text, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 582 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip You can also save battery power by turning Keylock on to prevent your device from turning on accidentally. Conserving battery power You can save battery power by adjusting the Power Preferences settings. NOTE The memory on your device is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained to the point that you cannot turn on your device. When you recharge your device, all of your existing information in program memory and on the drive reappears. Selecting power-saving settings The Power Preferences screen enables you to set power consumption options. 0 1 Open Power Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Power. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 583 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 Select the pick lists to change any of the following settings, and then select Done. Auto-off after Select how quickly your device automatically turns off after a period of inactivity: 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. On while charging Select whether your device stays on continuously when it is connected to the AC charger. When this option is off, you can still turn on your device to view your info while your device charges, but it turns off automatically after a period of inactivity. Beam Receive Select whether you can receive beamed information on your device. Turn this setting on to receive beamed info, or turn it off to prevent receiving beamed info. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 584 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip You can use your devices built-in Bluetooth wireless technology to connect to other devices without using Connection Preferences. Key Term ISP Acronym for Internet service provider. This is the service you use to connect to the Internet, such as AOL, CompuServe, or Earthlink. Did You Know?

You cannot rename or delete the preset connection settings. Connecting your device to other devices Connection Preferences let you connect your device to other devices. You can use preset connection settings, modify the preset settings, or create your own connection settings from scratch. The list of preset connections varies depending on the applications youve added to your device. For example, you can create a connection between the IR port of your device and a modem so that you can dial in to your ISP or corporate network. The modem can be attached to or within a mobile phone or other device containing an IR port. (Some infrared phones can act as modems. To set up a phone connection, you must have a GSM or GPRS mobile phone enabled with data services and a driver for your phone. Check www.palmOne.com for available phone drivers or contact the phone manufacturer.) Changing the preset connection settings The following steps show you how to adjust the communication speed in the preset IR to a PC/Device connection setting. You can similarly edit other connections or settings. 0 1 Open Connection Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Connection. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 585 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 3 Open the Edit Connection dialog box:

a. Select the IR to PC/device connection. b. Select Edit. Change the speed setting:

a. Select Details. b. Select the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed. c. Select OK. d. Select OK again, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 586 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip To delete a connection that you created, select it on the Connection Preferences screen, and then select Delete. Creating your own connection settings If none of the preset connection settings are close to what you need, or if youre already using all the connections as they are, you can create a new connection. 0 1 2 Open Connection Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Connection. From the Connection Preferences screen, select New. LifeDrive from palmOne 587 Continued SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip You can also customize Bluetooth connection settings. 3 Enter the basic settings:

Name Enter a name for your connection settings. This name will appear on the Connection Preferences screen so that you can select your connection later. Connect to Select the type of device you want to connect to: PC, Modem, or Local Area Network. Via Select the method you want to use to connect to the device you selected:

Bluetooththe Bluetooth radio on your device; Cradle/Cablethe USB sync cable that came with your device; Infraredthe IR port on your device. NOTE The Dialing and Volume settings wont appear unless you select Modem as the Connect to setting. Dialing Select whether your modem uses TouchTone or Rotary dialing. Volume Select the volume level for your modems speaker: Off, Low, Medium, or High. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 588 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 4 5 Enter the details settings:

a. Select Details. b. Select the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed. c. Select the Flow Ctl pick list and select whether the connection uses flow control:

Automatic Your device determines when to use flow control. On Flow control is always on. Off Flow control is always off. d. For a modem connection, enter the initialization string. e. Select OK. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 589 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip If your phone doesnt appear on the list, you need to install the phone settings for your phone onto your device. Connecting your device to a mobile phone Phone Preferences let you configure your device to exchange messages and dial phone numbers when your device is connected to a GSM mobile phone (sold separately). The GSM mobile phone account must also include data services. 0 1 2 Open Phone Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Phone. Select the connection:

a. Select the Connection pick list and select your mobile phone from the list. b. Select Test to make sure the settings work with your phone. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 590 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device

Before You Begin You need the following:

A mobile phone with a Bluetooth radio or an IR port (sold separately) A wireless service provider account that includes high-speed data services or that supports dial-up connections

(additional fees may apply) An ISP account or a corporate remote access account (additional fees may apply) Connection Preferences settings for your mobile phone enabled with IR or Bluetooth wireless technology Customizing network settings Your device includes software that lets you connect your device to your Internet service provider

(ISP) or to a dial-in (remote access) server using a mobile phone. After you configure your network settings, you can establish a connection either by using the menus from the Network Preferences screen or by using a third-party application. Setting up a service profile Service profiles store the network settings for your ISP or dial-in server. You can create, save, and reuse service profiles. You can create additional service profiles from scratch or by duplicating an existing profile and editing the information. 0 1 Open Network Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Network. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 591 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip Instead of creating a new profile, you can copy an existing profile and change the settings. Select the profile you want to copy, and then open the Service menu and select Duplicate. Did You Know?

Most dial-in servers do not accept spaces in the username. Tip If youre concerned about security, dont enter a password. Just leave the word Prompt in the Password box and your device will ask you to enter a password each time you log in. 2 Enter the basic settings:

Service Select the Service pick list and select your ISP or your dial-in server type from the list. If your ISP or server type isnt on the list, select New and enter a name for the service profile. User Name Enter your username. This is the part of your email address thats before the @ sign and its the name that you use when you log in to your ISP or your dial-in server. This field can contain multiple lines of text, but only two lines appear onscreen. Password Enter the password you use to log in to your ISP or dial-in server, and then select OK. The word Assigned appears in this box and you dont need to enter a password when you log in. Connection Select the Connection pick list and select the method you want to use to connect to your ISP or to a dial-in server. See Connecting your device to other devices for info on creating and configuring connection settings. 3 If youre using a phone or modem connection, enter the phone settings:

a. Select the Phone box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 592 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip Its a good idea to add at least three commas before your calling card number to allow for the cue delay. Each comma delays transmission of your calling card number for two seconds. Contd. b. Enter any of the following settings, and then select OK:

Phone # Enter the phone number for your ISP or dial-in server. Dial prefix Check the Dial prefix box, and then enter the number that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside line. For example, many offices require that you first dial 9 to dial a number outside the building. Disable call waiting If your phone has Call Waiting, check the Disable call waiting box, and then enter the code to disable Call Waiting. Call Waiting can cause your session to end if you receive a call while you are connected. Contact your local phone company for the code that is appropriate for you. Use calling card If you want to use your calling card when dialing your ISP or dial-in server, check the Use calling box to select it. Enter your calling card number on the Use calling card line. IMPORTANT

number in the Phone # field and the phone number in the Use calling card field. Because MCI works differently, enter the MCI calling card 4 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 593 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages, press Down on the 5-way. To see more information, open the Options menu and select View Log. Connecting to your service After you set up your Connection and Network Preferences, establishing a connection to your ISP or your companys network (dial-in server) is easy. 0 1 2 3 Open Network Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Network. Make the connection:

a. Make sure the service profile you want to use appears in the Service field. If not, select it. b. Select Connect. End the connection when youve finished using it:

a. Select Disconnect. b. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 594 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Adding details to a service profile If youre using one of the predefined service profiles, you probably need to enter only your username, password, and telephone number. If youre creating a new service profile, you may need to use the Details dialog box to add more information to your service profile. 0 1 2 Open Network Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Network. Open the Details dialog box:

a. Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to add details to. b. Select Details. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 595 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Key Term DNS Domain name system. The Internet uses this system to translate the names of host computers into IP addresses. A DNS number identifies the server that handles the translation. Each IP address has four numbers (from 0 to 255) that are separated by periods. Key Term IP Internet protocol. Everyone who logs in to the Internet needs a unique identifier (an IP address). Some networks dynamically assign a temporary IP address upon login while others assign a permanent IP address. 3 4 Adjust any of the following settings:

NOTE Ask your ISP or system administrator if you need information on any of these settings. Connection type Select the pick list and choose the communication protocol for this service: PPP, SLIP, or CSLIP. Most email applications use the PPP or SLIP protocols. Idle timeout Select the pick list and select how long your device waits before dropping the connection with your ISP or dial-in server when you switch out of an application that requires a connection: 1 Minute, 2 Minutes, 3 Minutes, or Never. Query DNS Check the Query DNS box if youre not sure whether you need to enter DNS addresses. Many systems do not require that you enter DNS addresses. If you do need DNS addresses, uncheck the DNS box, tap the space to the left of each period in the Primary and Secondary DNS fields, and then enter the appropriate sections of each address. IP Address Check the IP Address box to use a temporary IP address. Uncheck the IP Address box to enter a permanently assigned address. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 596 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 0 Deleting a service profile 1 Open Network Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Network. 2 Delete the service you want to delete:

a. Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to delete. b. Open the menus. c. Select Delete in the Service menu. d. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 597 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip Windows You can also create login scripts with a text editor on your desktop computer. Create a file with the extension PNC, and then install the file on your device using Quick Install. Did You Know?

Your login scripts can also use non-ASCII and literal characters. Creating login scripts A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network serverfor example, your corporate network or your ISP. A login script is associated with a specific service profile created in Network Preferences. A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system administrator if you log in to the corporate servers from your device using a phone/modem or network connection. The script is generally prepared by the system administrator and distributed to users who need it. It automates the events that must take place to establish a connection between your device and the corporate servers. You can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in the Login Script dialog box. Some commands, such as Send, require you to supply additional information. If the command requires additional info, a field appears to the right of the command where you can enter the info. 0 1 Open Network Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select Network. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 598 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 3 Open the Login Script dialog box:

a. Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to add a script to. b. Select Details. c. Select Script. Select the End pick list and select one of the following commands from the list:

Wait For Tells your device to wait for specific characters from the server before executing the next command. Wait For Prompt Detects a challenge-response prompt coming from the server, and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value. You then enter the challenge value into your token card, which in turn generates a response value for you to enter on your device. This is a two-part command that is separated by a vertical bar (|) on the input line. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 599 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Contd. Send Transmits specific characters to the server that youre connecting to. Send CR Transmits a carriage return or line feed (LF) character to the server. Send User ID Transmits the User Name field from Network Preferences. Send Password Transmits the Password field from Network Preferences. If you didnt enter a password, this command prompts you to enter one. The Password command is usually followed by a Send CR command. Delay Tells your device to wait a specific number of seconds before going to the next command in the login script. Get IP Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your device. This command is used with SLIP connections. Prompt Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter certain text (for example, a password or a security code). End Identifies the last line in the login script. 4 Complete the script:

a. Repeat step 3 until the login script is complete. b. Select OK, and then select OK again. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 600 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip For more info on creating plug-in applications, contact Developer Support at PalmSource. Adding plug-in applications You can create plug-in applications containing script commands that extend the functionality of the built-in script commands. A plug-in application is a standard PRC application that you install on your device just like any other application. After you install the plug-in application, you can use the new script commands in a login script. For example, you might use a plug-in application in the following situations:

You need the login script to properly respond to different connection scenarios defined by the authentication server. You want to perform conditional tests and branching as part of the login process. Plug-in applications have the following characteristics:

Written in C language Compiled into a device executable Called properly from a login script Able to return control to a login script after it terminates Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS software, such as Metrowerks CodeWarrior tools. LifeDrive from palmOne 601 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device

Before You Begin You must purchase and install a compatible VPN client onto your device. You also need the VPN settings from your corporate system administrator. Did You Know?

Once you have installed and set up a VPN, you can connect or disconnect VPN from within the web browser. Setting up a VPN If you want to use your device to access your corporate email account or other files on your corporate server, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your device. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate server through the companys firewall (security layer). Without a VPN, you cannot pass through the firewall to gain access to the server. You need to set up a VPN to access a corporate server in either of the following situations:

Your companys wireless local area network (LAN) is located outside the firewall. Your companys wireless LAN is located inside the firewall, but you are trying to access the network from outside the firewall (for example, from a public location or at home). Check with your companys system administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the corporate network. If you need a VPN, you must either use the Enterprise Software link on the software installation CD to download and purchase a VPN client, or purchase and install a third-

party VPN client, to use this feature. 0 Setting up a VPN account on your device 1 Open VPN Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select VPN. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 602 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 Set up a VPN account on your device:

a. Select the Add Account box. b. Follow the instructions to enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 603 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 0 Establishing a VPN connection 1 Open VPN Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select VPN. 2 Establish a VPN connection:

a. Select a VPN account from the VPN Account pick list. b. Select Connect VPN. c. If prompted, enter your VPN username and password. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 604 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 0 Ending a VPN connection 1 Open VPN Preferences:

a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs

. c. Select VPN. Select Disconnect VPN. Done 2 LifeDrive from palmOne 605 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with customization or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Your LifeDrive Moving Around Entering Information Locating the input area and other controls on your device Opening applications Using menus Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter information Using ShortCuts to quickly enter text phrases Connecting Customizing Bluetooth communication settings Privacy Keeping information private by locking your device with a password Categories Creating categories so you can organize your applications and information World Clock Viewing the date and time in other cities LifeDrive from palmOne 606 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device In this chapter What type of expansion cards can I use?

How can expansion cards help me?

Removing an expansion card Inserting an expansion card Opening an application on an expansion card Opening files on an expansion card Viewing card information Renaming a card Copying applications to an expansion card Removing all information from a card Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne A Chinese proverb says, Life just gives you time and space; it's up to you to fill it. But doesnt it always seem that no matter how much space you have, you still need more?

Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and limitless answer to the storage dilemma. When one card becomes full, simply use another card. Use the Camera Companion application on your device to work with photos and videos from a digital camera card. Also use expansion cards to install and run cool games and other types of software, from dictionaries to travel guides, on your device. Benefits of expansion cards Import photos and videos from a digital camera card, and then delete them from the card to use it again Back up info Add more games and other software Add accessories Store, carry, and exchange info 607 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Key Term SDIO An acronym for Secure Digital input/

output. Tip Looking for a handy way to carry your expansion cards? You can purchase a variety of carrying cases. Visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive and click the Accessories link. What type of expansion cards can I use?

Your device is compatible with SDIO, SD, and MultiMediaCard expansion cards. SDIO expansion cards let you add accessories to your device. SD and MultiMediaCard expansion cards let you store information and applications. Your device also works with memory cards from your digital camera. How can expansion cards help me?

Work with photos and videos. Camera Companion application on your device to import photos and videos and work with them on your device or copy them to your computer. Insert a memory card from your digital camera and use the Back up info. Make a copy of your important information for safekeeping in case your device becomes damaged or is stolen. Add games and other software. Purchase popular games, dictionaries, travel guides, and more. To check out the variety of expansion cards available for your device, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive and click the Accessories link. Add accessories. Attach SDIO accessories, such as a presentation module, to your device. Store all your info. Never worry about running out of space on your device. Purchase as many expansion cards as you need to store your music, photos, videos, and other information. Expansion cards come in a variety of capacities, and theyre very small, easy to store, and affordably priced. LifeDrive from palmOne 608 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tip To prevent damaging the card and the info on it, always wait for your device to finish writing to the expansion card before you remove the card from the slot. Removing an expansion card NOTE Your device comes with a dummy card inserted into the expansion card slot. You must remove this card before you can put a real card into the slot. 0 1 2 Push lightly against the card with your thumb until you hear the confirmation tone. Slide the card out of the expansion slot. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 609 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Inserting an expansion card 0 1 2 Insert the card into the expansion slot with the label side facing the front of the device. Push the card in with your thumb until you feel the card click in place and hear the confirmation tone. NOTE No confirmation tone? Check the Sounds & Alerts Preferences to make sure the System Sound setting is turned on. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 610 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Did You Know?

You can install applications and other files to an expansion card during synchronization. Tip When the highlight on Applications View is not active, you can press and hold the Select button to open the category pick list. Opening an application on an expansion card When you insert an expansion card into the expansion slot, your device adds the expansion card to the category list in the upper-right corner of Applications View. You can easily switch between applications installed on your device and on the expansion card. NOTE Some applications may not run correctly when you install them on an expansion card. Try installing these applications on your device instead. If you still have problems, contact the developer. 0 1 2 3 Insert the expansion card. Go to Applications and select the expansion card from the category pick list. Category pick list Select an application icon to open that application. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 611 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tip Use LifeDrive Manager

(Windows only) to install applications and transfer folders and files from your Windows computer to an expansion card. Opening files on an expansion card You can open files on an expansion card when you insert the card into the expansion slot. 0 1 2 3 Open the application associated with the files you want to open. Insert the expansion card. Select the entry you want to view. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 612 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Viewing card information Its easy to forget which files you put on a particular expansion card. When you have a card inserted into the expansion slot, use the Card Info application to view the card name and type, available storage space, and a summary of the cards contents. Go to Applications and select Card Info

. Card name Space available Summary of contents Tip Reading and writing info on an expansion card uses more battery power than doing the same task on your device. If you have enough space on your device, consider copying the info to your device. Tip If your devices battery is very low, access to the expansion card may be disabled. If this occurs, recharge your device as soon as possible. Did You Know?

You can view and access files or folders on an expansion card using the Files application on your device, and manage your files on a card using LifeDrive Manager or Drive Mode. LifeDrive from palmOne 613 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tip You can also use the Files application to rename your card. Renaming a card The expansion card name appears in the category pick list and in other lists that let you choose where to store your info. When you buy a new card, give it a name that helps you remember whats on the card. You can rename the card later if you decide to store different info on the card. 0 1 2 3 4 Insert an expansion card. Go to Applications and select Card Info

. Open the Rename Card dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Rename Card on the Card menu. Enter the new name for the card, and then select Rename. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 614 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tip If you use a card reader to view your card on a computer, the file names may differ from the names you see on your device. Did You Know?

Some applications, such as Media, let you copy or move info between your device and an expansion card. See the information on each application for details. Copying applications to an expansion card 0 1 2 3 Insert the expansion card, and then go to Applications. Open the Copy dialog box:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Copy on the App menu. Copy the application:

NOTE A lock appears next to applications that are copy-protected. You cannot copy or beam these applications. a. Select the Copy From pick list and select Device. b. Select the application you want to copy. c. Select Copy. d. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 615 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Removing all information from a card Formatting a card removes all of its info and prepares it to accept new applications and files. IMPORTANT

backup application and turns the card into a blank memory card. We do not recommend formatting backup cards. Formatting removes the 0 1 2 3 Insert an expansion card. Go to Applications and select Card Info

. Format the card:

a. Open the menus. b. Select Format Card on the Card menu. c. When asked if you want to format the card, select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 616 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with expansion cards or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Sharing Exchanging applications and information with other Palm Powered devices by exchanging cards or beaming items between devices Sending applications and information to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device Managing Info Adding applications from your computer to an expansion card, and installing other files such as photos, videos, or music LifeDrive from palmOne 617 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Your device is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide you with years of trouble-free service. Taking care of your device helps keep it working properly and ensures that its available when you need it. Device dos and donts To protect your device from damage and ensure reliable performance, follow these guidelines. Device dos Always store your device in the included pouch when not in use. Use only the stylus to tap the screenno pens, pencils, paper clips, or other sharp objects. Use only the supplied AC charger to charge your device. Keep the battery charged. Keep the screen free of dust (or anything else that could make it dirty). For general cleaning, use a soft, damp cloth. If the screen becomes dirty, use a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window-cleaning solution. Use only 3.5mm stereo headphones (sold separately) in your devices headphone jack. LifeDrive from palmOne 618 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Be sure to get rid of any static electricity buildup before you connect your device to any cable or accessory. If you are using your device in Drive Mode for an extended period of time or you are using the Camera Companion application, or if the battery is low while in Drive Mode or while using Camera Companion, keep your device connected to the AC charger plugged into a power outlet. Synchronize often to maintain a backup copy of your important information on your computer. Device donts IMPORTANT

inside. Attempting to remove the hard drive voids the warranty on your device. Do not open your device for any reason. There are no user-serviceable parts Do not drop, bang, or otherwise cause a strong impact to your device. If you drop the device while the amber indicator light is flashingindicating that the hard drive is processing informationyou may damage the hard drive. Do not carry your device in your back pocket; you might sit on it by mistake. Do not let your device get wet; dont even leave it in a damp location. Do not expose your device to very hot or cold temperatures, including placing it near a heater, leaving it in the trunk of a car, or setting it by a window in direct sunlight. Do not carry or use your device at extremely high altitudes, unless youre in an airplane. Do not place your device near strong magnetic fields such as wireless modems. This could cause loss of information on the hard drive. LifeDrive from palmOne 619 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Resetting your device On rare occasions your device may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen. In this case, you need to reset your device. Doing a soft reset A soft reset tells your device to stop what its doing and start over again. None of your information will be lost. After a soft reset, a screen appears that lets you reset the date and time, if needed. To do a soft reset, use the tip of the stylus to gently press the reset button on the bottom of your device. Reset button If your device does not respond after a soft reset, you need to do a hard reset. LifeDrive from palmOne 620 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Doing a hard reset Only do a hard reset if a soft reset doesnt solve your problem, or if you want to clear all of your information from your device. IMPORTANT A hard reset deletes all records and entries stored on your device, including the

username that identifies the device. This is another reason why it's important to synchronize often, so you have an up-to-date backup available. Before you do a hard reset, be sure to synchronize. Applications, files, and folders moved to your device's internal drive with File Transfer are not automatically backed up during synchronization. Use File Transfer to copy or move the updated files and folders to your computer, or to back up the contents of your device's entire internal drive to your computer. 0 1 2 3 4 Slide the power switch to the right and hold it in that position. While holding the switch to the right, use the tip of the stylus (or a similar object without a sharp tip) to gently press and release the reset button on the bottom of your device. Wait for the Palm Powered logo to appear, and then release the power switch. When you see the message that warns you about erasing all of the info on your device, do one of the following:

Press Up on the 5-way navigator to finish the reset and show the touchscreen. Press any other button to do a soft reset. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 621 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Restoring your information after a hard reset If you synchronized before doing a hard reset, you can now put that information back on your device. However, you may need to re-enter some of your personal settings, as well as your color-

coded categories in Calendar. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 Open the Custom menu in the HotSync application:

a. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of the screen. b. Click Custom. Select the correct username from the list at the top of the box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 622 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device 3 4 5 Set the transfer options:

a. Select an application in the Conduit list, and then click Change. b. Select Desktop overwrites device. NOTE This change applies only to the next synchronization. c. Click OK. Repeat step 3 for the other applications in the list that you want to restore, and then click Done. Synchronize your device with your computer. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 623 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics:

Managing Info Creating a backup of your information Customizing Customizing your device again after doing a hard reset My Device Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/

mylifedrive. Support If youre having problems with resets or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/

support. LifeDrive from palmOne 624 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Although we cant anticipate all the questions you might have, this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions. Setup Nothing happens when I insert the CD. WINDOWS ONLY 1. Click Start on your computer, and then select Run. 2. Click Browse and navigate to your CD-ROM drive. 3. Select Autorun, click Open, and then click OK. I cannot install Palm Desktop software. WINDOWS ONLY Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer. Close any open applications. Make sure your computer has at least 170MB of disk space available. Delete all temporary files. LifeDrive from palmOne 625 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Run ScanDisk (or another disk verification tool) on your computer. Install the latest Windows software updates to your computer. If you are upgrading from an older Palm Powered device, remove any previous version(s) of Palm Desktop software by clicking Start, navigating to Settings, and clicking Control Panel. Click Add or Remove Programs. Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software. MAC ONLY Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer. Quit any open applications. Make sure your computer has at least 190MB of disk space available. Install the latest Mac software updates to your computer. If you are upgrading from an older Palm Powered device, remove any previous version(s) of Palm Desktop software. Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software. LifeDrive from palmOne 626 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Device IMPORTANT

device voids the warranty and is not recommended under any circumstances. Do not open your device; there are no serviceable parts inside. Opening your I want to see how much battery life I have left. A battery icon periodically to see if your device needs to be recharged. If the battery becomes low, a message appears on the screen prompting you to recharge the battery. appears at the top of Favorites and Applications views. Check the icon Im not sure when I need to recharge my device. We recommend that you recharge your device for at least half an hour every day. Ideally, connect your device to a power source every night and recharge it while you sleep. My battery is drained. The memory on your device is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained completely. When you recharge your device, all of your existing information, both in program memory and on the hard drive, should appear. My battery drains too quickly. You can conserve battery life by doing any of the following:

Adjust the screen brightness. Reduce the Auto-off setting. Use Keylock to prevent your device from turning on by accident. Stop music or video playback when not in use. LifeDrive from palmOne 627 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Tip After a soft reset, the Preferences screen appears with the Date &

Time option highlighted so you can reset the date and time if necessary. Keep your device connected to the AC charger plugged into a power outlet when using Drive Mode or Camera Companion for an extended period of time. Respond to or cancel alerts promptly. Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology and Wi-Fi functionality when not in use. If using Auto Sync to automatically retrieve email messages, set the time interval to one hour or less often. Minimize use of the expansion slot. When I connect my device to the AC charger, it does not charge. Confirm that your device is firmly connected to the AC charger. Confirm that your AC charger is plugged into an AC outlet that has power. A lightning bolt over the battery icon indicates that your device is charging. If your battery is completely drained, youll need to charge it for a few minutes before you can turn it on and see the battery icon. My device is not responding. On rare occasions your device may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen. If this happens, first check that Keylock is not turned on. If Keylock is off and your device is still not responding, you need to reset your device. A soft reset tells your device to stop and start over again. This does not affect any of the information or applications on your device. NOTE If you had a network connection that was cut off, your device may not respond for up to 30 seconds. Wait 30 seconds before performing a soft reset. LifeDrive from palmOne 628 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Tip When you purge or delete items, you are given the option to save an archive copy on your computer the next time you synchronize. If your device does not respond after a soft reset, you need to perform a hard reset. If your device still does not respond after a reset, check your third-party applications for incompatible applications. I dont see anything on my devices screen. Press an application button to ensure that your device is turned on. If your device was exposed to cold, make sure it is at room temperature. Charge your device. Perform a soft reset. If your device still doesnt turn on, perform a hard reset. I get a warning message telling me my device memory is full. The storage volume refers to your devices program memory. If you get a message that your program memory is full, try the following:

If you have installed additional applications on your device, remove them to recover memory. Purge items from Calendar and Tasks. This deletes Tasks items and past Calendar events from the memory of your device. Delete unused memos, photos, and other items, or save them to an expansion card. Move infrequently used applications to the Applications folder on the hard drive. Note that some applications must be installed in program memory in order to run correctly. My device keeps turning itself off. Your device is designed to turn itself off after a period of inactivity. This period can be set at 30 seconds or at one, two, or three minutes. Check the Auto-off after setting on the Power Preferences screen. LifeDrive from palmOne 629 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions My device is not making any sounds. Check the System, Alarm, and Game Sound settings. I get a blank screen when I reset my device. It takes a little while for your device to reset when you press the reset button. Resetting is done when the Date & Time Preferences screen appears. The current date and time are incorrect. The current date and time are tied to the Location setting. If you change the date and time without changing the Location setting, the current date and time may appear incorrect. My application is responding slowly. WINDOWS ONLY If you are transferring files using LifeDrive Manager and you are working with a large application on your device such as a game, the application may perform slowly. Wait until the file transfer has finished before you use the application. Moving around I cant find the icon I want in Applications View. Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select All. You may need to scroll down a bit, but you should now see an icon for each of the applications on your device. The application you want may be installed on your devices internal drive. To view these applications, select the category pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select Internal Drive. LifeDrive from palmOne 630 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Some of the applications that come with your device are not preinstalled. You need to install these extra applications from the software installation CD. If you have an expansion card inserted in the expansion slot on your device, the application you want may be installed on the card instead of on your device. To view the applications installed on the card, select the pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select the expansion cards name from the list. Entering information My device doesnt respond to taps correctly. If your device is not responding to taps correctly, you need to align the screen. When I tap Menu on the status bar, nothing happens. Tap the upper-left corner of the screen to try and open the menus. Align the screen and try tapping Menu again. If nothing happens, you may be in an application or screen that does not use menus. Switch to a different application and try tapping Menu. If it works in the second application, then the first does not use menus. If tapping Menu does not work in the second application, try aligning the screen again. I cant get my device to recognize my handwriting. For your device to recognize handwriting input with the stylus, you need to use Graffiti 2 writing. Use the Graffiti 2 help to learn how to write characters. NOTE Your device recognizes strokes entered with the stylus other than Graffiti 2 strokes in the Note Pad application only. Make the Graffiti 2 character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area, not on the display part of the screen. If you want to write on the display part of the screen, turn full-screen writing on. LifeDrive from palmOne 631 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Write Graffiti 2 strokes for lowercase letters in the left side, strokes for capital letters in the middle, and strokes for numbers in the right side of the Graffiti 2 writing area. Make sure that Graffiti 2 is not in shift mode or in Punctuation Shift mode. The info I entered does not appear in an application. Check the Categories pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View. Select All to display all the records for the application. Did you set private records to be hidden? Check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Make sure Show Completed Tasks is selected. I dont know how to save the info I entered in an application. Each time you complete an entry such as a contact, memo, or note, your device automatically saves the information you entered. You dont have to do anything special to save your info. To protect your info and create a backup of your info, do a full sync often to back up the info on your device to your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne 632 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Tip Need more help with synchronizing your device? Open Palm Desktop software, go to the Help menu, and select HotSync Online Troubleshooting Guide. Synchronizing I cant synchronize my device with my computer. NOTE You must install the software installation CD before you can synchronize. Make sure the USB sync cable is connected securely. Make sure the date on your computer matches the date on your device. Read the HotSync log for the user account for which you are synchronizing. WINDOWS ONLY Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Make sure Local USB has a checkmark next to it. If not, click it. NOTE If you dont see the HotSync Manager icon, click Start in the Windows taskbar, and then select Programs. Go to the palmOne program group and select HotSync Manager. MAC ONLY Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled: Open the Palm folder and double-click the HotSync Manager icon. On the HotSync Controls tab, be sure Enabled is selected. If it is not, click it. Disconnect the USB sync cable from your computer, and then reconnect the cable and restart your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne 633 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions

Before You Begin You must have completed CD installation and chosen Palm Desktop software as your desktop application for synchronization in order to switch to Outlook. Note that you can choose Outlook as your synchronization software for Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos during CD installation. When I synchronize, nothing happens on Palm Desktop software, and my device times out. Perform a soft reset. Make sure that HotSync Manager is running on your computer. Make a copy of the folder containing your information. This folder is named with either your full username or a shortened version of the name. Uninstall and then reinstall Palm Desktop software. Turn on your device, and go to Applications. Select HotSync

, and then select Local. I want to change from synchronizing my device with Palm Desktop software to synchronizing with Outlook. WINDOWS ONLY During CD installation, you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your device. You may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time. But if Microsoft Outlook already contains all of your contacts, appointments, tasks, and notes, you can change your synchronization method so that your device synchronizes with Outlook instead. You can also change from Outlook to Palm Desktop software. NOTE If you choose to synchronize with Outlook, info from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with info in Outlook. You can also set up the VersaMail application to synchronize email messages on your device with email in Outlook. Other info, such as voice memos and notes, is synchronized with info in Palm Desktop software. 1. Insert the CD into your computer. 2. Select Change your synchronization method. 3. Follow the onscreen instructions for the desktop software you want to use. LifeDrive from palmOne 634 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions I cant synchronize my device with Microsoft Outlook. WINDOWS ONLY NOTE If you choose to synchronize your device with Outlook, information from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with info in Outlook. Other information, such as voice memos and notes, is synchronized with info in Palm Desktop software. Click the HotSync Manager icon and select Custom. Check the following:

Make sure that you have the correct username selected from the drop-down list. Make sure that the applications you want are set to synchronize the files. If not, select each application, click Change, and then choose Synchronize the files. Make sure that the correct application name is selected. For example, the older version of Calendar was called Date Book. If you have upgraded from an older device, make sure that Calendar is set to Synchronize the files, and Date Book is set to Do Nothing. If you synchronize your device with more than one computer, click Settings and select Enable synchronization to multiple PCs for each application you want to synchronize. This helps avoid duplicating the same information on a single computer. NOTE Check the Set as default box to use this setting each time you synchronize. Otherwise, it applies during the next synchronization only. Be sure that the application you want is installed. Reinstall the HotSync Manager and make sure that the application is selected. Reinstall Palm Desktop software and select the option to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook. I cant synchronize wirelessly using my devices Bluetooth technology. Make sure that the HotSync Manager is running on your desktop computer. The HotSync Manager icon must appear in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Click the HotSync Manager icon and verify that there is a checkmark next to Local. LifeDrive from palmOne 635 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Your device may not be able to recognize the virtual serial port on your Windows computer. Try validating the virtual serial port youre using, or create a different virtual port and change the HotSync Manager settings to use the new virtual port. To change the virtual serial port, click the HotSync Manager icon Serial port pick list. Select Setup, and then select the Local tab. Select a port from the When you synchronize wirelessly, your device attempts to connect to a Bluetooth virtual serial port on your computer. First it looks for a Bluetooth serial HotSync port. If it cannot find that port, it then looks for a generic Bluetooth serial port. However, some generic Bluetooth serial ports do not support synchronization. Refer to the documentation that came with your computer operating system for instructions on creating/changing the virtual port for serial communication. If the virtual serial port you want to use is used by other applications, exit those applications before setting up your computer for wireless synchronization. Some of my applications do not synchronize. If you have synchronized successfully but you cant find the information from your device on your computer, check to see that you have the correct username selected for viewing information. NOTE If you upgraded from a previous device, go to www.palmOne.com/support, select your country, select the LifeDrivedevice from the main page, and click the Upgrade link. WINDOWS ONLY Click the HotSync Manager icon Custom. Check that the application is set to synchronize the files. If it is not, select the application, click Change, and then select Synchronize the files. Check the Set as default box to use this setting each time you synchronize. Otherwise, it applies during the next synchronization only. in the lower-right corner of your screen, and then select MAC ONLY Double-click the HotSync Manager icon Conduit Settings. Select your username from the User pop-up menu, and be sure that the application is set to synchronize. in the Palm folder. From the HotSync menu, select LifeDrive from palmOne 636 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions I cant open the HotSync Manager. On a Windows computer, uninstall Palm Desktop software from your computer, and then reinstall the software from the software installation CD. On a Mac computer, just reinstall Palm Desktop software. When I synchronize, I receive the 8009 error message: An application has failed to respond to a HotSync notification. WINDOWS ONLY The 8009 error indicates that the Windows registry is corrupt. You need to rebuild the HotSync Manager registry entries. For information on rebuilding the registry entries, go to www.palmOne.com/support and search the palmOne Knowledge Library for error 8009. My files didnt install during synchronization. If files do not install after you synchronize, the file type was not recognized. On your device, open the application associated with those files. Then synchronize again. If the files remain in the palmOne Quick Install list on your computer (Windows only), they are not associated with an application on your device and cannot be installed by synchronizing. You can install the files using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac or Windows). If you are trying to install files to an expansion card, make sure that a card is inserted into your devices expansion slot before you synchronize. I cant add more files to the Quick Install list. Make sure the dialog box that confirms where the files will be installed is closed. You cannot add more files to the list when the confirmation dialog box is open. LifeDrive from palmOne 637 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions When I add a zipped file (ZIP) to Quick Install, some of the files dont appear in the Quick Install list. Unzip the file with a file compression utility, such as WinZip, and then add the unzipped files to Quick Install. I receive an authentication error when I try to synchronize wirelessly through a LAN access point. Make sure you entered the correct username and password for the selected network service profile in the Network Preferences screen. When I try to synchronize wirelessly through a LAN access point, it connects, but nothing happens. Make sure that Network is selected in the HotSync Manager menu on your computer. Contact your system administrator to make sure your network computer is properly set up. I want to synchronize my computer with more than one device. If the computer running Palm Desktop software synchronizes with more than one device, each device should have a unique name. Synchronizing more than one device with the same username causes unpredictable results and, potentially, loss of your personal information. Assign a username to your device the first time you synchronize. If you are synchronizing with Outlook, make sure the right profile is selected for the applications you want to synchronize in HotSync Manager. From the Palm Desktop home screen, click the HotSync Manager, and then select Custom. LifeDrive from palmOne 638 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions LifeDrive Manager/Drive Mode I cant move or copy files using LifeDrive Manager. WINDOWS ONLY Make sure your device is connected securely to the USB sync cable, and that the cable is connected to a USB port on the back of your computer. Make sure no other applicationssuch as HotSync Manager or Pocket Tunesare using the USB sync cable. To check, press the Home button Favorites opens, then no other applications are using the sync cable. If Favorites does not open, then another application may be using the cable. If Try to synchronize. If synchronizing doesnt work, LifeDrive Manager doesnt work, either. If LifeDrive Manager was working but stops, disconnect and reconnect your device. If this does not solve the problem, perform a soft reset. I cant see a file I moved from my computer to my device. Your device stores information in two places: in program memory and on the hard drive. When you view files on your device using LifeDrive Manager on your computer or Files on your device, only files on the drive are displayed. If you used Quick Install to move a file to your device, depending on the file type, the file may be located in your devices program memory. If this is the case, you cant view the file using LifeDrive Manager or Files, but you can access it by using the appropriate application. If you want to be able to see the file in the LifeDrive Manager window or the Files screen, copy it to your devices internal drive using LifeDrive Manager. LifeDrive from palmOne 639 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions I made updates to a file on my device, but when I synchronize, the changes dont show up in the file on my computer. If you use LifeDrive Manager to transfer a file or folder to your device, you must select whether that item synchronizes. You can either select the Keep synchronized option during file transfer, or make the file or folder a sync item once it is on the hard drive. If you move an item into a sync folder on the hard drive, the item automatically synchronizes. However, the item synchronizes to the copy of the sync folder on your computer, not to its original locationthe version in the original location remains unchanged. File transfer is taking place slowly. If you are working with large files or using large applications such as games on your device, file transfer may go more slowly. Quit all device applications to speed file transfer. When I try to delete a file using LifeDrive Manager, a message appears saying the file is busy. If you are working with a file on your devicefor example, editing a document or listening to a music fileyou cannot delete the file using LifeDrive Manager. Close the file on your device and then delete it. I cant write a memo or enter a contact when my device is in Drive Mode. When your device is in Drive Mode, it works just like any external drive such as a CD drive. You cannot enter or work with information directly on your device while it is in Drive Mode. To work with information directly on your device, turn Drive Mode off. When your device is in Drive Mode and is connected to a computer, you can open files from your devices internal drive on the computer using Windows Explorer or My Computer (on a Windows computer) or Finder (on a Mac computer), and work with them there. Your device still displays alerts, such as for appointments or new email messages, when in Drive Mode. LifeDrive from palmOne 640 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions My device and/or the expansion card is not showing up as a drive in Windows Explorer or My Computer when I have the device in Drive Mode. WINDOWS ONLY When you turn on Drive Mode, connect your device to your computer, and then open My Computer or Windows Explorer, the window you open shows two new drives. These drives are assigned the next available drive letters, for example, E:, F:, and so on. If no letters are available because you have multiple external devices connected to your computer (such as a card reader or a camera), or because you are using mapped network drives, the window does not display your device or the expansion card as a drive. To display them, remove some of the external devices connected to your computer, or remove some of the mapped network drives. Calendar I selected the Today button, but it does not show the correct date. Make sure the Set Date box on the Date & Time Preferences screen displays the current date. I created an event, but it doesnt appear in Week View. If scroll arrows appear on the right of your screen, scroll down to see if the event appears farther down the screen. If you have two or more events with the same start time, the events appear as multiple bars starting at the same time in Week View. To see the overlapping events, select the individual bars, or select Day View. For more information, see Finding events that overlap. If you marked the event as private, check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records. LifeDrive from palmOne 641 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Time zones dont appear on my Palm Desktop software. Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones. Only Outlook recognizes times zones. I set the global time zone preference, but only some of my events are responding to my time zone change. Only new events created after the preference is set are affected. The events you created earlier without time zones do not have the time zone set. You can edit the earlier events to include a time zone. I created my event with a time zone, but only that event is responding to my time zone change. When you create an event with a time zone setting, only that event is affected. To have all events automatically include a time zone setting, set the New events include time zones preference. Memos Im having problems listing memos the way I want to see them. If you cannot manually arrange the order of memos on the list screen, open the Options menu and select Preferences. Make sure that Sort by is set to Manual. If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize, the memos on your device still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting. In other words, the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 642 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Note Pad Im having problems listing notes the way I want to see them. If you cannot manually arrange the order of notes on the list screen, select Preferences from the Options menu and make sure that Sort by is set to Manual. If you choose to view your notes alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize, the notes on your device still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting. In other words, the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your device. Media I cant find the Media icon in Applications. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select Multimedia. You should now see an icon for the Media application. In Favorites View, the entry associated with the Media application is called Photos & Videos. You can edit the Favorites list to change this to Media, as well as to create or change any other favorite file, folder, web link, or application. LifeDrive from palmOne 643 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Pocket Tunes I would like better-quality sound during playback. You can save music files in either MP3 or RMJ format. RMJ is a proprietary format used by the RealPlayer desktop. In either case, saving at a lower bit rate creates a smaller file size, but also gives a lower playback quality. Increase the bit rate to improve playback sound quality, but remember that this increases file size. My music file stutters during playback. WINDOWS ONLY If you are transferring files using LifeDrive Manager and you are listening to music files on your device, the music playback may stutter. Wait until the file transfer is finished to listen to the music file. When I save songs from a CD, I do not see the song title or artist name. When capturing songs from a CD, you must have an active Internet connection to obtain song title and artist information. This information is supplied from the GraceNote server on the web. Tasks The info I entered does not appear in an application. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. If Show Completed Tasks is selected, deselect it to display the missing tasks. If you marked the task as private, check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records. LifeDrive from palmOne 644 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Connecting wirelessly My passkey is rejected when I attempt to form a trusted pair with my mobile phone. Some mobile phones require that you enter the passkey within a specific time frame. Make sure you have a passkey in mind and that you enter it immediately when prompted. If your passkey is rejected, your phone may have a preassigned passkey; see the documentation included with your phone for information. The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pair, Bluetooth link, or bonded pair. My device cannot connect to my mobile phone. Use the following steps to test the connection:

1. Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar to open the Bluetooth settings screen. You can select the indicator even if it is dimmed. 2. Make sure On is selected. 3. Select the Service pick list and select the service that you want to use to connect to your phone. 4. Select Connect. If the connection is successful, open the application that requires the connection and complete the desired task. LifeDrive from palmOne 645 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions If the connection is not successful, try the following steps:

Make sure that your phone is equipped with Bluetooth technology, that Bluetooth technology is enabled, and that the power is on. You may need to set up a connection with your phone. See the documentation included with your phone for assistance with completing the connection setup process. My phone connection drops before I finish using it. You need to increase the Idle timeout setting on the Network Preferences Details screen. I get an error message when I try to dial a phone number using my device. Make sure that the proper phone driver is installed on your device. You may need to set up a connection with your phone. See the documentation included with your phone for assistance with completing the connection setup process. Check the Phone Preferences screen and make sure the correct phone connection is selected. LifeDrive from palmOne 646 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions The VersaMail application I am having problems accessing my account. Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set it up. If you followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems using the account, verify that the account complies with your email providers requirements by following these steps:

Verify both your password and your username for your email account. If you are connecting using a mobile phone through the built-in Bluetooth technology on your device, a cable, or the IR port on your device, verify that you have either a data-enabled GSM or a high-speed GPRS account with your wireless service provider. Some wireless service providers require you to be on their network to use your email account. If this is the case, be sure to use your providers network as the connection type for the account. Some wireless service providers have other requirements specific to their service. For example, Yahoo! requires you to pay for a POP account in order to download email messages from your Yahoo! account to your device. Check with your service provider to see if any provider-specific requirements exist. Service provider settings frequently change. If your email account was working but you are currently experiencing problems, check with your service provider to see if any of the account settings have changed. I am having problems sending and receiving email. Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common due to server problems or poor wireless coverage. If you have problems sending or receiving mail for an extended period of time, check with your ISP or email service provider to verify that the service is working properly. Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to send and receive email on a wireless device. Several providers, like Hotmail, do not offer this option at all. LifeDrive from palmOne 647 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Auto Sync is not working. If Auto Sync is occurring and you turn your handheld off or the connection to your email service provider is disconnected, Auto Sync fails. If you are attempting Auto Sync over a network, you must be in range of a network access point for Auto Sync to work. I can receive email fine, but am having problems sending email. If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them, try these steps, in turn:

Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a wireless device. Several providers do not offer this option at all; other providers require an upgrade to access email on a wireless device. Turn on ESMTP. Many services require authenticated access to use their SMTP servers, or ESMTP. Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail. Many ISPs, such as cable companies, require that you have an Internet connection to their network to send email through their servers. In this case, you can almost always receive email from these accounts, but if you want to send email, you must send it through another server. I cant download any messages. If the program memory on your device fills up, you cannot download any more messages to your device. Delete some messages to free up program memory, and try downloading again. I am trying to synchronize messages on my device with messages on my computer, but its not working. On your computer, check the advanced account settings for the account you want. Make sure that the box is checked that allows you to synchronize messages on your device with messages on your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne 648 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions My vCard or vCal email attachment isnt forwarding correctly. WINDOWS ONLY Palm Desktop software provides several features that work with email client software on a Windows computer. For these features to work correctly, the email client software must be properly set up. Follow these steps to check the settings:

1. Click Start on your computer, and then select Settings. 2. Select Control Panel. 3. Select Internet Options, and then click the Programs tab. 4. Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software. 5. Click OK. 6. Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client. Consult the documentation for your desktop email application for more information. LifeDrive from palmOne 649 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Privacy Ive made records private, but I cant remember my password to display them. First, use the password hint to try to remember the password. If this doesnt help or if you do not have a password hint, you can use Security Preferences to delete the password, but your device deletes all entries marked as private. However, if you synchronize before you delete the password, the synchronization process backs up all entries, whether or not they are marked private. Then you can follow these steps to restore your private entries:

1. In Security Preferences, tap in the password box and enter a guess at the password. 2. In the dialog box that appears, select Lost Password. 3. Select Delete Password to remove the password and delete all private records. 4. Synchronize your device with your computer again. I forgot the password, and my device is locked. First, use the password hint to try to remember the password. If this doesnt help or if you do not have a password hint, you must perform a hard reset to continue using your device. Performing a hard reset deletes all of the information on your device. To protect your info and create a backup of your info, do a full sync to back up the contents of your device to your computer often. LifeDrive from palmOne 650 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Sharing I cant beam information to another device or other device. NOTE Depending on the receiving device model, not all information may be sent correctly. If you are beaming to another Palm Powered device, confirm that your device and the other device are 4 to 39 inches (approximately ten centimeters to one meter) apart and that the path between the two devices is clear of obstacles. Beaming distances to other devices with an IR port may be different. Move your device closer to the receiving device. Make sure the receiving device has beam receive enabled. Perform a soft reset on both your device and the receiving device. Avoid beaming in bright sunlight or fluorescent light. These produce infrared noise that can make beaming go slower or, in some cases, prevent it from working at all. When someone beams information to my device, it doesnt receive the info. If you are receiving info from another Palm Powered device, confirm that your device and the other device are 4 to 39 inches (approximately ten centimeters to one meter) apart and that the path between the two devices is clear of obstacles. Beaming distances to other devices with an IR port may be different. Move your device closer to the sending device. Make sure your device has beam receive enabled. Perform a soft reset on both your device and the beaming device. LifeDrive from palmOne 651 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions When someone beams information to my device, I get a message telling me it is out of memory. Your device requires at least twice the amount of memory available as the info you are receiving. For example, if you are receiving a 30KB application, you must have at least 60KB free. Purge old Calendar events and delete unused or unnecessary applications. I cannot send information to another Bluetooth device. Make sure that Bluetooth communication is enabled on both your device and the other device. Make sure that the receiving device has a compatible Bluetooth application installed. The receiving device must be within range of your device, approximately 25 to 30 feet (8 to 10 meters). Other Bluetooth devices cannot find my device. Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar to open the Bluetooth settings screen and make sure that Bluetooth is turned on. Select Prefs and make sure the Discoverable setting is set to Yes. LifeDrive from palmOne 652 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Problems with incompatible applications palmOne, Inc. works with developers of third-party add-on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your device. Some third-party applications, however, may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your device. Possible symptoms of incompatible applications include:

Fatal errors needing resets Nonresponsive device requiring a reset Slow performance Abnormal screen display or uneven sound quality Problems using Bluetooth technology or other features Problems opening an application Problems synchronizing You can determine whether an incompatible application is causing problems by deleting the application and then operating your device. After you have deleted the application, try to replicate the operation that created the error. If removing the application solves your problem, contact the application developer for a solution. Also, go to www.palmOne.com/us/support/contact/incompatible_apps.html to provide feedback to palmOne on the application. Finding a third-party application that is causing a problem If you have multiple third-party applications installed on your device or have upgraded from an earlier model of a Palm Powered device, perform the following procedure to remove all third-party applications from your device. Once you have removed all of the third-party applications, you can install one application at a time to determine which application is causing the problem. LifeDrive from palmOne 653 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions The following procedures erase all information from your device. Before removing the applications, do a full sync to back up the contents of your device to your computer. 1. On a Windows computer, open the palmOne folder on your computer, and then open the user folder for your device. User folder names are often abbreviated as last name, first initial. On a Mac computer, locate the folder Home/Documents/Palm/Users/<device name>/Backups. 2. Select and drag the Backup folder to the desktop. Make sure you see the Backup folder on the desktop. 3. On a Windows computer, close the palmOne folder. 4. Perform a hard reset. Synchronize your device with your computer to restore info to your devices program memory, and use LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac) to restore info to your devices internal drive. 5. Operate your device and try to replicate problem operations. 6. Do one of the following:

If your device still has problems, review this Common Questions section for solutions to the problem. Fix the problem before reinstalling the third-party applications. If your device no longer has problems, install the third-party applications one application at a time using the following procedure:

a. Open the Backup folder you moved to the desktop in step 2. b. Double-click a PRC file. On a Windows computer, the Quick Install window opens with the PRC file listed. On a Mac computer, the HotSync Manager window opens with the PRC file listed. NOTE Alternatively, on a Mac computer, you can drag the PRC file to the Send To Device droplet instead of double-clicking it. c. Click Done. LifeDrive from palmOne 654 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 31 Common Questions d. Synchronize your device with your computer. e. Operate your device and try to replicate problem operations. f. Do one of the following:

If installing the application re-creates your problem, remove the application and contact the application developer for a solution. Continue to reinstall your applications one application at a time to make sure another application is not creating a problem. If installing the application does not cause a problem, go to step a and reinstall another application. g. Go to www.palmOne.com/us/support/contact/incompatible_apps.html to provide feedback to palmOne on the application. NOTE Some applications use more than one PRC file. You should continue to check each PRC file even if you identify one associated with an application that is causing a problem on your device, since that application may use other PRC files. LifeDrive from palmOne 655 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 32 Getting Help This guide is meant to tell you everything you need to know to set up, customize, and use your device. However, you may occasionally run into an issue that is not addressed in this guide. Here are some resources to help you if that happens. Self-help resources If you run into a problem with your device, be sure to check these resources first:

Answers to common questions about your device and its features The Palm Desktop online Help The Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh Users Guide located in the Documentation folder on your installation CD The palmOne Knowledge Library, accessible at www.palmOne.com/support The most recent palmOne LifeDrivedevice HelpNotes on your regional website LifeDrive from palmOne 656 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential CHAPTER 32 Getting Help Technical support If, after reviewing the self-help resources, you cannot solve your problem, go to www.palmOne.com/support or send an email to your regional Technical Support office. Before requesting technical support, please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the problem. When you do contact Technical Support, please provide the following information:

The name and version of the desktop operating system you are using The actual error message or state you are experiencing The steps you take to reproduce the problem The version of device software you are using and available memory To find version and memory information, follow these steps:

1. Go to Applications. 2. Open the menus. 3. Select Info from the App menu. 4. Select Version for version info, and Size for memory info. LifeDrive from palmOne 657 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential Product Regulatory Information FCC Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC rules.

manufacturers Regulatory Engineering Department. Changes or modifications made without written approval may void the users authority to operate this equipment. Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the IMPORTANT In August 1996, the FCC of the United States with its action in Report and Order FCC 96-326 adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies. The design of this product complies with the FCC guidelines and these international standards. LifeDrive from palmOne 658 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential Exposure to radio frequency energy (SAR) In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, this device and its antenna must not be co-

located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The user of this device should ensure that the operation of this device is in compliance with these provisions. FCC ID: O3W830 Responsible Party:

palmOne, Inc. 400 N. McCarthy Blvd. Milpitas, California 95035 United States of America

(408) 503-7500 Tungsten Product Family Tested to Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Industry Canada The term IC: before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. IC:3905A-830 Canadian Wireless Regulatory Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: a) this device may not cause any interference, and b) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors, and away from windows to prevent maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. CE Declaration of Conformity palmOne, Inc., Declares the Product:

Device PDA & HotSync cable Model Name/Number:

Manufacturers Name:

Manufacturers Address:

LifeDrive palmOne 400 N. McCarthy Blvd. Milpitas, 95035-5112 LifeDrive from palmOne 659 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential Meets the following European Council Directives:

89/336/EEC (EMC Directive) 99/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive). Conforms with the following specifications:

EN 55024: 1998 (Emissions & Immunity) EN55022:1998, CISPR 22 1997, Class B Radiated and Conducted Emissions IEC 61000-4-2, A1 1998-01, ESD Immunity, 4kV Contact, and 8kV Air Discharge IEC 61000-4-3: 1995 RF Immunity, 80-1000MHz, 3V/M, 1kHz, 80% A.M. ENV 50204:1996, RF Immunity, 895-905MHz, 3V/m, 200Hz, 50% AM IEC 61000-4-4: 1995 EFT Immunity, 1kV on AC port, 5/50nSec, 5kHs Rep. Freq. IEC 61000-4-5: 1995 Surge Immunity, 1.2/50uSec, 2kV(peak), Common Mode, 1kV(peak) Differential Mode EN61000-4-6:1996, Conducted Immunity, 150kHz-80MHz, 3V RMS, 1kHz, 80% AM IEC 61000-4-11: 1994, 100% Voltage Dip 0.5 period, 30% Dip 25 periods and >100% Dip 250 periods Authorized palmOne Representative:

Date:

David Waitt palmOne Compliance Engineer April 18, 2005 LifeDrive from palmOne 660 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential Battery Warning Do not mutilate, puncture, or dispose of batteries in fire. The batteries can burst or explode, releasing hazardous chemicals. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions and in accordance with your local regulations. Varning Eksplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. Advarsel!

LithiumbatteriEksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage tilleverandren. Varoitus Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan valmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. Advarsel Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefait av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. Waarschuwing!

Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd. Wanneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA. Uwaga LifeDrive from palmOne 661 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential Intrinsic Safety Warning Warning Explosion Hazard Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2;

When in hazardous location, turn off power before replacing or wiring modules, and, Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-

hazardous. Wireless NoticesUsage Cautions In some situations, the user of the wireless device may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard an airplane, in hospitals, near explosive environment, in hazardous locations etc. If you are not certain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization prior to turning on the device. Static Electricity, ESD, and Your palmOne Device Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence. Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock -- the discharge event -- when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity. ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your palmOne device, from ESD harm. While palmOne has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur. LifeDrive from palmOne 662 SECOND DRAFT palmOne, Inc. Confidential Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The recommendation from palmOne is that you take this precaution before connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the following:

Ground yourself when youre holding your mobile device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground. For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body. Increase the relative humidity of your environment. Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats. Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following:

Low relative humidity. Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton.) The rapidity with which you touch, connect or disconnect electronic devices. While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD. LifeDrive from palmOne 663